Home

Xerox -05W Printer User Manual

1. jeuuoN Snol 3AON Y 454 ouna 815 4 4 OG dT3H 15 eld H Old 64 84 74 094 3 4 Keyboard Configuration Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout Tek VT100 amp Edit Mode Mapping y uo eui Aq papu se s ex Uonouny ou pexJeul Shey POW ur jonuo2 uonounfuoo jeuuoN fox Mv Snol 1X3N 194156 3AON 383H dH 5 Un 1do2x3 3ovds ANI MOVE rus 3 5 DEC LK250 450 Keyboard Layout DEC VT220 Mode Mapping Keyboard Configuration J0433u02 uonounfuoo ui pesn eje pejexoeug ES eBesn fox jeuuoN eui uo eui Aq se s ex Iv 1995 1995 1899 1995
2. Snol 1X3N LOJAS dH 5 a ld eld tld 014 64 84 Z4 94 3 6 Keyboard Configuration DEC LK250 450 Keyboard Layout Tek VT100 amp Edit Mode Mapping eui uo spueBe eui Aq pejeorpur se uonounj s ex pexeuuun Uonouny ou pexJeul Shey SPO ur jonuo uonoun uoo ul pesn shay 105 9 jBuuoN UW 2 gt 5 LH3SNI 1deox3 x os Sr RS va ed ed ulel aly 19928 Keyboard Configuration DEC LK250 Keyboard Drivers TeemTalk for Windows 3 1x does not supply its own drivers for the LK250 keyboard it relies on using the drivers supplied by Digital on the Pathworks PCSA distribution disk If Pathworks has not been installed with the LK250 option then the following modifications should be made to the SYSTEM INI file in the WINDOWS directory on the basis that the drivers and associated files are available SYSTEM INI boot keyboard drv lk250 drv
3. 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 beca 1B HEXADECIMAL This is a special character set which is used by some applications D 7 Character Sets ADDITIONAL CHARACTER SET Tek Alpha Mode 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o 8 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 pecia 1 HEXADECIMAL These characters may be generated when TeemTalk is in Tek Alpha mode D 8 Host Command Summary Host Command Summary This appendix lists the host and Tek Primary Setup commands that are valid in each terminal emulation mode TeemTalk specific commands are listed at the back The following conventions are used in this command list Spaces in a command are for clarity only and are not to be entered as part of the command A space character that is part of the command will be shown as SP An asterisk in a command indicates the location of one or more parameters except otherwise indicated next to the command VT52 Mode CHARACTER SET SELECTION HOST PRIMARY SETUP Invoke GO character set SI Invoke G1 character set SO Select GO character set ESCG Select Line Drawing character set ESC F CURSOR HOST PRIMARY SETUP Direct cursor addressing 1 to 96 SP to DEL ESC Y line column Insert FF character amp advance cursor FF Line f
4. Select Multinational character set mode ESC 421 Select National character set mode ESC 42h EDITING HOST PRIMARY SETUP Selective erase line 0 from 1 to 2 all ESC K Selective erase screen 0 from 1 to 2 all ESC J GENERAL OPERATION HOST PRIMARY SETUP Select C1 7 bit control mode ESC SPF Select C1 8 bit control mode ESC SP G PF KEYS HOST PRIMARY SETUP Clear all PF keys ESC P0 11ESC Lock PF keys ESC P1 01ESC Program a PF key ESC P 1 ESC E 6 Host Command Summary Tek Mode Applies to TeemTalk 11W and TeemTalk 11W32 only Applies to TeemTalk 05W amp 05W32 TeemTalk O7W amp TeemTalk 07W32 COLOUR HOST PRIMARY SETUP Assign colour index to PO P1 plotter pen ESCPI PMAP Assign colours to dialog area indices ESCTF DACMAP Assign colours to surface indices ESCTG CMAP Select background grey shade ESCRB GREYBACK Select background surface colour CBACKGROUND Select character cell dash line gap index ESCMB BACKINDEX Select colour overlap grey mode ESCTM CMODE Select dialog area surface colour map ESCLS DASURFACE Select dialog area text alternative index ESCLJ DA2INDEX Select graphics text colour index ESC MT GTINDEX Select line panel b m colour index ESC ML LINEINDEX Select smoothness of curve ESC UG CSMOOTH Select surface indices grey shades ESC RG GREYCMAP Set pixels in rectangle to identical
5. None Gin Tablet Characters GIN TABChars string max 4 chars Map Mouse To Joystick GIN MAPmouse boolean 12 79 Creating A Script File Attribute Settings Colour Selection GroupID ParamID Value Map Value Red ATTRibutes MAP Red range 0 100 where is colour index in range 00 to 15 Map Value Green ATTRibutes MAP Green range 0 100 Map Value Blue ATTRibutes MAP Blue range 0 100 Screen Index ATTRibutes BCKINDSCRN range 0 15 Preferences GroupID ParamID Value Inverse Colours ATTRibutes INVColour boolean AutoColour ATTRibutes AUTOcolour boolean ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY You can disable one or more attributes associated with the following text foreground or background index commands by entering the following characters immediately after the colour index B Disable bold attribute I Disable inverse attribute F Disable flashing attribute U Disable underline attribute For example to make characters with the underline and bold attributes appear on the screen with the colour assigned to index 3 but not underlined or bold you would issue the following command PSET ATTRIBUTES FRGINDUNDBOLD 3UB Characters with the bold attribute can be displayed as true bold instead of highlighted by including the plus character immediately after the colour index The Value in the following tables consists of an integer in the range O to 15 specifying the colour index which may be followed by any of the disable
6. 12 27 Creating A Script File DIALOGUE Syntax DIALOGUE title caption variable x lt gt This command enables you to display a simple dialog box with a specified title containing two buttons Ok and Cancel and a single line text box with a specified caption where lt title gt lt caption gt lt variable gt lt gt lt gt is the text to be displayed in the title bar of the dialog box as specified by a string delimited by double quotes or a string variable is the text that will appear to the left or above the text box as specified by a string delimited by double quotes or a string variable is a previously defined string variable see var which is used to store the text entered in the text box by the user but only if the Ok button is pressed otherwise the variable is set to NULL Text stored in this variable will be displayed in the text box by default when the dialog is viewed again later specify the horizontal and vertical position of the top left corner of the dialog box in relation to the top left corner of the screen in pixels These can be integers or variables The following example will display a dialog box titled User containing a text box with the prompt Enter your name and cause the text entered in the text box by the user to be stored in the string variable name when the Ok button is pressed dialogue User Enter your name name 100 100 The Error Numbe
7. 241 245 249 253 329 PF4 242 246 250 254 330 CURSOR RIGHT 135 139 143 147 369 CURSOR UP 136 140 144 148 366 CURSOR LEFT 137 141 145 149 367 CURSOR DOWN 138 142 146 150 368 Key Reference Numbers BRITISH KEYBOARD KEY REFERENCE NUMBERS KEY NORM SHIFT CTRL CT SH ALT F1 128 136 2 10 351 F2 129 137 3 11 352 F3 130 138 4 12 353 F4 131 139 5 13 354 F5 132 140 6 14 355 F6 133 141 E 15 356 F7 134 142 8 16 357 F8 135 143 9 17 358 F9 144 151 18 25 359 F10 DO 231 233 235 237 360 F11 HELP 232 234 236 238 361 F12 145 152 19 26 362 F13 146 153 20 27 363 F14 147 154 21 28 364 0 48 41 N A N A 279 1 49 33 N A N A 280 2 50 64 0 0 281 3 51 35 27 27 282 4 52 36 28 28 283 5 53 37 29 29 284 6 54 94 30 30 285 7 55 38 31 31 286 8 56 42 127 127 287 9 57 40 N A N A 288 1 92 124 28 28 326 lt gt 60 62 60 62 376 lt 44 60 44 60 317 45 95 31 31 318 gt 46 62 46 62 319 1 47 63 31 31 320 ii 59 58 59 58 315 96 34 96 34 325 61 43 N A N A 316 91 123 27 27 322 93 125 29 29 324 39 126 30 30 321 23 126 23 126 323 Key Reference Numbers BRITISH KEYBOARD KEY REFERENCE NUMBERS KEY NORM SHIFT CTRL CT SH ALT A 97 65 1 1 289 98 66 2 2 290 99 67 3 3 291
8. 4 3 Send keyword 4 4 Show hotspots 4 4 Multinational Character Set 7 26 N Network NetBIOS version 11 9 Index 5 Index New Connection dialog box 7 9 Telnetoptions 7 19 TSRidentifier 11 10 New Connection Dialog Box 7 9 Line Local Button 2 19 On Line Local Setting 7 28 Overstrike Mode Indicator 2 19 P Parity Selection 7 27 Patterns Button 2 18 Pause Resume Button 2 19 Predefined Fill Patterns 2 18 Primary Setup Description 2 11 Print Auto 7 17 Buffer 7 17 Cancel 7 17 Euro sign 3 15 7 49 Screen 7 15 Print Button 2 19 Print Manager 7 15 Printer Setup 7 14 Default TeemTalk printer 11 27 Disable remote printing 11 28 Font settings 7 15 Print manager 11 27 Send print data to file 11 28 Use Windows default printer 11 27 Private Profile File Windows 3 1x 11 2 Windows 95 amp NT 11 3 PSET amp PGET Script Settings 12 73 Q Quitting TeemTalk 2 1 R RDPXY 12 57 RDT 12 57 RDTXY 12 57 Reference Numbers Keyboard keys 2 Mouse buttons C 5 Replay File 7 14 Report Maximum line length 7 33 ResetTerminal 7 9 Resizing the Window Menu bar lt lt amp gt gt 2 14 Window border amp corners 2 20 Resume Pause Button 2 19 RstView Button 2 18 S Save Session 7 5 7 12 Saving A Connection Template 2 6 Script Commands BREAK 12 23 BRF 12 23 BRT 12 23 CAPTURE 12 23 CLB 12 23 CLIPBD APPEND 12 23 CLIPBD EMPTY 12 24 CLIPBD READ 12 24 CLIPBD WRITE 12 2
9. eee rec Cancel Parity r Stop Bits None E Flow Control r Transmit Rate OnLine Output 12200 LocalEcho Detect Carrie Note The options in this dialog box are described in the Serial Settings section in the Setup Menus chapter and only apply when the connection type is set to Serial The status bar along the bottom of the TeemTalk window displays two LEDs The first LED indicates whether or not you are connected to the host It will show red when not connected and green when you are connected The second LED indicates whether or not data is being sent to or from the host It will show dull green when there is no activity red when data is being sent to the host and bright green when data is being received from the host Making A Network Host Connection To connect to a network host select the protocol required in the Type list box TeemTalk for Windows 95 and NT TCP IP CTERM WinSock 2 NetBIOS MultiLan ISDN LAT Microsoft SNA TeemTalk OSI option TeemTalk for Windows 3 1x LAT NetBIOS B and W TCP INFOConnect FTP PC TCP OSLAN WinSock ISDN Sun PC NFS TELAPI Ext NCSI DOSLANTI LAN W Place BAPI Eicon X25 MultiLan NetManage Interrupt 14 IPX SPX PathWay INT6B NASI NetWare for LAT CTERM LanManager TeemTalk OSI Note Refer to the Network Connection chapter in the Networking Guide for a description of each protocol su
10. Example report format tt07w 3 2 1 E 15 Host Command Summary Notes E 16 Index Index Symbols 80 132 Column Display 7 36 A AnswerbackString 7 34 ASCIIFile Transfer 8 2 AT Keyboard Mapping DEC VT220 mode 3 2 Tek VT100 amp Edit mode 3 3 Auto Wrap 7 35 Baud Rate Selection 7 27 Block Mode Cursor positioning 4 4 Button Tools Adding buttons 5 5 Assigning functions 5 6 Floating button palette 5 1 Predefined functions 5 2 Redefining 5 5 Removing buttons 5 8 Cancel Button 2 17 Capturing Files 7 13 CarrierDetect 7 28 Character Set Mode 7 26 Character Sets D 1 Additional DEC D 4 Additional Tek D 8 ASCI D 3 Control characters D 1 Line Drawing D 7 National Tek Alpha D 6 National 220 Alpha D 5 National characters DEC D 5 National characters Tek D 6 Colour Attributes 7 40 Colour Selection Textattributes 7 40 Command Line Options Alpha off during redraw 11 23 Bold font in full screen workspace 11 22 Connection template touse 11 14 Crosshair cursor size 11 23 Default font size 11 21 Disablebell 11 16 Disable close window menu item 11 18 Disable closed connection box 11 11 Disable control menu 11 18 Disable copyright message 11 17 Disable Exit TeemTalk box 11 11 Disable graphics show thru 11 24 Disable maximize button 11 18 Disable menu bar 11 20 Disable min max buttons 11 18 Disable minimize button 11 18 Index 1 Index
11. FontStrikethru FontUnderline 8 2 6 8 4 rm1 8 6 2 Send DDE Info 0 False 0 False MS Sans Serif 7 8 0 False 0 False 255 0 2760 29 2400 1575 Begin CommandButton ttscr Caption FontBold FontItalic FontName FontSize Height Index Left TabIndex Top Width End FontStrikethru FontUnderline Run TT script 0 False 0 False MS Sans Serif 7 8 0 False 0 False 255 1 1080 28 5280 1575 Begin CommandButton TTstat Caption FontBold FontItalic FontName Start 0 False 0 False MS Sans Serif 13 25 Dynamic Data Exchange FontSize FontStrikethru FontUnderline Height Index Left TabIndex Top Width End Begin TextBox Text1 FontBold FontItalic FontName FontSize FontStrikethru FontUnderline Height Index Left TabIndex Top width End 7 8 0 False 0 False 255 0 120 27 2400 735 1 True 0 False Arial 7 2 0 False 0 False 375 18 240 15 4680 6015 repeat last section with the following changes Index Top 4440 1560 4200 1320 17 16 15 14 13 12 Tabindex 14 13 12 11 10 9 3960 1080 115 4 3 2 1 0 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 3720 3480 3240 1800 840 600 360 Begin CommandButton receive Caption FontBold FontItalic FontName FontSize FontStrikethru FontUnderline Height Index Left Ta
12. Contents Contents Introduction 2 ecce eese nanus 1 1 What Is 1 1 About This User s Guide sarien ri a eee 1 2 Terms amp Conventions eene eene nente E 1 4 Getting Started eere Running TeemTalk eese eene 2 1 Quilting Teemlalk aranna a isd teme 2 1 Host Communications eese eene eene entren nennen 2 3 Creating A Communications Session eene 2 3 Making A Serial Host Connection sese 2 3 Making A Network Host 2 04402222 2 4 Creating A Connection Template sse 2 6 Using Environment Variables To Locate Settings Files 2 7 Selecting A Connection Template see 2 7 Selecting The Terminal Emulation sees 2 9 Tablet amp Mouse Configuration eese 2 10 Primary Setup 2 11 The TeemTalk Display eec es 2 12 The Title Bar ge 2 12 Minimize amp Maximize Buttons eene 2 13 The ete dye 2 13 Resizing Window edente 2 14 Ae ann ia 2 15 Whe Scroll 3 tree eet rere 2 16 The Soft Buttons
13. Suppress Echo When selected this will will prevent the emulator from generating the Telnet echo option on connection 7 19 Setup Menus Force Negotiation These settings determine whether or not the Telnet Binary or EOR options are supported Both are set to no by default No Will not force any negotiations It will leave it up to the host to decide what to do DO force negotiation The host will be informed that the option is supported DONT Will force negotiation A negotiation packet will be sent to the host telling it that the option is not supported Break Settings The setting of these options determine whether or not a timing mark TM and or carriage return CR is sent with a Telnet break packet A timing mark is sent by default 7 20 Setup Menus Edit Menu v Clipboard Text Clipboard Graphics DDE Row Copy DDE Column Copy Copy Select All Clear Buffer Clipboard Text Clipboard Graphics Selecting one of these options will enable selected text or graphics to be copied to the clipboard when the Copy command is used The Paste and Select All commands will also be enabled A tick will be displayed next to the option when it is selected and the DDE commands will be disabled DDE Row Copy DDE Column Copy Dynamic Data Exchange DDE is a much more powerful tool than the clipboard as it establishes a link between the copied data and the original source data so that when changes
14. The following list shows the possible error numbers for various commands and their meaning CLIPBD EMPTY 0 command was successful 1 Invalid parameter in the command string 2 Cannotempty the clipboard possibly because someone else has opened it 3 Failed to close the clipboard CLIPBD READ 0 The command was successful 1 Invalid parameter in the command string 2 Cannotread the data in the clipboard 3 Failed to close the clipboard 4 Cannotopen the clipboard possibly because someone else has opened it 5 Clipboard data in unrecognisable format CLIPBD WRITE 0 The command was successful 1 Invalid parameter in the command string 2 Cannot write the data to the clipboard 3 Failed to close the clipboard 4 Cannotopen the clipboard possibly because someone else has opened it DDE 0 The command was successful 1 The command failed DECRYPT amp ENCRYPT 0 command was successful 1 The command failed 12 67 Creating A Script File DIALOGUE The command was successful Invalid parameter in the command string Cancel button pressed Unable to create the dialog box FILE SAAN The command was successful Invalid sub command e g must be file read and not file fred etc Invalid variable for handle Invalid integer for handle File copy delete open or rename command failed File close command failed Invalid var
15. levels are accessible even if not all are displayed levels stored off screen can be scrolled into view by clicking the Level button You can specify how many levels of soft buttons are actually displayed by using the following initialization file command or command line option Initialization file command buttonlevels 0 4 Command line option bl0 4 7 50 Setup Menus four levels can be displayed by specifying 4 Specifying 0 will cause no soft buttons to be displayed You can assign a title to the definition set which will be displayed in the leftmost button in the second row by entering it in the Title text box The title can consist of up to seven characters By default the buttons on level 1 are defined with functions relating to the Tek emulation as described in the Getting Started chapter You can redefine these buttons to perfrom other functions if required Note that the Tek functions assigned to buttons 6 through 10 by default are not supported by TeemTalk 05W Programming A Soft Button To program a soft button first select which level or definition set of buttons you wish to define by selecting the level number in the Level box below the Apply button Each button can be assigned a name of up to ten characters which is displayed on the button in the window To assign a name enter it in the Name text box next to the relevant button number The button definition is entered in the Command text box on
16. 11 6 Network Connection eese eene eene enne 11 8 Telnet iiti teet tre esse eae 11 12 Session Configuration esses esee 11 13 11 17 Keyboard amp Mouse sess 11 25 11 27 Creating A Script File 12 1 Introduction rione ets 12 1 Initiating A Script File verreisen naerenn nnne ttn nnne 12 1 Assigning Values To Variables essere 12 3 Script File Examples eter EA ENEE 12 4 Syntax Conventions 12 12 teti 12 14 Command Descriptions eese eese 12 16 Error Numbers 12 67 Script Error Trapping Functions 12 71 PSET amp PGET Parameters amp Values sees 12 73 FTU SET GET Parameters essere 12 86 Dynamic Data Exchange 13 1 IntTOdUCtlonz ei e RR ee a STRE oe 13 1 DDE Terminology esses ener enne 13 3 Hot amp Warm DDE Links esses eene 13 3 Using The Edit Menu DDE Functions esses 13 4 Contents 5 Contents File TTONS OF eS Ne d oc
17. Changing The Window Focus You can define a keyword to change the currently selected window or icon that is the window or icon to which keyboard and mouse commands will be directed by entering its window class name as a string enclosed by the lt and gt characters For example to define the keyword TeemTalk so that the TeemTalk 07W32 window is selected when the keyword is clicked you would enter the following line in the relevant Definitions command group TeemTalk lt tt07w gt 07 is the window class name for TeemTalk 07W32 Initiating A Script File You can define a keyword to run a script file when clicked by enclosing the name of the file and any arguments within the lt left angle bracket and single quote and gt single quote and right angle bracket characters For example to define the keyword Script so that it will run the script myscript scr and assign the values valuel and value2 to two variables you would enter the following in the relevant Definitions command group Script lt myscript scr value1 value2 gt Setup Menus Setup Menus This chapter describes the options available in the setup menus and dialog boxes Selecting amp Closing Menus The following menus can be displayed from the menu bar Factory Default v Clipboard Text Reset Terminal Clipboard Graphics DDE Row Copy BDE Column Copy New Connection Open Session Copy Save Session Save Session A
18. Disable mouseediting 11 25 Disable remote printing 11 28 Disable scroll 11 20 Disable statusbar 11 21 Disable system menu 11 18 Disable title bar 11 19 Disabletoolbar 11 20 Disable window frame 11 19 Flashing forall sessions 11 22 Format 11 5 FTP include subdirectories 10 14 FTP progress bar 10 14 FTP time out 10 14 Hide script parameters 11 15 LK450 keyboard 11 25 Mouse cursor style 11 25 Network hostname 11 8 Network input queue size 11 10 Network protocol 11 8 New session warning message 11 11 Number of segments 11 24 Preload Winsock DLL for PPP usage 11 9 Print data to file 11 28 Private profile filetouse 11 14 Return script values in uppercase 11 15 Run script file 11 15 Segment memory size 11 24 Soft buttons displayed 11 21 Summary 11 6 Support multiple surfaces 11 23 Text redraw delay 11 23 TSRidentifier 11 10 Use Windows default printer 11 27 Window fills screen 11 17 Window maximized 11 17 Window minimized 11 17 Window subtitle 11 21 Window title 11 20 ZMODEM startup 11 15 Composing Characters 3 16 Connection Template Creating 2 6 7 5 Selecting 2 7 7 7 Control Characters D 1 Displaying 7 26 Keyboardequivalents D 2 Copy amp Paste Disabling 4 3 Edit menu options 7 21 Using keyboard 4 3 Using mouse 4 1 4 3 Cursor Block or underline 7 36 Gin 2 23 Origin mode 7 36 Positioning in block mode 4 4 Selection 2 22 Text 2 22 Cursor Keys 3 9 D DDE Support 7 21 13 1 Default Setup Set
19. E Keys PF1 through PF4 generate ANSI cursor movement sequences F All programmed strings for keys are temporarily disabled 7 25 Setup Menus VT220 7 and VT220 8 modes run emulations of the DEC VT220 terminal the difference is in their treatment of 8 bit control codes When VT220 7 is selected all 8 bit codes are converted to their 7 bit equivalents whereas VT220 8 leaves 8 bit codes unchanged If you are using VT200 applications select VT220 7 W3220 mode provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Westward 3220 terminal Code 1 Selects Factory default ANSI The setting of this option determines what action will be taken on receipt of an Enter ANSI Mode Code 1 command from the host It can be set to cause entry to the DEC VT220 7 or 8 bit emulation instead of ANSI VT100 This provides the same functionality as the Tektronix DecTerminal command Terminal ID Factory default VT100 This option identifies the particular VT terminal model emulated by TeemTalk in response to a terminal identification request from the host when in any mode except Tek Multinational Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether the national or multinational character set is used when TeemTalk is in VT220 7 or 8 bit Alpha mode All other modes use the national character set When this option is unselected the national character set which corresponds to the keyboard language selecte
20. Field 6 This is not used in the current version of TeemTalk The Window Border amp Corners The window border and corners can be selected and moved to resize the window The effect of resizing the window is determined by the Resize Font and Rows options in the Dialog Settings dialog box When Resize Font is selected default resizing the window will cause TeemTalk to search a list of known fonts and select the one that allows the same number of rows and columns 80 or 132 to fill the new window size The window will be adjusted to display all the rows and columns When Resize Font is not selected resizing the window will have no effect on the font size and the number of displayed rows will be increased or decreased according to the new window size To resize the window using the border Mouse Place the pointer over the border at the edge or corner to be moved hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse Keyboard Press Alt Spacebar to display the Control menu then S to select Size Press the relevant arrow key once to move the four headed arrow to the border edge and if a corner press the arrow key in the direction of the corner Pressing the arrow keys will now resize the window until Return is pressed to display the new window size 2 20 Getting Started The Emulation Workspace The emulation workspace is the area which emulates the display of the terminal specified in setup the VT100 terminal by d
21. Initialization Commands Session Configuration Startup Command Group To Action Initialization File Not applicable Command Line Default Setting Windows 3 1x tt w is either 05 07 or 11 Windows 95 amp NT default You can specify more than one set of startup commands in the Windows 3 1x WIN INI file or the Windows 95 or NT TT W INI private profile file This enables you to configure each instance of TeemTalk differently Windows 3 1x The heading of the command group to action for a specific instance of TeemTalk is specified on the command line using the n command line option For example if the group of TeemTalk 07W commands was headed window1 in the WIN INI file the command for actioning this set of commands instead of the default tt07w set would be nwindowl When entering groups of TeemTalk commands in the WIN INI file make sure that each heading is unique and not duplicated elsewhere in the file Windows 95 amp NT Each set of commands other than the default set must have the following heading in the TT W INI private profile file startup name where name can be any unique identifying name You can specify which set of startup commands TeemTalk is to use by including the following on the command line for loading TeemTalk where name is substituted with the actual name of the startup group required If this command is not present then TeemTalk will use the start
22. a circumflex a a tilde a umlaut ring ee m a e diphthong o den c cedilla uml e grave e e acute e e circumflex e e umlaut or e i grave i i acute i i circumflex 1 i umlaut i or i n tilde me grave 3 18 Keyboard Configuration COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES continued acute grave u circumflex acute u o tilde circumflex u umlaut Oo u umlaut u or u TU slash 3 19 Keyboard Configuration Notes 3 20 Mouse Functions Mouse Functions This chapter describes the special functions assigned to the mouse buttons by TeemTalk and how to redefine the buttons Introduction TeemTalk assigns a variety of special functions to the mouse buttons Each button can be used to action up to six functions when pressed in conjunction with modifier keys The following table lists the functions assigned to each button and key combination by default Left Button Right Button Normal Select Edit Copy Shift Extend Selection Edit Paste Control Action Hotspot Show Hotspots Control Shift Select Rectangle Unassigned Alt Send CR Send Keyword Double Click Select Word Unassigned Redefining The Mouse Buttons TeemTalk enables you to redefine the functions assigned to the mouse buttons
23. i 13 6 Slave Mode ise eH e Ree 13 6 Additional DDE Functions eese 13 18 DDE Link To A Visual Basic Application sss 13 24 Troubleshooting A 1 Virtual Key Names es rne B 1 Standard Virtual Key Names essent B 1 DEC 220 Virtual Key Names essent B 2 Tek Virtual Key Names eese enne B 2 Key Reference Numbers C 1 Character SOUS essit hdi aera D 1 Host Command E 1 VE52 EE EE epa 1 ANSE VT 100 Mode at eterno tetto E 3 ANSI 220 iiie tees E 6 Tek tite eee eases E 7 W3220 Mode 5 Git netten e HER E 13 TeemTalk Additional Commands sees E 15 Contents 6 Introduction Introduction This chapter introduces TeemTalk terminal emulation software for Microsoft Windows and the contents of this User s Guide What Is TeemTalk TeemTalk for Windows provides precise emulation of a wide range of industry standard text and graphics terminals on any PC running Microsoft Windows Multiple concurrent sessions with different hosts can be conducted over serial RS232 lines or local area networks LANs including DECnet TCP IP and Novell TeemTalk inco
24. x Teemlalk TeemTalk 05W 07W amp 11W User s Guide USA Neoware Inc 3200 Horizon Drive King of Prussia PA 19406 Tel 1 610 277 8300 Fax 1 610 771 4200 Email info neoware com UK Neoware UK Ltd The Stables Cosgrove Milton Keynes MK19 7JJ Tel 44 0 1908 267111 Fax 44 0 1908 267112 Email teem info neoware com TeemTalk Software Support Telephone 1 610 277 8300 Web http www neoware com support Software Version 4 3 1 November 1999 Part number TT6TM 4 3 1 Neoware UK Ltd The Stables Cosgrove Milton Keynes MK19 7JJ Tel 44 0 1908 267111 Fax 44 0 1908 267112 TeemTalk 1988 2003 Neoware UK Ltd Rights Reserved The material in this user s guide is for information purposes only and is subject to change without notice Neoware UK Ltd accepts no responsibility for any errors contained herein Trademarks TeemTalk is a registered trademark of Neoware UK Ltd ADDS Viewpoint A2 is a trademark of Applied Digital Data Systems Inc D100 D200 and D410 are trademarks of Data General DEC VT52 VT100 VT131 VT220 VT300 VT320 VT340 420 ReGIS DECnet LK250 and LK450 are registered trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation Hazeltine is a trademark of Esprit Systems Inc HP700 92 2392 and HP2622A are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company IBM i
25. Getting Started 5 Inthe Description text box enter a unique description up to 132 characters long which will be used to identify the connection template for future selection This description will also appear in the Open Session dialog box 6 Clickthe OK button to save the template settings If you specified the names of settings files that already exist a message box will ask you to confirm whether or not you want to overwrite the existing files with the new settings Using Environment Variables To Locate Settings Files When TeemTalk for Windows 95 or NT is installed on a terminal server environment variables may be used to locate settings files on the client PC This means that each client may use a different setup configuration reading and saving settings locally instead of changing files stored on the server which would affect all clients Each client must use the same user environment variable name to specify the directory path for the TeemTalk settings file s This name is then specified in the registry on the terminal server enclosed by percentage characters For example each client has the user environment variable USERPROFILE pointing to a local directory which may be different on each client To make the directory specified by USERPROFILE the location of the TeemTalk settings files nv and the TeemTalk registry entries on the terminal server would look like this NvPath USERPROFILE WsPath US
26. Informs the program to perform the command s on the following line s while the specified condition is true For example while integer 10 inc integer If more than one command line is to be associated with while insert a line containing the open curly brace character before the first command line and a line containing the close curly brace character following the last command line For example while integer 10 inc integer 12 65 Creating A Script File wrt Amount integer While commands may be nested up to 32 times WRT Syntax WRT lt string s gt Displays string s delimited by double quote characters at the current cursor position Variables such as identity in the example below can also be included The following example will display User followed by the contents of the variable identity and then perform a line feed _n and carriage return _r wrt User identity 12 66 Creating A Script File Error Numbers You can incorporate a special variable called errno in your script file which will be used to store a number indicating the result of a command i e success or type of failure The errno variable is an integer variable which is already defined as part of the script language that is you do not need to use the var command to include it in your script file When the command is successful the numeric value 0 will be assigned to errno
27. Login system Password 1d101e5813001f5c Account SystemType Auto LelDir RemDir Use Asynchronous Calls By default FTP uses asynchronous Windows Sockets calls You can configure FTP to use synchronous calls by adding the following line under a command group headed General Blocking 1 Specifying Blocking 0 or removing this line will cause FTP to use asynchronous calls 10 13 File Transfer Disable Delete Command You can prevent the deletion of files and directories in the TTWFTP window by including the command DisableDelete 1 in a command group headed General This will disable the Delete File button the Delete option in the File menu and the Delete key FTP Command Line Options The command line for running the FTP executable can be extended to include the options described below Note that the first command after the executable is ignored so enter this as or The commands are not case sensitive Progress Bar You can control the progress bar display using the b command line option as follows b0 progress bar b1 Default progress bar updated for every byte ASCII or block binary read b2 Update time and progress bar every Ox7fffffff bytes For example to run FTP without a progress bar the command line would look like this Ttw32ftp b0 Disabling The Include Subdirectories Option You can disable the Include Subdirectories check box in the Confirm Copy Files dialo
28. aMacro int iStrLen aMacro ATOM GetSetting hwnd hwndPartner IDM MACROS NKEYSTRING iKeyIndex if aMacro 1 return 1 Convert received Atom to string iStrLen GlobalGetAtomName aMacro szKbdMacro iMacroLen GlobalDeleteAtom aMacro return iStrLen GetSetting HWND hWndSlaveDDE HWND hWndPartner int MenuID DataGroup int iValue DWORD lSetting ATOM altem char buf 16 int data 13 12 Dynamic Data Exchange Treat Key macro request as a special case if MenuID IDM MACROS lSetting MAKELONG DataGroup iValue else lSetting MAKELONG DataGroup MenuID ultoa lSetting buf 10 altem GlobalAddAtom LPSTR buf if PostMessage hWndPartnerDDE WM_DDE_REQUEST hWndSlaveDDE MAKELONG CF_TEXT aItem GlobalDeleteAtom atomItem return 1 Wait for DDE_DATA message return with requested data Xfer Parameter TRU WaitForParameter E i return Xfer Data The WaitForParameter function is not documented but basically waits in a loop monitoring the windows messages until a WM_DDE_DATA message appears that corresponds to the initial WM_DDE_REQUEST This then enables the RequestSetting procedure to return with the appropriate value or will return 1 if the request fails This would be caused as a result of the Client Slave process receiving a negative ACKnowledgement from TeemTalk following receipt of the
29. earn reete m tete IRE e 2 16 PAG SB al D d 2 19 Contents 1 Contents The Window Border amp Corners eene 2 20 The Emulation Workspace eese 2 21 Default Pont Sizes onte hti een 2 21 The Text Cursors re entre t n RENNES SERVE RR REST 2 22 The Selection eret ret eas 2 22 The Gin Cursor etr ERES FREE RAUS 2 23 Keyboard Configuration 9 1 IntFOdUCtiQh as tede ore ete pene nae 3 1 DEC LK250 Keyboard Drivers eese 3 8 Keyboard Nationality essent 3 9 CUrsOY Keys 3 9 Remapping The 3 10 Programming A Key iet eiit tete 3 12 Entering Control Characters esee 3 13 Key Combinations amp 3 13 Entering Command Lines eee 3 14 Changing The Window Focus eere 3 14 Initiating A Script File eese 3 14 Action Locally Or Transmit To Host eee 3 14 Default Key Definitions essere 3 15 Euro Sig eatis tiorem RO ERR MERGER 3 15 Compose Character Sequences ossos 3 16 Mouse Functions eren enne 4 1 IntrOdUCllOHs 4 ile ttp E Re 4 1 Redefining The Mouse Buttons eese 4 1 Selecti
30. keyboard subtype 50 type k oemansi bin xlat437 bin keyboard dll decuk250 dll boot description keyboard typ Digital LK250 Keyboard keyboard vkd250 386 The following files must exist in the WINDOWS SYSTEM directory 1k250 drv xlat437 bin vkd250 386 decus250 dll 05 LK250 Keyboard Driver decuk250 dll UK LK250 Keyboard Driver decda250 dll Danish LK250 Keyboard Driver decfi250 dll Finnish LK250 Keyboard Driver decfr250 dll French LK250 Keyboard Driver decge250 dll German LK250 Keyboard Driver decit250 dll Italian LK250 Keyboard Driver decno250 dll Norwegian LK250 Keyboard Driver decsf250 dll Swiss French LK250 Keyboard Driver decsg250 dll Swiss German LK250 Keyboard Driver decsp250 dll Spanish LK250 Keyboard Driver decsw250 dll Swedish LK250 Keyboard Driver decce250 dll Canadian LK250 Keyboard Driver deccf250 dll Canadian French LK250 Keyboard Driver If the keyboard drivers and files have not been installed correctly the following will be observed 1 Displaying the Keyboard Macros dialog box will result in an incorrect keyboard display window The dialog box should show the LK250 layout and be titled Digital LK250 Keyboard Keyboard Configuration 2 Although the alphanumeric area of the keyboard may appear to function the keypad function keys and centre key cluster will not operate correctly giving unpredictable results Note The LK250 keyboard for the PC is desi
31. 75 110 134 150 300 600 1200 1800 2000 2400 3600 4800 7200 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Parity NCSi PARity None Odd Even Mark Space Flow Control NCSi FLOWcontrol None DTR RTS DTRRts Xonxoff Data Bits NCSi DATAbits 5 6 7 8 Stop Bits NCSi STOPbits 1 1 5 2 Show Port Details NCSi PORTdetail boolean Save Session Settings GroupID ParamID Value Save Keyboard Macros SESSion SAVEMacros boolean Save Soft Buttons SESSion SAVESoftbuttons boolean Save Attributes SESSion SAVEAttrs boolean Save Window Metrics SESSion SAVEWindow boolean Save Text Rows SESSion SAVERows boolean Save Buffer Rows SESSion SAVEBuffer boolean Save Connection SESSion SAVEConnection boolean Save Terminal Settings SESSion SAVETerminal boolean Emulation Settings GroupID ParamID Value Emulation EMULation MODe VT52 VT100 TEK EDit VT2207 VT2208 W3220 Code 1 Selects EMULation CODe ANSI VT2207 VT2208 Terminal ID EMULation ID VT100 VT220 12 77 Creating A Script File GroupID ParamID Value Multinational EMULation MULTinational boolean Display Controls EMULation CTRLdisplay boolean Terminal Settings GroupID ParamID Value Keyboard Language TERMinal KEYBoard AMerican USa BRitish UK FLemish CAnadian DAnish Finnish GErman DUtch HOlland ITalian SWFrench SWGerman SWEdish NOrwegain FRench BElgian SPanish POrtuguese LF Implies CR TERMinal NEWLine boolean CR Implies LF TERMinal AUTOLF boolean Ignore Delet
32. HEJ distrib Lf hds dev Hf Ho ipc_save copyrght hdr Hf kermit GUEST Login ftp 250 CwD command successful ftp 200 Type set to I If you specified a particular local directory in the Connection dialog box then this will be displayed in the left hand list box otherwise the home directory is displayed by default The right hand list box will display the contents of the remote host directory which will be the home directory by default if you did not specify a particular remote directory in the Connection dialog box If you did specify a remote directory then FTP will attempt to access and display it If unsuccessful then the normal default directory will be displayed Note that Tandem will not list subdirectory information The ftp box at the bottom of the window will display messages about each operation as it is performed You can display information about the system you are currently connected to in the status line at the bottom of the window by selecting the first item in the Remote Directory list box The status line can also display information on the currently selected file or the first file in a group of selected files 10 3 File Transfer If you want to save the session configuration for future connection display the Configure menu and select Save Settings on Exit This is a toggle selection which will display a tick mark when enabled Configure
33. Hotspot setting Clicking the Edit button will open a text editor window in which the contents of the current hotspot definition file will be displayed This enables you to make changes without having to leave TeemTalk The text editor used by default is notepad exe You can specify different text editor by modifying the Editor line in the TeemTalk private profile file 4 2 Mouse Functions Selecting amp Copying Text You can use the mouse buttons to copy and paste text The region of the display that will be selected for copying depends on whether you use the Select Select Rectangle Select and Copy or Select Word function The Select function will select all text from the start position to the finish position working left to right across the entire width of the display whereas the Select Rectangle function will only select text contained within the rectangular area defined by the start position top left corner and the finish position bottom right corner The Select and Copy function is the same as Select but will also copy the selected data to the Clipboard automatically The Select Word function will cause the word under the mouse cursor to be selected The default method for selecting and copying text is as follows Place the cursor at the start of the text to be copied hold down the Left mouse button then drag the cursor across to the end of the required text and release the mouse button To extend the selection
34. Map Mouse To Joystick Factory default Enabled When this option is selected any Gin operations which enable or disable the joystick or keyboard cursor keys will also enable or disable the mouse 7 39 Setup Menus Attributes Foreground Background Screen Element Attribute Sample Text Preferences Use Colours Inverse Colours r F Bold AaBbCcDdEe al 21 Cancel Default 1 This dialog box is displayed by selecting Attributes in the Settings menu It enables you to specify the colours used in the dialog area and how text with attributes is displayed To change the way a screen element is displayed select the relevant item from the Screen Element list box for example Bold BD for characters with the bold attribute The settings of the other options in the dialog box will change to reflect the settings currently assigned to the screen element and the Sample Text window will show how the screen element is actually displayed with these settings Text with attributes can be displayed in various ways For example characters with the underline attribute can be displayed as standard e g underlined only as a particular colour only e g green without the underline or with both attribute and a specific colour e g underlined and green The Attribute options allow you to enable or disable any of the attributes normally associated w
35. Syntax FTP PUT lt mode gt lt local file gt lt remote file gt This will transfer a file to the currently connected host as initiated by the ftp connect command where lt mode gt sets the transfer mode to ASCII BINARY or TENEX This can be omitted if the correct mode is already set lt local file gt is the name of the local file to be transferred lt remote file gt can be used to specify a remote filename for the transferred file The following example will set the transfer mode to ASCII and send the file myfile tmp ftp put ascii myfile tmp Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command 12 40 Creating A Script File FTP RM Syntax FTP RM LOCAL lt filespec gt FTP RM REMOTE lt filespec gt This FTP file transfer command will remove the specified local or remote file Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command FTP SET Syntax FTP SET lt mode gt This sets the file transfer mode to ASCII BINARY or TENEX Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command FTP TOOL Syntax FTP TOOL lt boolean gt This will display or close the FTP dialog box FTP WD Syntax FTP WD LOCAL lt variable gt FTP WD REMOTE lt variable gt This FTP file transfer command will get the local or remote w
36. TO Ignore delete code ESCKI IGNOREDEL Select bypass mode ESC CAN Select end of line characters ESCNC EOMCHARS Select line parity type ESCNP PARITY Select local echo ESCKE ECHO Select prompt mode ESCNM PROMPTMODE Set input queue size ESCNQ QUEUESIZE Set line baud rate limit ESCNL XMTLIMIT Set line TX amp RX baud rate ESCNR BAUDRATE Set stop bits ESCNB STOPBITS Specify break key interrupt duration ESCNK BREAKTIME Specify end of file characters ESCNE EOFSTRING Specify end of line delay ESCND XMTDELAY Specify end of line string transfer freq REOM Specify line flow control type ESCNF FLAGGING Specify prompt mode prompt string ESCNS PROMPTSTRING Specify report termination characters ESCNT EOLSTRING PO P1 PORT HOST PRIMARY SETUP Assign protocol to PO P1 port ESCPA PASSIGN Select hardcopy features HCFEATURES Select hardcopy image width ESCQF HCFORMWIDTH Select PO P1 positive neg hardcopy ESCPJ PINVERSION Specify number of PO P1 port hardcopies ESCPN PCOPIES Specify PO P1 port baud rate ESCPR PBAUD Specify PO P1 port data amp stop bits ESCPB PBITS Specify PO P1 port end of file string ESCPE PEOF Specify PO P1 port flow control ESCPF PFLAG Specify port h c image orientation ESCPO PORIENT Specify PO P1 port parity ESCPP PPARITY Specify printer type ESCQD HCINTERFACE Specify size of colour hardcopy ESCQA HCSIZE
37. Textl i 12 LinkItem 1 1 12 Next i End If End Sub LinkMode SD roa 80 1 13 32 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This appendix provides answers to the most commonly asked questions Problem Solution Problem Solution When I try to run TeemTalk a message appears warning me that the language DLL or file transfer utility may not be compatible This may occur when you have more than one version of TeemTalk installed on your system and the version you are trying to run is attempting to use a DLL or file that belongs to another version If you continue you may get unpredictable results Every time I run my application I have to change my setup parameters You can save the current session configuration as a connection template To make TeemTalk automatically attempt to make a host con nection using the same settings the next time it is loaded click the File option in the menu bar to display the File menu then click the Save Session option TeemTalk enables you to create multiple connection templates any one of which can be used either when TeemTalk is loaded or while it is running The procedure is as follows 1 In the File menu select the Save Session As option to display the dialog box shown overleaf 2 In the Saved Items box indicate which user preference settings are to be saved by checking the boxes next to the relevant options 3 In the Sett
38. The string must contain the virtual key name of the key to be actioned For example will cause the script program to perform the function of the Return key Refer to the Virtual Key Names appendix for a list of key names that can be used KBD Syntax KBD integer lt string gt Sends all following characters typed from the keyboard to the host until the Enter or Return keys are pressed where integer actual integer or an integer variable which enables or disables the keyboard entered characters from being displayed When the integer is 0 the characters will not be displayed Any integer higher than 0 will cause the characters to be displayed lt string gt enables a prompt to be displayed so that you can indicate what the user has to enter from the keyboard This may be omitted The following example will ask the user to enter his name and will display and send the input to the host kbd 1 Please Enter Your Name KGET Syntax KGET lt variable gt This gets a character from the keyboard and assigns it to the specified variable If the format of the variable defined by var is not a string then the decimal value of the character will be placed in the variable e g A will be placed as 65 You can use the conv command to convert the format of the variable if required 12 48 Creating A Script File KINTERCEPT Syntax KINTERCEPT boolean When enabl
39. These can be any characters except nulls Each character in the string will be represented as two hexadecimal characters in the resulting encryption The hexadecimal characters will vary according to the lt key gt characters specified You can use the decrypt command to convert the encrypted string back to normal characters The Error Numbers section lists the possible error numbers for this command ERRORCODE Syntax ERRORCODE lt variable gt This command specifies the type of error code that will be returned when an error is encountered in the script program Specifying an integer variable will return an error ID number while a string variable will return an error message Refer to the Script Error Trapping Functions section later in this chapter for details ERRORLINE Syntax ERRORLINE lt variable gt This command will return the line number of the last script program error Refer to the Script Error Trapping Functions section later EXIT Syntax EXIT Terminates the script program but does not exit TeemTalk FACT Syntax FACT This will cause TeemTalk to reassert the original setup configuration it had when you first installed it 12 31 Creating A Script File FILE CLOSE Syntax FILE CLOSE handle Closes the file with the specified handle where handle is the name of the integer variable assigned by the file open command The Error Numbers section lists the possible error n
40. Type Services EE Serial v M Cancel Configure The Type option specifies whether a serial or network connection is to be made Clicking the arrow button will display a drop down list box containing all the possible settings The Services option specifies the port or network host node which TeemTalk is to communicate with This is a text box with an associated drop down list box You can either make a selection from the list box or enter a valid host name or internet address in the text box Making A Serial Host Connection To connect to a serial host select Serial in the Type list box default then select the Com port required in the Services list box Click the Configure button to display the Serial Settings dialog box and make sure the settings match that of the host Click OK then click Connect Serial Settings Baud Rate Data Bits 2400 8 gt Parity Stop Bits None z 1 m Flow Control Transmit Rate OnLine Output x 19200 Local Echo Note These options are described in the Serial Settings section later in this chapter and only apply when the connection type is set to Serial 7 9 Setup Menus The status line along the bottom of the window displays two LEDs The first LED indicates whether or not you are connected to the host It will show red when not connected and green when you are connected The second LED indicates whether or no
41. WM_DDE_REQUEST message The processing of the WM_DDE_DATA message is shown on the next page 13 13 Dynamic Data Exchange KR I RR RK KKK KKK kk K FUNCTION ClientReceivedData PURPOSE Called upon receipt of a WM DDE DATA FR RR RIA RR IRR RI ARR oko void ClientReceivedData HWND hWndDDE HWND hWndPartnerDDE LONG IParam DDEDATA FAR lpDDEData BOOL bRelease char szItemName ITEM MAX SIZE 1 If this Data is in response to a request for data clear awaiting flags etc accordingly if GetConvPendingAck hWndDDE REQUEST SetConvPendingAck hWndDDE NONE KillTimer hWndDDE hWndPartnerDDE if 1pDDEData DDEDATA FAR GlobalLock LOWORD 1Param 1pDDEData gt cfFormat TEXT Negative ACK PostMessage hWndPartnerDDE WM_DDE_ACK hWndDDE MAKELONG 0 HIWORD IParam GlobalGetAtomName HIWORD IParam szItemName ITEM NAME MAX SIZE Xfer Data int far IpDDEData gt Value Xfer Parameter FALSE Clear flag for wait for parameter to return if IpDDEData gt fAckReq PostMessage hWndPartnerDDE WM_DDE_ACK hWndDDE MAKELONG 0x8000 HIWORD IParam bRelease IpDDEData gt fRelease GlobalUnlock LOWORD IParam if bRelease GlobalFree LOWORD IParam return 13 1
42. errno LET success 0 MSGBOX Could not set TRANSFER mode to 1 GOTO lab7 FTU SET REMOTE FINISH IF errno LET success 0 MSGBOX Failed to set REMOTE parameter to FINISH 1 reply GOTO lab7 FTU SET HOW REMOTE IF errno LET success 0 MSGBOX Failed to set HOW parameter to 1 GOTO lab7 FTU START IF errno LET success 0 LET message KERMIT REMOTE FINISH failed errno errno MSGBOX message 1 reply GOTO lab7 lab7 FTU CANCEL RETURN 12 11 Creating A Script File Syntax Conventions This section explains the rules for writing a script program Program Lines The first text entry of each line must be a script command or a line label which may be preceded by any number of spaces from the beginning of the line The command can be entered in upper or lower case Command parameters may be separated by a comma or and a space Comments You can enter comments on separate lines or on the same line as a script command In both cases the comment must be prefixed by a semicolon For example This is a comment line pset mode vt2207 This is a comment on a command line Labelling Lines You can assign a label to a line to indicate the start of a subroutine Labels do not have to be entered on a separate line they can be placed anywhere A label consists of alphanumeric characters immed
43. otherwise For example 07 for TeemTalk 07W When references to keys are shown linked by a plus sign this means that two or more keys have to be pressed at the same time For example press Ctrl M means press and hold down the Ctrl key press the M key then release both keys Click means position the mouse pointer over an element on the display then quickly press and release the specified mouse button Double click means position the mouse pointer over an element on the display then quickly press and release the specified mouse button twice in quick succession Drag the pointer means hold down the left mouse button or button assigned with the select function and slide the mouse so that a selection box is displayed Getting Started Getting Started This chapter describes how to run TeemTalk and configure it for compatibility with your hardware and the application Running TeemTalk To run TeemTalk display the TeemTalk group window or the window you specified when installing the software and select the icon shown below TT OPW Mouse Double click the TTO5W TTO7W TT11W icon Keyboard Press Ctrl Tab until the icon is selected then press Return The screen will display a copyright message then the TeemTalk window shown overleaf in which the DEC VT100 emulation is running by default Quitting TeemTalk You can quit an instance of TeemTalk in one of two ways from the File menu w
44. preference settings selected by the Saved Items options The default filename is tt w wsp where is either 05 07 or 11 depending on your version of TeemTalk Note Splitting the saved settings into two files enables users to share a common terminal emulation settings file while allowing each user to have their own workspace settings file 7 5 Setup Menus 5 Inthe Description text box enter a unique description up to 132 characters long which will be used to identify the connection template for future selection This description will also appear in the Open Session dialog box 6 Clickthe OK button to save the template settings If you specified the names of settings files that already exist a message box will ask you to confirm whether or not you want to overwrite the existing files with the new settings Using Environment Variables To Locate Settings Files When TeemTalk for Windows 95 or NT is installed on a terminal server environment variables may be used to locate settings files on the client PC This means that each client may use a different setup configuration reading and saving settings locally instead of changing files stored on the server which would affect all clients Each client must use the same user environment variable name to specify the directory path for the TeemTalk settings file s This name is then specified in the registry on the terminal server enclosed by 96 percentage characters For exam
45. start lt end gt This command will copy a number of characters from within a string and place them in a variable where variable is a predefined string variable see var which will store the copied characters lt string gt is the source string from which characters are to be copied lt start gt is the numeric position of the first character to be copied where the first character in the source string is 1 This value must be a number greater than 0 lt end gt is the numeric position of the last character to be copied where the first character in the source string is 1 If this is omitted then all the charac ters to the end of the string will be copied If this value is greater than the number of characters in the source string then the destination variable will include padded spaces so that it matches the number of characters requested If this value is less than the lt start gt value then it will result in an empty string 12 52 Creating A Script File ONERROR Syntax ONERROR action This command will perform the specified action when it encounters an error while the script program is running where action can be one of the following REPORT will display a message box indicating the type of error and the program line that caused it IGNORE will ignore any errors encountered in the program GOTO label will cause the program to go to the line with the specified label when an error is en
46. where filename is a previously defined string variable see var which will store the name of the file This is the only variable that must be specified the others are optional size is a previously defined string or integer variable which will store the size of the file mode is a previously defined string variable which will store the mode modtime is a previously defined string variable which will store the time of the last modification uname is a previously defined string or integer variable which will store the user name gname is previously defined string or integer variable which will store the group name Note that if you require a value which follows one or more that are not required you will still need to supply variables for them For example if you only wanted the time that the file was last modified you would need to specify a variable for size and mode as well as lt modtime gt On a UNIX system the first entry is always This can be followed by one or more ftp dirnext commands to work through the directory listing If the command is invalid then the variable will be set to zero length Refer to the Error Numbers section for a list of possible error numbers 12 38 Creating A Script File FTP DIRNEXT Syntax FTP DIRNEXT LOCAL filename lt size gt mode lt modtime gt lt uname gt lt gname gt FTP DIRNEXT REMOTE filename lt size gt m
47. 0 15 char Flash amp Bold Index ATTRibutes BCKINDFLBOLD 0 I5 char Flash amp Underline ATTRibutes BCKINDFLUNDER 0 15 char Flash Under amp Bold ATTRibutes BCKINDFLUNDBOLD 0 15 char Background Indices Inverse Display GroupID ParamID Value Normal Index ATTRibutes BCKINDINV 0 I5 char Bold Index ATTRibutes BCKINDINVBOLD 0 I5 char Underline Index ATTRibutes BCKINDINVUNDER 0 I5 char Underline amp Bold ATTRibutes BCKINDINVUNDBOLD 0 I5 char Flashing Index ATTRibutes BCKINDINVFLASH 0 I5 char Flash amp Bold Index ATTRibutes BCKINDINVFLBOLD 0 I5 char Flash amp Underline ATTRibutes BCKINDINVFLUNDER 0 I5 char Flash Under Bold ATTRibutes BCKINDINVFLUNDBOLD 0 15 char 12 81 Creating A Script File Keyboard Macros Keyboard macros may be specified using Tektronix key reference numbers or virtual key names A variable can also be specified for the ParamID GroupID Qualifier ParamID Value Delete Macros MACROs DELALL immediate The following commands use the Tektronix key reference numbers listed in the Key Reference Numbers appendix GroupID Qualifier ParamID Value Program Key MACROs key ref string max 80 Non Volatile MACROs NV key ref boolean Default Setting MACROs DEFault key ref immediate The following commands use the virtual key names listed in the Virtual Key Names appendix GroupID Qualifier ParamID Value Normal Key MACROs COMmand key n
48. 50 to 115200 baud Parity Factory default None This option specifies the parity mode for each transmitted character If the number of Data Bits is 8 set this option to None Selecting Odd will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number Selecting Even will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number Mark parity will set every eighth bit to 1 and Space parity every bit to 0 Flow Control Factory default Xon Xoff This option specifies the type of flow control used to communicate readiness to transmit or receive data from the host It can be set to None DTR RTS DTR RTS or Xon Xoff 7 29 Setup Menus Data Bits Factory default 8 This option specifies the number of data bits sent for each transmitted character Stop Bits Factory default 1 This specifies the number of stop bits sent for each transmitted character Show Port Details Factory default Unselected By default the Services list box will show the server name and general service e g VAX or modem but not the port name If the server has two or more of the same type of service connected for example two modems then you can have the port name displayed as well by selecting this option 7 30 Setup Menus Terminal Settings T
49. A Script File For example to specify that the Kermit protocol end of line character for outbound packets is DEL you would enter the following ftu set parameter kermit seol del where parameter is the group ID kermit is the parameter ID seol is the sub parameter ID and del is the value To specify that you are to receive files you would enter the following where how is the group ID and receive is the parameter ID ftu set how receive Refer to the section entitled FTU SET amp GET Parameters later in this chapter for a complete list of valid group IDs parameter IDs and values Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command Remote Operations The following is an example of how you would get a file from a remote host ftu set remote get this sets the remote option ftu set how remote this sets the transfer method ftu start my txt This requires that the remote host kermit is running in server mode which can be achieved by using the put command as follows put kermit n r put server n To change the directory on the remote host you will need to include a password following the name of the directory within the string separating it from the directory name by the vertical line character with no spaces before or after it unless a space character is part of the password For example ftu set remote change dir ftu set how remote f
50. CurPosStr NONE REQUEST Returns coordinates of current cursor position to calling application in a string Session KeyStr String containing POKE String of characters in virtual key name CF TEXT format that forms command Session KeyPress String containing POKE String of characters in macro definition CF TEXT format that forms command 13 18 Dynamic Data Exchange The first four functions in the table enable interrogation of TeemTalk The remaining functions are described in the following sections functions referenced with the Session topic can additionally be performed using a topic name relating to the relevant TeemTalk instance i e TTLK1 TTLK2 etc as discussed in the section Using The Edit Menu DDE Functions earlier If a TeemTalk session has been created other than Untitled then that session name can be used as the current session topic by an application conversing with TeemTalk Note that changing the session name will remove the link to the session SendMouse amp SendMouseStr SendMouse is used to send the coordinates of a mouse click to a remote application i e host The data structure passed across a DDE link between two co operating applications is defined in the DDE H file supplied as part of the Windows SDK as follows typedef struct tagDDEPOKE WORD unused 13 Earlier versions of DDE H incorrectly 12 unused bits fRelease 1 fReserved 2 Shor
51. Details Directory AABCW Cancel File sap w exe User Group Other Execute Read Read Read User Write Write Write Group Execute Execute Execute Exit This will close the TTWFTP window Note that if you try to exit without disconnecting from the host the following message box will be displayed TTW32FTP 22 Connection is still active Are you sure you want to exit Clicking Yes will disconnect from the host then close the TTWFTP window 10 9 File Transfer The Session Menu Connect to Host Connect to Host This will display a dialog box which enables you to enter details of the remote host and make a connection Connection Configurations Sessions 2 Host hp700 Cancel Login bill Password 7 Account System Auto s Local Directory Remote Directory Delete A connection is made by entering the Host Login Password and if required Account details specifying the operating system of the remote host then clicking the Connect button The operating system type is selected from the System list box which includes the following options Auto VAX MultiNet VAX TCPWare HP3000 VAX UCX V1 NT Prime AS400 VAX UCX V2 UNIX IBM MVS KNET MVS VAX UCX Tandem Dos IBM Interlink Auto will cause FTP to automatically select the appropriate operating system and this setting will be suitable in most cases Not
52. Dialog Settings Burst Scroll Dialog Indices Locked Auto Wrap Dialog Area Visible Cursor Origin r Cursor Style r Columns Relative Underline 80 C Absolute Block 132 Window Resize Action Resize Font Rows 32 Dialog Area Lines Dialog Area Buffer fag Dialog Area Enabled fi Cancel There are four basic methods for making selections within the dialog boxes Options preceded by a check box such as Auto Wrap in the example above are true or selected when the box contains a v or X and false or unselected when the box is empty Click the pointer in the box to toggle the setting on or off When a group of options preceded by round buttons are enclosed in a box such as the Cursor Origin options in the example above only one of these options is selected or true at any one time The currently selected option is indicated by a button with a dark centre These buttons behave just like radio buttons in that clicking one will cause the previously selected button to be deselected Some options require you to type information in a text box such as the Dialog Area Lines option Setup Menus When an option has many possible settings these will be shown in a list box The Baud Rate option in the Serial Settings dialog box is an example of this To make a selection using the mouse click the arrow button to display a drop down list box then click on the setting required If the li
53. F4 gt Entering Command Lines You can enter a command line in a button definition by enclosing it within the and characters This enables you to launch an application by just clicking a button For example to program a button so that another instance of TeemTalk 07W is run when the button is clicked you would enter the following in the Current Tool text box C TEEMTALK TT07W EXE Changing The Window Focus You can program a button to change the currently selected window or icon that is the window or icon to which keyboard and mouse commands will be directed by entering its window class name as a string enclosed by the lt and gt characters For example to program a button so that the TeemTalk 07W window is selected when it is clicked you would enter the following in the Current Tool text box lt tt07w gt tt07w is the window class name for TeemTalk 07W The Toolbar Initiating A Script File You can program a button to run a script file when pressed by enclosing the name of the file and any arguments within the left angle bracket and single quote and gt single quote and right angle bracket characters For example to program a button so that it will run the script file myscript scr and assign the values valuel and value2 to two variables you would enter the following myscript scr valuel value2 7 Refer to the chapter Creating A Script File for more information Removing Button Tools You
54. FTF dialog box Text Formatting Factory default Negotiate This specifies the method of formatting text during the file transfer Clicking on the arrow button will display a list of all the formatting methods supported from which you can make a selection EOR gt FEs EOR gt NL FEs EOR gt NP NL EOR gt NP FEs NL End of record implies new line action No actions are implied by embedded characters End of record implies new line action The formatting actions CR LF NL BS FF NP may also be represented by embedded characters End of record implies new page action The formatting action NL may be represented by embedded characters End of record implies new page action The formatting actions CR LF NL BS FF NP may also be represented by embedded characters No formatting action is specified by end of record but the formatting action NL may be represented by embedded characters ICL FTF File Transfer FEs No formatting action is specified by end of record but the formatting actions CR LF NL BS FF NP may be represented by embedded characters Negotiate FTF negotiates with the remote host to decide on the text formatting required No formatting No formatting actions are implied by end of record or by emdedded characters Maximum Record Size Factory default 1024 This specifies the maximum record size to be found in the data being transmitted Records that are larger than this will
55. INI in the WINNT directory Refer to the FTP Initialization File Entries section later in this chapter for more information The View Menu View v Debug Output File Details This is a toggle function which will display a tick mark when selected Seleting this option will enable debug messages to be displayed in the ftp box at the bottom of Debug Output the TTWFTP window ftp 250 CwD command successful ftp 200 Type set to s File Details This is a toggle function which will display a tick mark when selected Selecting this option will cause details of the currently selected file to be displayed in the status line at the bottom of the TTWFTP window Size 1017344 Date 01 22 37 04 18 Mode 10 12 File Transfer FTP Initialization File Entries Session settings specified in the Connection dialog box can be saved by selecting Save Settings on Exit in the Configure menu This is a toggle function which will display a tick mark when selected The settings are stored in one of the following files Windows 3 1x TTWFTP INI in the WINDOWS directory Windows 95 TTW32FTP INI in the WIN95 directory Windows NT TTW32FTP INI in the WINNT directory The format of the entries is shown in the example below Sessions hp9700 hp9700 ses VaxStation VaxStation ses hp9700 ses Host hp9700 Login root Password 101e002e5f Account SystemType Auto LelDir RemDir VaxStation ses Host vax
56. Index 10
57. LED on the keyboard labelled SPECIAL or DEC is not on This can be toggled on and off by pressing the keys Alt F17 together Keyboard Configuration AT Keyboard Layout DEC VT220 Mode Mapping f rererere WV 1H3SN JEWON LX3N A EE gt Jans 3201 THOS 3901 WAN 953 HUS 149 sdeo ey y uo eui Aq pejeoipur se s ey peyJeWUN Iv AAO S 4907 WAN ueuw MV IM 5 105110 eu HID UUM HIUS JEWJON 3 2 Keyboard Configuration AT Keyboard Layout Tek VT100 amp Edit Mode Mapping All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps 3 3 Keyboard Configuration Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout DEC VT220 Mode Mapping uonounfuoo ui pesn pojejeue suomnounj pejexoelg eui uo eui Aq se s y y gt 1995
58. SYS as it causes interrupts to be delayed longer Note that this will take up precious CONVENTIONAL memory space An ill behaved TSR may be contributing to the problem If so try to isolate it by removing all TSRs then adding them back one at a time Run in standard mode Windows stops virtualizing I O and there is less overhead Remove the SOUNDS DRV driver which enables a variety of sounds from your PC speaker if it is present as this disables inter rupts while activated Other things you could try are listed below Note Check that you using the Windows versions of EMM386 HIMEM SYS and SMARTDRY and not the DOS versions Don t run multiple disk caching programs In CONFIG SYS set FILES to 30 or higher Check that you have SHELL COMMAND COM E 2048 P i e 2K environment If Windows hangs increase the stacks to 64 512 The recommenda tion is 0 0 Check that your TEMP variable points to a subdirectory that actually exists and that there are at least 2 megabytes free on the disk Check that EMMExclude A000 EFFF otherwise Windows will interfere with DOS high memory when it shouldn t For bizarre problems disable shadow RAM If this rectifies the prob lem upgrade your BIOS Disable hardware cache in caching disk controller If you are using V3 1 of Windows communication drivers then try using a serial port with a 16550 UART Microsoft has produced a document called CE OVERRUN Errors
59. TEXT format typedef struct DDE CURS INF int Column int Row DDE_CURSINF FAR LPDDE CURSINF 13 21 Dynamic Data Exchange This needs to be extracted from the DDEDATA message in ord appropriate values One way of doing this is shown below kckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckokckckckckckckckckckckckokckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckok FUNCTION ClientReceiveData er to read the okckckckckckckckckckck kck kk E PURPOSE Called when client application receives WM DD void E DATA message HR kk kk k k k k k k k k k KK KK KK KK KK KKK ClientReceiveData hwndClientDDE hwndServerDDE lParam HWND hwndClientDDE HWND hwndServerDDE LONG lParam DDEDATA FAR lpDDEData PDDE CURSINF lpDdeCursInf BOOL bRelease BOOL bAck if lpDDEData DDEDATA FAR GlobalLock LOWORD lParam lpDDEData cfFormat TEXT PostMessage hwndServerDDE WM DDE ACK hwndClientDDE MAKELONG 0 HIWORD lParam Negative ACK else Read Row Column values in static vars lpDdeCursInf LPDDE_CURSINF 1lpDDEData gt Value CurrentCursRow lpDdeCursInf gt Row CurrentCursCol lpDdeCursInf gt Col if lpDDEData gt fAckReq return ACK or NACK PostMessage hwndServerDDE WM DDE ACK hwndClientDDE MAKELONG bAck 0x8000 0 HIWORD 1 bRelease lpDDEData fRelease GlobalUnl
60. TeemTalk window Disable Minimize Button Initialization File MinimizeBox off Command Line mn Default Setting These commands will remove the minimize button from the TeemTalk window Disable Maximize Button Initialization File MaximizeBox off Command Line mx Default Setting These commands will remove the maximize button from the TeemTalk window 11 18 Initialization Commands Disable Window Frame Initialization File windowFrame off CommandLine fr Default Setting These commands will disable the window frame Disable Title Bar Initialization File titlebar off Command Line tb Default Setting These commands will remove the title bar from the window Disable Menu Items The following initialization file commands will disable individual menu items File Menu FileMenu Off Factory Off Reset Off NewConnection Off OpenSession Off CloseSession Off SaveSession Off SaveSessionAs Off StartupOptions Off Capture Off Replay Off FileTransfer Off FTP Off PrintSetup Off PrintScreen Off PrintBuffer Off AutoPrint Off CancelPrint Off EjectPage Off RunScript Off ScriptRec Off Exit Off Edit Menu EditMenu Off ClipboardText Off ClipboardGraphics Off DDERowCopy Off DDEColumnCopy Off Copy Off Paste Off SelectAll Off ClearBuffer Off Settings Menu SettingsMenu Off Emulation Off Serial Off Terminal Off Dialog Off Gin Off Attributes Off KeyboardMa
61. Topic for the particular instance of TeemTalk under question is given between the and the characters The last piece of information required to establish a permanent data link is the item name itself TeemTalk treats the item name as a direct reference to a position on the display area Each ItemName refers to a line on the screen and is sent in a string representation of the screen coordinates top left is 0 0 followed by the length of the string For example 23 5 8 refers to the area of the screen located at column 24 row 6 and continues for 8 characters A typical copy to the clipboard in the case of a DDE Column Copy would look like this tt07wl TTLK1 18 1 8 tt07wl TTLK1 18 2 8 tt07wl TTLK1 18 3 8 tt07wl TTLK1 18 4 8 tt07wl TTLK1 18 5 8 When a potential client application for example Microsoft Excel has this information pasted into its cells a WM DDE INITIATE message is broadcast using the szAppName and szTopicName fields All applications that recognize the two strings this should be a particular instance of TeemTalk will reply with a positive WM_DDE_ACK message assuming of course that the current TeemTalk document name matches that of the DDE Topic Name Once the client receives the WM_DDE_ACK it will send a WM DDE ADVISE message to TeemTalk Depending upon the information provided by the client within its ADVISE message s Data block TeemTalk will then provide updates reflecting any change t
62. Transfer Settings Save Settings on Exit Display the directory containing the file s to be transferred and the destination directory in the Local and Remote Directory list boxes as required The contents of subdirectories can be displayed by by double clicking the mouse pointer on the folder icons or names The directory path on the remote host can be specified by entering it in the Remote Directory text box then clicking the Apply button or pressing the Return key Note that the directory structure of the AS400 operating system consists of libraries files members Changing the directory changes the library Double clicking a file name folder will display its members documents Select the data format required for the file transfer in the list box above the Local Directory details ASCII is generally used for document files and Binary for executables or non volatile files Tenex is a specialist format for transfer to Tenex type machines Select the file s or directories to be transferred in the relevant directory list box A single item file or directory is selected by clicking the mouse pointer anywhere on the line containing its name Two or more contiguous items can be selected by holding down the Shift key while clicking on them Non contiguous items can be selected by holding down the Ctrl key then clicking on them When you have selected the file s or directories to be transferred place the mouse pointer on a sele
63. Transmit current view visible segs to port ESCPL PLOT TO PARALLEL PORT HOST PRIMARY SETUP Copy screen to parallel printer port ESC ETB Copy to parallel printer port ESC KH Select CR or CRLF for mono printer ESC QE HCMONOCHROME Select colour copier control ESC QR HCRESERVE Select dithered pattern for hardcopy ESC QM HCDITHER Select hardcopy image width ESC QF HCFORMWIDTH E 10 Host Command Summary Select port hardcopy quantity ESCON HCCOPIES Select response to full page ESCKP PAGEFULL Send print data to file ESCAU Set image orientation of hardcopy ESCQO HCORIENT Specify colour resolution of data ESCQB HCDATARES Specify density of hardcopy ESCQU HCDENSITY Specify hardcopy repaint number ESCQT HCREPAINT Specify printer type ESCQD HCINTERFACE Specify size of colour hardcopy ESCQA HCSIZE PIXEL COMMANDS HOST PRIMARY SETUP Begin pixel operations ESCRU PXBEGIN Copy pixels from current to specified surf ESCRX PXCOPY Read pixel file from disk ESCAP Redisplay saved pixel data ESCUK PIXRESTORE Save pixel bit plane memory to main mem ESCUJ PIXSAVE Set pixel beam position ESCRH PXPOSITION Set pixel viewport size ESCRS PXVIEWPORT Specify raster memory colour indices ESCRL PXRUNLENGTHWRITE Write pixel file to disk ESCAO PROGRAMMED STRINGS HOST PRIMARY SETUP Define key programmed string volatile LEARN Define key programmed string non vol NVL
64. WHite BLAck BLUe RED GREen MAGenta CYAn YELlow WHite 12 85 Creating A Script File FTU SET amp GET Parameters This section lists the parameters available for the script language FTU SET and FTU GET commands together with the values they will accept or return The actual value may be specified in upper or lower case may have double quotes to delimit it as a string or may be a previously defined variable The list of parameters and values are shown under the following headings GroupID ParamID SubParamID Value identifies a group of parameters default is CURRent identifies a particular parameter or in the case of Parameter settings a sub group of parameters identifies a particular parameter for Parameter settings is the value to be set or returned The Value will be in one of the following formats if not specifically given immediate boolean string range integer no value required 0 or 1 returned Oor 1 No or Yes True or False OFF or ON a control character e g CR or its decimal value enclosed by double quotes one of a range of integers as shown e g range 1 3 any number Transfer Protocol Settings Kermit XMODEM YMODEM Batch ZMODEM ASCII GroupID ParamID Value TRANSFER KERMIT immediate TRANSFER XMODEM immediate TRANSFER XMODEM 1K immediate TRANSFER YMODEMBATCH immediate TRANSFER ZMODEM immediate TRANSFER ASCH immediate General Paramet
65. Window fills screen 11 17 Window maximized 11 17 Window minimized 11 17 Windowsubtitle 11 21 Windowtitle 11 20 ZMODEM startup 11 15 Insert Mode Indicator 2 19 K Kermit 8 1 Key Mapping Changing 3 10 7 44 Displaying 3 10 7 44 Key Programming Macrosmenu 3 10 7 44 Keyboard AT mapping DEC VT220 mode 3 2 Tek VT100 amp Edit mode 3 3 Changing key functions 3 10 Composing characters 3 16 Cursor key mode 7 32 Cursor keys 3 9 Defining keys 3 10 7 44 Enhanced AT mapping DEC VT220 mode 3 4 Tek VT100 amp Edit mode 3 5 Entering control characters D 2 Eurosign 3 15 7 49 Key reference numbers C 2 Keypad mode 7 32 LK250 mapping 3 1 LK250 450 mapping DEC VT220 mode 3 6 Tek VT100 amp Edit mode 3 7 LK450 mapping 3 1 Macros 3 10 7 44 Mapping changing 3 10 7 44 Mapping showing 3 10 7 44 Nationality 3 9 7 31 Operation 3 1 PowerStation mapping 3 1 Using LK450 11 25 Virtual key names 1 Keywords 4 4 L LK250 450 Keyboard Mapping DEC VT220 mode 3 6 Tek VT100 amp Edit mode 3 7 Loading TeemTalk 2 1 LocalEcho 7 28 Local On Line Button 2 19 Local On Line Setting 7 28 Macros 3 10 7 44 MenuBar 2 13 Disable 11 20 Menu Items Disable 11 19 Minimize amp Maximize Buttons 2 13 Mouse Buttonactions 7 54 Button ref numbers 5 Button tools 7 56 Map to cursor keys joystick 7 39 Mouse Functions Action hotspots 4 4 Default 4 1 Movecursor 4 4 Selectrectangle 4 3 Selecting text for
66. at the bottom of the window will change to display a brief description of the option at the cursor position Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for a complete discussion on selecting and using the options in these menus To close a menu Mouse Click anywhere outside the menu Keyboard Press the Alt key Resizing The Window The menu bar also includes two commands for resizing the window The lt lt and gt gt commands enable you to decrease or increase the size of the window to the size of the next smallest or largest font supported while retaining the same number of lines and columns 2 14 Getting Started To resize the window Mouse Click the pointer over the or commands Keyboard Hold down the Alt key and press the key bearing the underscored character in one of the menu titles for example Alt F Press the right arrow key to move the highlight over lt lt or gt gt and press Return The Toolbar The toolbar and associated floating button palette provide a quick way of actioning commands or displaying setup dialog boxes by just clicking a button TeemTalk displays a toolbar below the menu bar by default ejje Rej eels A t eA 2 Jc ge amp The toolbar contains a series of buttons with graphical representations of their functions These buttons are predefined with functions found in the setup menus You can redefine all the buttons and add or remove buttons from
67. be fragmented This may have the effect of inserting spurious new lines depending on the Text Formatting setting Maximum Transfer Size Factory default Unspecified This specifies the maximum transfer size that will be allowed on this transfer Timeout Interval s Factory default 600 This specifies the timeout in seconds that FTF uses to decide when a transfer should be abandoned Horizontal Tab Settings Factory default Unspecified This text box enables you to specify a pattern to be used for expanding tabs to spaces by typing spaces where there are no tab stops and an asterisk where there is one short pattern repeats up to the end of the line DRS Compatibility Factory default Unselected This option should be selected if a DRS system is involved in the transfer It tells the FTF initiator and responder to make allowances for the limited level of implementa tion in the standard DRS File Transfer product Checking this box will not prevent transfers from working with VME which has a full implementation Retry Connect Factory default Unselected When this option is selected FTF will retry failed connect requests indefinitely otherwise FTF will stop if it cannot connect to the remote host ICL FTF File Transfer Debug Transfer Factory default Unselected This option should only be selected under the guidance of a Pericom representative It causes diagnostic information to be produced which is used for trou
68. box Characters are being lost over serial interfaces The problem is a result of a data overrun in the serial I O controller on the communications board of the PC As characters are received from the outside world the serial I O controller stores characters received over the RS232 and then generates an interrupt to DOS to signify the arrival of a character DOS and subsequently Windows then read this character and pass it to the interested application The problem comes if characters are received faster than they can be processed by the PC Most serial controllers use a buffering technique which stores multiple characters during times of peak loading so that the affect is minimised Because Windows and other applications disable processing of inter rupts for considerable periods of time this buffering is not always sufficient to overcome the problem Below are some suggestions to minimize the problem Edit the CONFIG SYS file so that the stacks statement if one exists reads STACKS 0 0 If this isn t done DOS will turn interrupts off for a short period when there is a hardware interrupt A 3 Troubleshooting Some overruns are caused by SMARTDRY write caching To dis able write caching but continue read caching specify the drive letter without a or For example SMARTDRV C enables read caching but disables write caching Note however that this will slow the PC down Remove the DOS HIGH statement from CONFIG
69. buffer The top row displayed on the screen is designated as row 0 For example to read twenty characters beginning at row 3 and column 18 and place them in the variable called name you would enter the following rdtxy name 3 18 20 REPLAY Syntax REPLAY EMUL lt filespec gt REPLAY HOST lt filespec gt REPLAY CANCEL The replay command is used to replay the contents of a file previously created using the capture command The replay can be directed to both the emulator and host replay emul or just to the host replay host To cancel the replay issue a replay cancel command 12 57 Creating A Script File RETURN Syntax RETURN Terminates a gosub command returning the program to the line following the most recently encountered gosub which has not yet been terminated RST Syntax RST This will reset TeemTalk and cause it to assert the last saved setup configuration RSTR Syntax RSTR variable lt string gt number This command will copy a number of characters from the end of a string and place them in a variable where variable is a predefined string variable see var which will store the copied characters string is the source string from which characters are to be copied number is the number of characters to be copied If this value is greater than the number of characters in the string then the whole string will be copied SAVESET Syntax SAVESET This will
70. can remove individual button tools from the toolbar or you can remove the entire toolbar and floating button palette from the display A button tool is removed by selecting it in the Current Tool list box then clicking the Delete Current button To remove the toolbar and floating button palette from the display deselect the Visible check box Saving The Button Tools When you have finished defining button tools you can save them so that they will be reasserted when TeemTalk is loaded or reset by selecting Save Session in the File menu Button tool definitions are saved in a file which has the same name and is in the same directory as the current workspace file but with the extension tbr instead of If you specify a different workspace file name in the Save Session As dialog box and save the current settings TeemTalk will automatically make a copy of the current button tool definitions file and give it the new workspace name if a file with the same name does not already exist Hotspots Hotspots This chapter describes the hotspot facility which enables functions to be performed by clicking on keywords displayed on the screen Using Hotspots TeemTalk incorporates a user definable hotspot facility which enables you to invoke function by clicking the mouse pointer over a keyword displayed on the screen For example an application may display information relating to keys you can press to perform a particular functio
71. check box determines how the host interprets blank lines encountered in a data transmission When the box is unchecked lines will be uploaded as they exist The host will interpret a blank line as an end of message marker When the box is checked a space will be added to lines that contain only a CR or CR LF code This enables lines of text to be spaced out 8 13 File Transfer ZMODEM Parameters Send Receive Data Conversion None None File Transfer Action Defaut Defaut Receive Existing File Only mi P Change to in Filename c Send Full Pathname Yes Remote Command Window Size 8192 Escape Control Codes Cancel SaveSettings Clicking the Zmodem button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box will cause the ZMODEM Parameters dialog box to be displayed This enables you to set parameters specific to the ZMODEM protocol The Send settings inform the remote end how to treat the data that will be sent to it The Receive settings will override any Send settings specified at the remote end Once the settings have been selected the initialization file can be modified to reflect the changes under the heading TeemTalkFTU ZMODEM by checking the Save Settings box then clicking the OK button The zmodemStartup private profile file command or zm command line option can be used to make TeemTalk check incoming data for a remote ZMODEM startup sequen
72. colour ESC RR PXRECTANGLE Specify alpha cursor colour indices ESC TD ACURSOR Specify dialog area colour indices ESCLI DAINDEX Specify index monochrome printing ESC QI HCMAP Specify pixel colour indices ESCRP PXRASTERWRITE DIALOG AREA HOST PRIMARY SETUP Delete specified dialog area ESC K K DELDAREA Enable dialog area ESC K A DAENABLE Enable dialog area display ESCLV DAVISIBILITY Erase dialog area buffer ESCLZ CLEARDIALOG Set dialog area hardcopy attributes ESCQL HCDAATTRIBUTES Specify dialog area maximum line length ESCLC DACHARS Specify dialog area position ESCLX DAPOSITION Specify no of visible lines in dialog area ESCLL DALINES Specify size of dialog area buffer ESCLB DABUFFER GENERAL HOST PRIMARY SETUP Acivate screen dim ESCKG DIM Backspace BS Cancel current ESC seq amp display error CAN Cancel operation amp reset ESCKC CANCEL Carriage return CR Display command amp param current values STATUS Display command information HELP Display decoded value of encoded param DECODE Display encoded value of host com param ENCODE Enable port to port communications ESCPC PCOPY End spooling STOPSPOOL End write command file to disk ESCAX Host Command Summary Enter Alpha mode US Enter Marker mode FS Enter Vector mode GS Exit TeemTalk to DOS ESCAE Insert FF amp advance cursor FF Line feed LF Lock keyboard ESC KL Lock viewing keys for zoom pan
73. commands that can be used instead of the default set as specified by a command line option Each command must be entered on a separate line under this heading Note that the commands are not case sensitive The following default command group example will cause TeemTalk to attempt to connect to a network host called neoware using the TCP IP protocol and display two levels of soft buttons startup default host neoware protocol tcpip buttonlevels 2 You can specify more than one set of startup commands in the private profile file Each set of commands other than the default set must have the following heading startup name where name can be any unique identifying name You can specify which set of startup commands TeemTalk is to use by including the following on the command line for loading TeemTalk where name is substituted with the actual name of the startup group required If this command is not present then TeemTalk will use the startup commands under the startup default heading 11 4 Initialization Commands Command Line Option Format The command line is entered in the Microsoft Windows Program Item Properties dialog box which is displayed by selecting File then Properties in the Program Manager window when the TeemTalk icon is selected Options are entered after the name of your TeemTalk program and each option must be preceded by a space An option is immediately followed by its setting if
74. composed depend on the setting of the Multinational option in the Emulation Settings dialog box When this option is not selected only characters found in the character set that corresponds to the selected keyboard nationality can be composed When Multinational is selected default characters from all national keyboard layouts may be composed If a character is a diacritical symbol e g or and this symbol does not appear on the keyboard an equivalent character can be used in some cases The diacritical symbols and the possible substitutes are shown below There are no equivalents for the circumflex accent and tilde mark Diacritical Mark Equivalent Character Acute accent Apostrophe Umlaut Double quote Grave accent Single quote Ring mark Asterisk or degree sign To compose a character first find the character you wish to compose in the left hand column of the following tables The two characters shown in the right hand column are the keys that are used to create it Several alternatives may be given for generating the same character A compose sequence is initiated by pressing the keys Alt I together followed by the key bearing the first character then the key bearing the second character Note The compose character sequence can also be initiated by pressing a key defined with the COMPOSE virtual key name A compose character sequence may be abandoned before completion by pressing the Delete key Pressing Alt I
75. description where description must exactly match the description assigned to a connection template already saved using the Save Session As dialog box The description must be enclosed by double quotes Setup Menus Menu Descriptions The following pages describe the options available in all the menus and associated dialog boxes The descriptions begin by showing the menu or dialog box as it is displayed on the screen The factory default setting is shown below each option title where applicable File Menu Factory Default Reset Terminal New Connection Open Session Save Session Save Session As Startup Options Capture File Replay File File Transfer Printer Setup Print Screen Print Buffer Auto Print Eject Page Run Script Exit Factory Default This will make TeemTalk reassert all the original settings that it had when you first installed it A message box will be displayed asking you to confirm whether or not you want to assert the factory default settings Click the OK button to assert the factory defaults or Cancel to cancel the selection Confirm Factory Default x 22 Confirm Factory Default Cancel 7 8 Setup Menus Reset Terminal This will reset the current terminal emulation mode New Connection Factory default Serial Com 1 This will display a dialog box which enables you to make a serial or network host connection
76. description of the Cursor Origin option in the Dialog Settings dialog box Getting Started D Insert Replace character mode is set to Replace E Keys PF1 through PF4 generate ANSI cursor movement se quences F All programmed strings for keys are temporarily disabled VT220 7 and VT220 8 modes are emulations of the DEC 220 terminal the difference is in their treatment of 8 bit control codes When VT220 7 is selected all 8 bit codes are converted to their 7 bit equivalents whereas VT220 8 leaves 8 bit codes unchanged If you are using VT200 applications select VT220 7 W3220 mode provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Westward 3220 terminal Tablet amp Mouse Configuration If you are using a tablet or mouse you must specify the type of device and the port to which it is connected before TeemTalk will recognize it To do this display the Gin Settings dialog box by selecting Gin in the Settings menu Tablet Type r Serial Port Device 6 MM1201 C Comi Com3 C MM1812 Com2 C Com4 C Bitpad Plus Calcomp Gin Tablet Characters Mouse m p p Map Mouse To Joystick Cancel The Tablet option specifies the graphics input GIN device that is attached to your system and the data format that TeemTalk uses to communicate with it TeemTalk incorporates several tablet drivers The following list includes the baud rate data bits stop bits and parity settings th
77. directory Newer will cause files to be transferred if they do not exist in the destination directory and will replace files with the same name if the transfer files are more recent Length Differs will cause files to be transferred if they do not exist in the destination directory and will replace files with the same name if the file sizes or dates differ Absent will cause files to be transferred if they are absent from the destination directory Receive Existing File Only Factory default Unselected When this option is selected only files with the same name in the destination directory are transferred Change in Filename Factory default Unselected This option enables you to specify that all period characters in the name of a transfer file are converted to forward slash characters Send Full Pathname Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether or not the full pathname associated with a transfer file is sent 8 15 File Transfer Remote Command Factory default Not specified This enables you to enter a command that will be sent to the remote end to initiate the file transfer If a remote command is specified this will be sent to the host with a terminating carriage return character before the transfer is started Window Size Factory default 8192 When a file transfer has been initiated ZMODEM will send data continuously to the receiving end If the receiving end
78. e g a single character or a string of characters where lt string gt is the string or variable containing the string to be parsed lt variable gt are two previously defined string variables see var into which characters from the string will be placed lt key gt is a single character or a string of characters which signifies that all following characters in the string are to be placed in the second variable If the string contains the key then all the characters preceding the first instance of the key will be placed in the string variable specified by lt variable1 gt and all following characters will be placed in the second variable If the key is not found in the string then all the characters will be placed in the first variable Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command PASSWORD Syntax PASSWORD lt title gt caption entry x lt y gt This command enables you to display a simple dialog box for password entry where keyboard entered text is displayed as asterisks The box will have a specified title contain two buttons Ok and Cancel and a single line text box with a specified prompt The command parameters are as follows lt title gt is the text to be displayed in the title bar of the dialog box as specified by a string delimited by double quotes or the name of a previously defined string variable see var caption is th
79. follows data communications between the two applications are Cold links That is each exchange of data needs to be invoked via an explicit request for it from one or the other partners TeemTalk in fact initiates the link and as such is considered to be the Client Once the link is established TeemTalk does not try and display or act upon any subsequent data it receives from the currently connected host data is deemed to be of importance to the file transfer utility and so is just buffered up and sent across the DDE link when requested to do so In a similar fashion the file transfer utility also has a monopoly on the transmission of data so all input to TeemTalk is ignored except for that sent to it via the DDE link which will then be directed on to the host This situation continues until the File Transfer Utility sends a message to TeemTalk that it has finished which then allows TeemTalk to revert to its normal mode of operation Slave Mode TeemTalk for Windows 3 1 not Windows 95 or NT provides a Slave mode which allows another Windows based application to send formatted data to be interpreted by TeemTalk For example a Windows based package could be written to send Tektronix 4207 escape sequences which could be interpreted by TeemTalk 07W and thereby the application could use the capabilities of TeemTalk 07W to display the resultant image One way that a process can act as a DDE client to TeemTalk is by initiating a D
80. get command An invalid ParamID was specified for a pget pset ftu set or ftu get command An invalid SubParamID was specified for an ftu set or ftu get command Invalid soft button name specified in pget or pset command Error has no definition 12 72 Creating A Script File PSET amp PGET Parameters amp Values This section lists the parameters available for the PSET and PGET commands together with the values they will accept or return Abbreviations are allowed in many cases the essential characters being shown in UPPER CASE with the rest of the value in lower case The actual value may be specified in upper or lower case may have double quotes to delimit it as a string or may be a predefined variable Note that the PGET values will be returned in their full non abbreviated versions with the abbreviation characters in uppercase and the remainder in lowercase as shown in the listings If you require the value to be returned entirely in uppercase use the su command line option or ScriptUppercase on initialization file command The list of parameters and values are shown under the following headings GroupID identifies a group of parameters default is CURRent ParamID identifies the particular sub parameter Value is the value to be set or returned Qualifiers qualifies the following Parameter ID The Value will be in one of the following formats if not specifically given immediate no value required
81. gt t Numeric Operators Subtraction The operator takes on one of two guises depending on how it is used It is interpreted as a simple subtraction operator in a command such as Data 4 2 which would set the value stored in Data to 2 However it can also be used as a negate or unary minus operator when used in the following way Data 4 2 which would set the value stored in Data to 8 Less Than Greater Than lt lt gt gt These provide a test allowing the comparison of two numeric values of use within an IF statement For example var Input inp Input a number between 1 and 10 Input if Input lt 0 goto routinel else if Input gt 10 goto routinel else wrt Input value Input n goto routine2 routinel wrt You gave an invalid input n routine2 exit 12 14 Creating A Script File Equivalence Testing The and operators allow you to check that a variable is set to a particular value For example the following lines could be inserted between the 6th and 7th lines in the above sample code to provide a check for a specific value else if Input 5 wrt That s the value I wanted_n_r or alternatively replace the 7th and 9th lines with the following else if Input 5 wrt That s not the value I wanted_n_r Division Operators The operator performs a straight forward division operati
82. hold down the Shift key and click the Left mouse button at the new position Click the Right mouse button to copy the selected text to the clipboard Text copied to the clipboard may be pasted at the current cursor position by holding down the Shift key and clicking the Right mouse button Disabling The Copy amp Paste Functions In some cases it may be necessary to disable the copy and paste function of the mouse buttons to prevent accidental editing This can be achieved using the following initialization file commands or command line options Initialization file mouseEdit off or mouseEdit disabled Command line me0 allows highlighting but no copy or paste mel allediting functions enabled me2 all editing functions disabled When the mouse editing functions are disabled use the Edit menu options or the following keyboard commands to copy and paste instead Copy Shift Delete i e Numeric keypad key Paste Shift Insert i e Numeric keypad 0 key Mouse Functions 2 Button Mouse Emulating 3 Button You can assign the function of the middle button found on a three button mouse to any button or button and key combination The Mouse Button Actions dialog box includes a Middle Button setting for this purpose Show amp Action Hotspots TeemTalk incorporates a user definable hotspot facility which enables you to invoke a function by clicking the mouse cursor over a keyword displayed on the screen For exampl
83. is created when the Start button is clicked System information can be gained by using the buttons at the bottom of the screen You can send information to TeemTalk by entering text in the box and clicking the Send button Various items are hardcoded into this like the name of the TeemTalk executable and the name of the script file spider network ag teemtalk DDE Demo Session 1 SunOS UNIX pericom login root Password Last login Fri Jun 16 11 08 51 from lesley Start Run TT script Send DDE Info Session 2 tbs1405 bdf trm1205 bdf xt340mt h79 nl tbs1407 bdf trm1206 bdf xt340mt osf tbs1605 bdf trm1207 bdf xt340mt osf hapi tbs1608 bdf trm1208 bdf xt340mt osf nl tbs2006 bdf trm1210 bdf xt340mt rs6 tbs2010 bdf trm1212 bdf xt340mt rs6 hapi tbs2407 bdf trm1214 bdf xt340mt rs6 nl Sysltems DDE Info On Linell Note To make an executable file from Visual Basic select Make EXE File in the File menu and enter a suitable file name 13 24 Dynamic Data Exchange DDEDEMO VERSION 2 00 Begin Form Form1 Caption ClientHeight ClientLeft ClientTop ClientWidth Height Left LinkTopic ScaleHeight ScaleWidth Top Width spider network ag TeemTalk DDE Demo 640 199 900 651 682 194 SEO 640 651 528 661 Begin CommandButton cls Caption FontBold FontItalic FontName FontSize Height Index Left TabIndex Top Width End
84. length of the source string then the entire source string will be copied to the destination variable without formatting The following example will copy the string contained in the variable orig to the variable new add spaces to make it 20 characters long and make the text right aligned fstr r new orig 20 FTP CD Syntax FTP CD LOCAL directory path FTP CD REMOTE directory path This FTP file transfer command enables you to change the current local or remote directory The directory path must be enclosed by double quotes The following entries are also valid and Note that ftp local will not affect the user s working directory Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command 12 36 Creating A Script File FTP CONNECT Syntax FTP CONNECT system host lt login gt password lt account gt This enables you to make a host connection for FTP file transfer The system entry specifies the type of operating system used by the remote host and must be one of the following entered exactly as shown and enclosed by double quotes Auto NT IBM MVS IBM Interlink VAX UCX V1 UNIX Dos Other VAX UCX V2 Tandem HP3000 VAX UCX V3 VAX TCPWare AS400 VAX MultiNet Prime KNET MVS Auto will cause FTP to automatically select the appropriate operating system and this setting will be suitable in most cases Note that some DOS based FTP
85. mode may not be supported by the remote responder File Password This text box enables you to enter a file password if one is required before you are allowed to do a file transfer Information Message This text box enables you to enter a message that may be logged in the remote sys tem s journal depending on the remote implementation Account This text box enables you to specify an account if required before you can do a file transfer Account Password This text box enables you to enter an account password if one is required before you are allowed to do a file transfer Output Device Type This enables you to specify the device to be used for output when you selected Print for the remote file operation If you are transmitting to VME the value of this param eter is a property associated with the device to be used for output as specified in the unit description Output Device Qualifier This text box enables you to enter a qualifying string to the device to be used for output when you selected Print for the remote action If you are transmitting to VME this will be interpreted as an identifier for printer stationery File Transfer Text Storage Code Factory default Host Default This specifies the code in which data is stored at the remote system Usually you can leave this set to Host Default so that the remote system decides for itself what code the data is stored in Print Factory default
86. occur to the source data the copied data can be updated automatically so that you do not have to copy and paste the data again A tick will be displayed next to the option when it is selected and the Paste command will be disabled The DDE Row Copy and DDE Column Copy options enable selected data to be copied in a format suitable for applications which use cells to store information such as spreadsheets When the Copy command is used selected data will be copied so that each line is treated as a separate cell The way in which each cell of data is inserted in the application s worksheet when pasted is determined by whether the DDE Row Copy or DDE Column Copy option was selected before the Copy command was used DDE Row Copy will enable each line of copied data to be pasted in a row of selected cells and DDE Column Copy will enable each line of copied data to be pasted in a column of selected cells Note Refer to the Dynamic Data Exchange chapter for more information 7 21 Setup Menus Copy This command becomes available ungreyed when data has been selected The function of this command is determined by whether the Clipboard Text Clipboard Graphics DDE Row Copy or DDE Column Copy option is selected When the Clipboard Text or Clipboard Graphics option is selected this command will cause currently selected text or graphics to be copied to the clipboard The data can then be inserted in a different position or another file us
87. of a combination or sequence of keys For example you can cause a button to perform the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together or pressing the keys F2 then then F4 Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names appendix The virtual key name has to be enclosed by the and characters in the Command text box You may omit the VK VT parts etc of the virtual key name To program a soft button so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more other keys together type the character followed by the virtual key names linked together with characters and ending with the gt character For example to program the button B1 so that when it is clicked it performs the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together enter the following characters in the B1 Command text box lt ALT F4 gt To program a soft button so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of keys one after the other enter each virtual key name in the order required enclosing each virtual key name with the lt and gt characters Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces For example to program the button B2 so that when it is clicked it performs the same function as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following characters in the B2 Command text box lt F2 gt lt F3 gt lt F4 gt Entering C
88. one is required without a space in between The following example will load TeemTalk 07W with the session configuration assigned to the description MYSETUP and disable the scroll bar C TEEMTALK TT07W EXE se MYSETUP sb 11 5 Initialization Command Summary indicates the command does not apply to TeemTalk 05W or TeemTalk 05W32 Network Connection Command Function Network host name Network protocol Load Winsock on startup NetBIOS version TSR identifier Windows 3 1x Input queue size New session warning message Exit on connection close fail No exit on connection close fail Reconnect on close fail Close connection on exit Telnet Initialization File hostname protocol protocol Command Line host protocol host protocol LoadWinsockOnStartup on lw UngBassExtendedNetBIOS no yes netid identifier InputQueue 0 4096 sessionWarning off exitOnClose on exitOnClose off exitOnClose connect warnExit off iidentifier q0 4096 0S e el e2 1 Command Function Suppress Telnet echo option Telnet binary options Telnet EOR options Telnet break send TM Telnet break send CR Session Configuration TeemTalk Private Profile File TelnetEchoSuppress yes no TelnetBinary yes no TelnetEORzyes no TelnetSendBreak TMzyes no TelnetSendBreakCR yes no Command Function Startup command group to action Private profile file to use Path for emulation settings
89. options available in detail Note that FTP only operates on the Windows Sockets stack 1 Display the File menu and select FTP The presence of all available drives including floppy disk drives and network drives will be checked before the window is displayed Note that this may take a few seconds TTWFTP BE File Session Configure View Help 4 a Fy Be ASCII 7 7 Remote Directory Local Directory He nigel HZ tcreator HZ tmelltn xtech bboard demos distrib hds hds dev pea pea ro kermit HZ login HC3hllapi ro ftp No active connections 10 1 File Transfer The left hand list box will display the contents of the local home directory on your current drive by default The drive selection list box above it enables you to specify a different disk drive KM To make a remote host connection display the Connection dialog box either by clicking the following button in the toolbar or by selecting Connect to Host in the Session menu Connect to Host Connection x Configurations Sessions C Connect Host hp700 6 Cancel Login bill Password S Account System uto 7 Local Directory Remote Directory Delete Enter the Host name Login details and Password relevant for the host you wish to connect to on some systems you may be required to enter th
90. pattern is selected by specifying the number of the pattern required after the FILLPATTERN command in Primary Setup Fill patterns are numbered as follows Solid fill patterns are numbered 0 to 15 left to right Textured fill patterns are numbered 1 to 16 left to right 2 18 Getting Started Dithered fill patterns are numbered 50 to 174 left to right top to bottom as follows Row 1 50 to 65 Row 5 115 to 129 Row 2 66 to 81 Row 6 130 to 145 Row 3 82 to 97 Row 7 146 to 161 Row 4 98 to 114 Row 8 162 to 174 Print This will display a dialog box which enables you to produce a hardcopy of data displayed on the screen in a specified format Refer to the description of the File menu Print Screen option in the Setup Menus chapter for more information The Status Bar The status bar consists of several fields and buttons which show the status of various operations and enable you to switch between modes Local Pause VT188 881 881 Overstrike Mode Printer Ready F1 B1 B2 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Field 1 This displays two LEDs The first LED indicates whether or not you are connected to the host It will show red when not connected and green when you are connected The second LED indicates whether or not data is being sent to or from the host It will show dull green when there is no activity red when data is being sent to the host and bright green when data is being received from the host Button 1 This enables you to swit
91. print off ESC 4i Auto print on ESC 5i Print controller on 51 Print controller off ESC 4i Print cursor line ESC 1i Print page ESC i REPORTS HOST PRIMARY SETUP Report compatibility level ESC gt Report cursor position ESC Report keyboard nationality ESC 26n Report operating status ESC 5n Report terminal emulation mode ESC 0 Report VT terminal identity ESC 0 Report VT terminal identity ESC Report VT terminal identity ESC 7 E 5 Host Command Summary ANSI VT220 Mode When TeemTalk is in 220 7 or 8 bit mode the following commands will be executed in addition those listed previously for ANSI VT100 mode CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES HOST PRIMARY SETUP Non erase attribute on ESC 1 q Non erase attribute off 2 0 or 2 ESC q CHARACTER SET SELECTION HOST PRIMARY SETUP Assign G2 label to character set ESC second is parameter Assign G3 label to character set ESC Extre character sets DEC VT220 Additional Tek Additional 3 Assign labelled set to 8 bit codes ESC Assign G2 labelled set to 7 bit codes ESCn Assign G2 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character ESCN Assign G2 labelled set to 8 bit codes ESC Assign G3 labelled set to 7 bit codes ESC 0 Assign labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character ESC O Assign G3 labelled set to 8 bit codes ESC Clear redefinable character set Load redefinable character set ESC P1 1 2 SP ESC ESC P ESC
92. receive 0 Caption Stop receive text2 LinkMode 0 text2 LinkTopic TT07W Session text2 LinkItem Receive text2 LinkMode 1 Else receive 0 Caption Receive text2 LinkMode 0 End If 13 30 Dynamic Data Exchange End Sub Sub status Click index As Integer text2 LinkMode 0 text2 LinkTopic TT07W System text2 LinkItem Status text2 LinkMode 2 text2 LinkRequest End Sub Sub Sysitems Click index As Integer text2 LinkMode 0 text2 LinkTopic TT07W System text2 LinkItem SysItems text2 LinkMode 2 text2 LinkRequest End Sub Sub topics Click index As Integer text2 LinkMode 0 text2 LinkTopic TT07W System text2 LinkItem Topics text2 LinkMode 2 text2 LinkRequest End Sub Sub ttscr Click index As Integer text2 LinkMode 0 If index 0 Then text2 LinkTopic TT07W ttlk1 Else text2 LinkTopic TT07W ttlk2 End If text2 LinkItem Escape text2 LinkMode 2 text2 LinkExecute Escape Chr 27 P2zC TTLKW31 scripts DEMO SCR WIN INIT Chr 27 End Sub Sub TTstat_Click index As Integer If index 0 Then For i 0 To 6 Text1 i LinkMode 0 Textl1 i LinkTopic TTO7W tt1k1 Text1 i LinkItem 0 i 80 Text1 i LinkMode 1 Next i Else For i 0 To 6 Text1 i 12 LinkMode 0 Text1 i 12 LinkTopic TTO7W tt1k2 13 31 Dynamic Data Exchange
93. same name You can delete a session name and its associated settings by selecting the name then clicking the Delete button You will be asked to confirm the deletion Confirm 2 Do you really want to delete the session Session names and associated settings can be saved by selecting Save Settings on Exit in the Configure menu This is a toggle function which displays a tick mark when selected Disconnect from Host This will close the current connection with the remote host The Configure Menu Configu Transfer Settings v Save Settings on Exit Transfer Settings This will display a dialog box which enables you to select or deselect lowercase conversion File names that incorporate uppercase characters may cause transfer problems on some systems for example DOS machines Selecting the Lowercase 10 11 File Transfer Conversion option will cause all uppercase characters in the name of the file to be converted to lowercase during the transfer process Transfer Settings X Lowercase Conversion Cancel Save Settings on Exit This is a toggle function which will display a tick mark when selected When selected all the currently defined session names and associated settings will be saved when you exit FTP settings are stored one of the following files Windows 3 1x TTWFTP INI in the WINDOWS directory Windows 95 TTW32FTP INI in the WIN95 directory Windows NT TTW32FTP
94. servers cannot automatically be resolved so it is advisable to select DOS when you know the target server is based on a DOS machine VAX UCX applies to versions higher than V2 Only choose Other if none of the other selections work Any of the lt login gt lt password gt and lt account gt parameters may be omitted but if a specified parameter follows then an empty string must be entered for the omitted parameter s The following example specifies the host as pericom omits the login parameter specifies a password and omits the account ont monn ftp connect Auto pericom password Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command FTP COPYDLG Syntax FTP COPYDLG lt ON OFF gt When set to ON this command will cause a message box to be displayed when a file is being transferred indicating that the transfer is in progress The box will be cleared from the display once the transfer is completed Script FTP FTP copy in progress please wait 12 37 Creating A Script File FTP DIRFIRST Syntax FTP DIRFIRST LOCAL filename lt size gt mode lt modtime gt lt uname gt lt gname gt FTP DIRFIRST REMOTE filename lt size gt mode lt modtime gt lt uname gt lt gname gt This FTP file transfer command will get the first entry in the current local or remote directory and place it in the previously defined string variables
95. that is to be sent to the remote host or written to depending on the transfer direction You can either type in the filename or click on Browse to view the PC s directory structure and make a selection Note that if you only enter the filename and not the directory then FTF will assume the file is in the directory in which TeemTalk was installed In the Remote Filename text box specify the name of the file on the remote host that is to be read or written to depending on the transfer direction This can be the same name as the local filename File Transfer 7 Ifthe file to be transferred is a binary file change the Data Type setting to Binary otherwise leave it as Text No translation of the data will be performed during the transfer 8 Specify the Direction of the file transfer by selecting To Host or From Host 9 Ifyou want to change the default parameter settings for the file transfer click on the During Transfer button to specify the transfer of the data in more detail or the At Remote Host button for options relating to the remote host These options are described in the following sections 10 If you are sending a file to the remote host click on the Start Transfer button If you are receiving a file from the host click on the Start Responder button Note that clicking Start Responder will also enable the remote host to get files from your PC This can be run at any time and will simply run as a backgro
96. that the host is ready to accept what is sent by the put command You can use the Display Controls option in the Terminal Settings dialog box to find this out The script could now be attached to a soft button or key mouse button hotspot etc so that you could simply click on the relevant button to attach to a different host computer Indeed several buttons could be set up in this way to allow attachment to a variety of different host computers on the network Programming Soft Buttons The LOGON script described in the previous section can be attached to a soft button as follows pset buttons name SB1L1 log on pset buttons command SB1L1 logon 2 exit This will label the first button on the top row of soft buttons Level 1 as 106 and cause the script logon to be invoked when the left mouse button is clicked on this soft button This is because the command which we programmed into this button included the delimeters lt and gt which signify that a script file should be invoked with the filename specified To enable connection to more than one host you can program a separate button for each required connection as follows pset buttons LITITLE CONNECT pset buttons name SB1L1 TEK pset buttons command SB1L1 lt logon1 gt pset buttons name SB2L1 W3220 pset buttons command SB2L1 logon2 pset buttons name SB3L1 VAX 1 pset buttons command SB3L 1 lt logon3 gt pset buttons name SB4L1 V
97. the name of the script file plus any parameters refer to the section entitled Assigning Values To Variables within the left angle bracket and single quote and gt single quote and right angle bracket characters 12 2 Creating A Script File For example to program a key or button so that it will run the script file myscript scr and assign the values valuel to variable ArgV1 and value2 to ArgV2 you would enter the following in the key button definition text box lt myscript scr valuel value2 gt Refer to the Keyboard Macros and Soft Buttons sections in the Setup Menus chapter for information on programming keys and buttons Using An Escape Sequence A script file can be initiated remotely by using the following escape sequence ESC P 2 z filename ESC where filename can include arguments as described in the next section Assigning Values To Variables You can specify the value of specific variables within the script file by using the combination immediately following the name of the script file to be run For example myscript scr valuel value2 etc Each value within the parentheses must be separated by a comma with no spaces in between The script decoder stores the number of values specified also treating the name of the script file as a value in the integer variable ArgC The values themselves are assigned to the following ArgV string variables ArgV0 contains the name of the script file myscri
98. the Yes button will delete the named file or directory then wait for confirmation for the next if more than one file was selected Clicking Yes to All will cause all selected files to be deleted without waiting for additional confirmation Clicking No will cancel the named file while allowing the next file in the selection to be displayed for confirmation Clicking Cancel will cancel the selection and close the dialog box Note You can prevent the deletion of files and directories by including a command in the FTP initialization file Refer to the FTP Initialization File Entries section at the end of this chapter for details Rename This will display a dialog box which enables you to change the name of a file or directory on the local PC Current Directory FADEMOS L o Cancel From 320MTRS6 TAZ oco 10 8 File Transfer Create Directory This will display a dialog box which enables you to create a new directory or library 445400 on the local PC or remote host Create Directory xi Current Directory f bboard Cox N Cancel Remote Change Mode This will display a dialog box which enables you to change the permission settings available to you for a specified file on the remote host Note that some FTP sites may not have remote change mode facilities in which case this dialog box will not be available or the user will be unable to perform the request Remote Change Mode x
99. the definition will be transmitted to the host Default Key Definitions The default definition of a specific key may be reasserted by clicking the Default button in the Define Key Macro dialog box for that key The default definition of the entire keyboard may be reasserted by clicking the Default button in the Keyboard Macros dialog box 7 48 Setup Menus Euro Sign TeemTalk enables you to generate the euro sign from the keyboard by pressing the keys Alt 4 by default TeemTalk also provides a cross mapping mechanism to allow any unused character symbols or string to be cross mapped to display the euro This means for instance that a host application needing to display the euro could be adjusted to send an unused character or character string which TeemTalk would convert to the euro symbol Keyboard mapping is also configurable to allow the input to the application to be similarly cross mapped The cross mapping configuration is specified in the Euro Currency Symbol dialog box which is displayed by clicking the Euro Sign button in the Define Key Macro dialog box European Currency Symbol Cancel Sends 8 Received As 8 Printed As TeemTalk also provides the ability to print the euro symbol on printers that are euro compliant or to send a set of sequences that approximate to that symbol on non euro compliant printers Similarly data can be copied to or pasted from other Microsoft Windows desktop applications
100. the same line as the button number and name The definition can be up to 80 characters long The following sections describe various ways in which you can define the buttons When you have finished defining a particular level of soft buttons either click the OK button to apply the changes and close the dialog box or click Apply to apply the changes without exiting so that you can define another level straight away You can save the new button definitions so that TeemTalk will reassert them each time it is loaded or reset by displaying the Save Session As dialog box selecting the Soft Buttons option then clicking the OK button Entering Control Characters You can enter a control character either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the control character for the Return key function CR carriage return can be entered by typing the characters and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as 013 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references 7 51 Setup Menus Key Combinations amp Sequences You can program a soft button to perform the function
101. the word size If you wish to specify a different local directory for received files click the Local button to display the Local System Directory Change Directory dialog box then specify the new directory as described in the Local Operation section at the end of this chapter File Transfer 6 Ifthe kermit protocol is being used and the host kermit is in remote mode click the Remote button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box then the Get button in the Remote Operations dialog box to specify the file to be received otherwise click the Receive button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box Note The program waits for the arrival of one or more files from the host 7 Click the Start button If you selected the XMODEM XMODEM 1K or ASCII protocol a dialog box will be displayed in which you specify the name of the file to be received AII the other protocols do not require this as the filename is provided by the sender When the transfer begins a window will be displayed indicating the status of the file transfer File Transfer Data Iof xl Transfer by XMODEM Sending file TEST DOC Saved as test doc Bytes moved 3072 Total packets 24 Total retries 0 Percentage 30 Last message Sending File On completion of the transfer or if the transfer is cancelled refer to the next section an audible tone will sound and appropriate messages will be displayed ASCII requires user intervention and w
102. them each time it is loaded or reset by displaying the Save Session As dialog box from the File menu selecting the Keyboard Macros option then clicking the OK button Entering Control Characters You can enter a control character either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the control character for the Return key function CR carriage return can be entered by typing the characters and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as 013 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references Key Combinations amp Sequences You can program a key to perform the function of a combination or sequence of keys For example you can cause the F1 key to perform the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together or pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names appendix The virtual key name has to be enclosed by the and characters in the key definition text box You may omit the VK and VT etc parts of the virtual key name To program a key so that it performs the same function as press
103. through the directory listing If the command is invalid then the variable will be set to zero length DIRNEXT Syntax DIRNEXT filename lt size gt mode lt modtime gt lt uname gt lt gname gt This will get the next entry in the working directory following a dirfirst command and place it in the previously defined string variables where filename is a previously defined string variable see var which will store the name of the file This is the only variable that must be specified the others are optional size is a previously defined string or integer variable which will store the size of the file mode is a previously defined string variable which will store the mode modtime 1 a previously defined string variable which will store the time of the last modification uname is previously defined string or integer variable which will store the user name UNIX only gname is a previously defined string or integer variable which will store the group name UNIX only Note that if you require a value which follows one or more that are not required you will still need to supply variables for them For example if you only wanted the time that the file was last modified you would need to specify a variable for size and mode as well as lt modtime gt This command can be followed by more dirnext commands to work through the directory listing If the command is invalid or
104. to be redrawn by clicking the GErase button Default Font Sizes The size of the font used by default when TeemTalk is loaded usually depends on the type of display adaptor in your system However you can specify a different default font size using the initialization file command defaultFontIndex or df command line option where is the index of the font as defined in the following table The size of the font for a particular index will vary depending on the terminal emulation Specifying an index outside the range for the emulation will cause the highest valid index number for that emulation to be used The font sizes are defined in pixels 2 21 Getting Started Font DEC VT Modes Tek 4205 4207 Tek 4111 Index 80 Cols 132 Cols 80Cols 132Cols 128 Cols 0 24 x 12 24x7 23 x 12 23 7 16x8 1 19x10 19x6 21x11 21x6 14x7 2 18x9 18x5 19x10 19x6 12x6 3 17x8 17x4 17x9 17x5 10x5 4 16x8 16x4 15x8 15x4 8x4 5 15x8 15x4 13x7 13x4 7x3 6 14x7 14x4 12x7 12x4 7x3 7 13 x6 13x3 12x6 12x3 7x3 8 12x5 12x3 11x6 1x3 7x3 9 10x5 10x3 9x5 9x3 7x3 10 8x5 8x3 7x4 7x2 7x8 11 7x5 7x8 6x3 6x2 7x8 The Text Cursor The text cursor is a flashing block or underline character which indicates the position at which the next displayable character received from the host or entered by the keyboard will be displayed The type of text cursor displayed can be selected by the Cursor Style option i
105. up to 127 characters The combined total of all the characters that may be programmed into keys is determined by the 127 character limit per definition and the amount of memory available in your PC 7 46 Setup Menus All keyboard macros can be saved so that TeemTalk will reassert them each time it is loaded or reset by displaying the Save Session As dialog box from the File menu selecting the Keyboard Macros option then clicking the OK button Entering Control Characters You can enter a control character either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the control character for the Return key function CR carriage return can be entered by typing the characters and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as 013 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references Key Combinations amp Sequences You can program a key to perform the function of a combination or sequence of keys For example you can cause the F1 key to perform the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together or pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 Keys are identified by their
106. virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names appendix The virtual key name has to be enclosed by the and characters in the key definition text box You may omit the VK and VT etc parts of the virtual key name To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more other keys together type the character followed by the virtual key names linked together with plus sign characters and ending with the gt character For example to program the F1 key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together enter the following characters in the relevant text box lt ALT F4 gt To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of keys one after the other enter each virtual key name in the order required enclosing each virtual key name with the lt and gt characters Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces For example to program the A key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following characters in the relevant text box lt F2 gt lt F3 gt lt F4 gt 7 47 Setup Menus Entering Command Lines You can enter a command line in a key definition by enclosing it within the and characters This enables you to launch an application by just pressing a key For example to progr
107. will take a lot longer than a text print The Use Printer Resolution option is available when Graphics print is selected This will force a dot for dot print of the screen on the printer and generally produces a small print depending on the printer resolution When this option is not selected unchecked TeemTalk will try and print as large an image as possible on the printer s paper Both methods can print in landscape or portrait format depending on the current setup of the printer The Centre Image on Paper option is available when Graphics print is selected This will ensure that the graphics image is printed centrally on the paper The Scaling option is available when Graphics print is selected This enables the image to be scaled to suit your preference When the Use Printer Resolution option is selected you can scale the image up and when unselected you can scale the image down Scaling up when Use Printer Resolution is not selected may result in loss of some of the image The Graphics Image option is available when Graphics print is selected This enables you to specify how the graphics image is to be printed Clicking the arrow button next to the text box will cause four print options to be displayed 7 16 Setup Menus These options allow you to print the graphics image as displayed Normal by default with black and white reversed with colour converted to monochrome or colour converted to monochrome with black and
108. with virtually any host computer Several transfers may be run simultaneously in the background while you continue to use other Windows applications Protocols Supported Kermit Kermit is a packet oriented file transfer protocol which enables binary files to be transferred between 7 and 8 bit systems Multiple file transfers and data compression is supported XMODEM XMODEM is a block oriented protocol which enables a single file to be transferred at a time in 128 byte blocks It uses two way communications and checks for errors using a cycling redundancy check unless the host does not respond in which case a checksum is used XMODEM 1K XMODEM 1K is similar to XMODEM but uses 1024 byte data blocks speeding up transmission File Transfer YMODEM Batch YMODEM Batch is similar to XMODEM 1K but enables several files to be transferred It checks for errors using a cycling redundancy check only ZMODEM ZMODEM is an advanced development of YMODEM which enables much faster multiple file transfer with enhanced error detection and aborted transfer resumption The zmodemStartup initialization command or zm command line option can be used to make TeemTalk check incoming data for a remote ZMODEM startup sequence then automatically start a file transfer Note XMODEM YMODEM Batch and ZMODEM require a communication setting of 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity These settings will automatically be used for the transfe
109. 0 or 1 returned boolean Oor 1 No or Yes True or False OFF or ON string any characters with the maximum number given range one of a range of integers as shown e g range 0 15 Network Settings GroupID ParamID Value Host Name NETwork NODEname string max 80 chrs Protocol Windows 3 1 NETwork PROTocol NONE SERIAL BAPI BWTCP CTERM DOSLANTI EICONX25 INFOConn INT6B INT14 IPXSPX ISDN LANMAn LANWP LAT MULTILAN 12 73 Creating A Script File GroupID Windows 95 NT NETwork PROTocol Port Number NETwork PORT Connect To Host NETwork CONNect Close Host Connection NETwork CLOSE Telnet Options Value NCSI NETBIOS NETWLAT NETWTCP NEWT NSVT NWSAA OSLAN PATHWay PCNFS PCTCP TEEMTALKOSI TELAPI WINSOCK NONE SERIAL CTERM LAT MULTILAN NETBIOS TCPIP TEEMTALKOSI WINSOCK WINSOCK2 range 0 65535 immediate immediate GroupID ParamID Telnet Port Number NETwork TELNETPORT Telnet Name NETwork TELNETNAME Suppress Echo NETwork ECHOSUPPRESS Force Binary Mode NETwork FORCEBINARY Force EOR Mode NETwork FORCEEOR For Break Send TM NETwork BREAKTM For Break Send CR NETwork BREAKCR Value range 0 65535 string max 80 chrs boolean NO DONT DO NO DONT DO boolean boolean 12 74 Creating A Script File ISDN Settings GroupID ParamID Value Remote Dial Number NETwork ISDNDIAL string Remote Dial Sub Address NETwo
110. 100 68 4 4 292 101 69 3 5 293 F 102 70 6 6 294 G 103 71 7 7 295 H 104 72 8 8 296 I 105 73 9 9 297 J 106 74 10 10 298 K 107 75 11 11 299 L 108 76 12 12 300 M 109 77 13 13 301 N 110 78 14 14 302 0 111 79 15 15 303 112 80 16 16 304 Q 113 81 17 17 305 R 114 82 18 18 306 S 115 83 19 19 307 T 116 84 20 20 308 U 117 85 21 21 309 118 86 22 22 310 W 119 87 23 23 311 X 120 88 24 24 312 Y 121 89 25 25 313 Z 122 90 26 26 314 Key Reference Numbers MOUSE BUTTON REFERENCE NUMBERS Button Pressed 155 157 159 Button Released 156 158 160 Button Button Pressed 167 169 171 Button Released 168 170 172 MEE Ctrl Button Button Pressed 161 163 165 Button Released 162 164 166 Shift Button Button Pressed 173 175 177 Button Released 174 176 178 Ctrl Shift Button Programmed strings for Button Released reference numbers are transmitted by releasing the button only when GIN has been enabled for report transmission on button release Key Reference Numbers Notes C 6 Character Sets Character Sets This appendix shows the tables of charac
111. 12 16 Syntax conventions 12 12 Scroll Arrows 2 16 Scroll Bar 2 16 Disable 11 20 Scroll Box 2 16 Scrolling Speed 7 35 Segments Maximuminmemory 11 24 Memory size 11 24 SelectionCursor 2 22 Session Opening new 7 11 Save 7 12 Saveas 7 12 Settings Files Locating onclient 2 7 7 6 Settings Menu 7 24 Setup Button 2 17 Setup Menus Attributes 7 40 Button Tools 7 56 Closing 2 14 7 2 Defaultsettings 7 4 Dialog settings 7 35 Displaying 7 1 Edit Menu 7 21 Emulationsettings 7 25 File menu 7 8 settings 7 38 Help menu 7 58 KeyboardMacros 3 10 7 44 Menudescriptions 7 8 Mouse Button Actions 7 54 NCSI settings 7 29 New Connection 7 9 Open Session 7 11 Option selection 7 2 Save Session As 7 12 Saving settings 7 5 Serial settings 7 27 Settings menu 7 24 Soft Buttons 7 50 Startup options 7 13 Terminal settings 7 31 Soft Buttons 2 16 Cancel function 2 17 DefView function 2 18 DErase function 2 17 Disable 11 21 Display 11 21 DVisib function 2 17 GErase function 2 17 Patterns function 2 18 Print function 2 19 RstView function 2 18 Settings menu 7 50 Setup function 2 17 ViewDn function 2 18 ViewUp function 2 18 Zoom function 2 17 Startup Options 7 13 Status Bar Description 2 19 Disable 11 21 Index 8 Index T Tek Mode Host command summary 7 Selecting 2 9 Virtual key names B 2 Telnet Initializationcommands 11 12 Telnet Options 7 19 Terminal Emulation Selecting 2 9 7 25 Te
112. 1812 C Bitpad Plus Calcomp C Mouse Serial Port Device C Comi Com3 Com2 Com4 Tablet Characters Map Mouse To Joystick Cancel This dialog box is displayed by selecting Gin in the Settings menu Tablet Type Factory default MM1201 This option specifies the graphics input device that is attached to your system and the data format that TeemTalk uses to communicate with it TeemTalk incorporates several tablet drivers The following list includes the baud rate data bits stop bits and parity settings that are automatically set for the tablet type selected MM1201 MM1812 Bitpad Plus Calcomp Mouse Serial Port Device Factory default Com 2 Summagraphics MM1201 9600 8 1 Odd Summagraphics MM1812 9600 8 1 Odd Summagraphics Bitpad Plus 9600 7 1 Even Calcomp 16 button 9600 7 1 Even Mouse Uses the communication settings specified in the Serial Settings dialog box This option specifies the serial port to which the Gin device is attached 7 38 Setup Menus Gin Tablet Characters Factory default Z123 This option specifies the characters sent by the buttons on the mouse or tablet puck for Gin pick and locate operations The setting must consist of four characters or no characters For a mouse which only has three buttons the first character is ignored and subsequent characters correspond to the left middle and right buttons
113. 19 ICL FTF File Transfer 9 1 Configuration Requirements eese eene 9 1 Sending amp Receiving Files essere 9 2 Transfer Options cio da uide n ee ue 9 4 Remote Host Options eene enne enne enne 9 7 FTP File Transfer 10 1 The Transfer Procedure esses eee 10 1 Menu amp Toolbar Options essent 10 7 The File Menu iere tet i ete t HI Pre Pere eS 10 7 The Session Menu ttr e ERE ECRIRE Peto 10 10 The Configure Menu 2 de eter edet e retia 10 11 The View Menlo RO ER RISE 10 12 FTP Initialization File Entries essen 10 13 Use Asynchronous Calls 3 ttr 10 13 Disable Delete Command eene 10 14 FTP Command Line Options essere 10 14 Progress Bar i ac sees eade eee 10 14 Disabling The Include Subdirectories Option 10 14 Time orit eret RR RA IT et 10 14 Contents 4 Contents Initialization Commands 11 1 INILODUCEION ER 11 1 Initialization File eee eee eee 11 1 Windows D SEE EPI Ree een ida 11 1 TeemTalk Private Profile File eere 11 2 Windows ISK NT iicet im tete e re iR enr 11 3 Command Line Option Format eese 11 5 Command Summary
114. 1x Windows 95 amp NT The name of the file is entered in the Script File Name text box or alternatively you can select a file name in the list box below 7 17 Setup Menus The Parameters text box enables you to specify the values of ArgV type variables within the script file if required Values are separated from each other by a comma You must ensure that the values are entered in the right order so that they are assigned to the correct variables Refer to the Initiating A Script File section in the Creating A Script File chapter for details Note If the values to be entered include sensitive data such as a password you can cause the text to be displayed as asterisks instead of normal text by using the hs command line option or scriptparameter off initialization file command When the name of the script file has been specified and any parameters entered click the OK button to run the script file To cancel a script file select the Cancel Script option which replaces the Run Script option while a file is being run The Edit button becomes active when you select the name of a script file Clicking the Edit button will open a text editor window in which the contents of the selected script file will be displayed This enables you to make changes without leaving TeemTalk Exit This option will cause TeemTalk to shut down If you attempt to exit TeemTalk while a network session is still active the following message box
115. 2 Variable expected Integer expected 4 String expected 5 Boolean expected 6 String variable expected 7 Invalid expression 8 Invalid parameter 9 Label not found 10 Index of range 11 Illegal RETURN statement 12 Illegal button combination 13 Invalid key name 14 Invalid subcommand 15 Invalid GroupID 16 Invalid ParamID 17 Invalid SubParamID 18 Invalid button name 19 Undefined error Illegal command or unrecognisable element Script expected a predefined variable see var Script did not receive an integer or integer variable Script did not receive a string or string variable Script did not receive any of the following 0 or 1 No or Yes False or True OFF or ON Script expected a string type variable see var Script could not evaluate the expression given The command has a missing or incorrect parameter Refer to the command description for the correct format A command specified a label that had not been assigned to a program line or the label was invalid Refer to the description of labels in the Syntax Conventions section An index given to a string command e g Istr was out of range There are no incompleted gosubs to return to A button combination passed to a dialogue command was invalid A key name or code was invalid or missing An invalid subcommand was encountered e g after file or ftu An invalid GroupID was specified for a pget pset ftu set or ftu
116. 3 16 Dynamic Data Exchange ChangeSetting HWND hWndSlaveDDE HWND hWndPartnerDDE int MenuID int DataGroup int iValue LPSTR szChar int iCharCount DWORD 1Setting char buf 16 lSetting MAKELONG DataGroup MenuID Itoa iSetting buf 10 SendPoke hWndSlaveDDE hWndPartnerDDE buf iValue szChar iCharCount This time the call to SendPoke assumes that all used strings are NULL terminated therefore allowing the iValue parameter to reference an integer setting as opposed to the byte count as done previously This is done to allow keyboard macros to be wholly defined whilst at the same time limiting the number of functions required to implement the Slave link Terminating The Slave DDE Link To terminate the link requires a WM DDE TERMINATE message to be sent to TeemTalk TerminateSlaveLink PostMessage hWndPartner WM_DDE_TERMINATE hWnd OL Once received and actioned TeemTalk will return to its normal state It is worth noting that any settings changed whilst in Slave mode will still apply It is therefore important that any parameters changed during the life of the slave link be reset back to the values that were set prior to entry This is best done by ensuring that for every ChangeParameter call a corresponding GetParameter call is made beforehand 13 17 Dynamic Data Exchange Additional DDE Functions TOPI
117. 31 Green foreground 32 Yellow foreground 33 Blue foreground 34 Magenta foreground 35 Cyan foreground 36 White foreground 37 White foreground 39 ESC m White background 40 Red background 41 Red background 42 Yellow background 43 Blue background 44 Magenta background 45 Cyan background 46 White background 47 White background 49 White background 50 Red background 51 Red background 52 Yellow background 53 Blue background 54 Magenta background 55 Cyan background 56 White background 57 White background 59 Deselect underline character mode ESC lt 1lh DAMODE Double width amp height top half characters ESC 3 Double width amp height bottom half characters ESC 4 Double width single height characters ESC 6 Select underline character mode ESC 11 DAMODE Single width amp height normal characters ESC 5 CHARACTER SET SELECTION HOST PRIMARY SETUP Assign GO label to character set ESC Assign Gl label to character set ESC ASCII N American B Italian Y British A Danish Norwegian or E or 6 Dutch 4 Portuguese 6 Finnish 5 or Spanish Z French R Swedish 7or H French Canadian 9or Q Swiss German K Line Drawing 0 Assign GO labelled set to 7 bit codes SI Assign labelled set to 7 bit codes SO CURSOR HOST PRIMARY SETUP Clear tab stops 0 cursor position 2 or 3 all ESC g Deselect auto carriage return ESC 201 Disable cursor ESC 501 Disable cursor autowrap ESC 71 E 3 Host Command Su
118. 4 Dynamic Data Exchange Changing Parameter Settings Example 1 Set the serial communication s port speed to a required baud rate GetBaudRate int Baud int BaudID switch iBaud 110 BaudID break case 300 BaudID break case 600 BaudID break case 1200 BaudID break case 2400 BaudID break case 4800 BaudID break case 9600 BaudID break case 19200 BaudID break default B110 B300 B600 B1200 B2400 B4800 B9600 B19200 return 1 return ChangeSetting hWnd hWndPartner IDM HOST BAUDGROUP BaudID NULL 13 15 Dynamic Data Exchange Example 2 Redefine the Answerback to the given string SetAnswerback LPSTR szAnswer int iAnsLen ChangeSetting hwnd hWndPartner IDM_EMUL ANSSTRING iAnsLen szAnswer iAnsLen 3 Set the keyboard macro assigned to the Shift F6 key sequence to Hello World Note The highlighted characters Slave hWwndSlaveDDE are only applicable to TeemTalk for Windows 3 1 They are not to be included when using Windows 95 or NT SetKbdMacro 141 Hello World 11 SetKbdMacro int iKeyMacro Key to be redefined LPSTR szMacroString Pointer to redefinition string int iMacroLen Max allowed Length of szMacroString ChangeSetting hwnd hwndPartner IDM MACROS NKEYSTRING iKeyIndex szMacroString iMacroLen void 1
119. 4 CLR 12 24 CLS 12 24 CONV 12 24 DDE CANCEL 12 25 DDE EXECUTE 12 25 DDE INITIATE 12 25 DDE POKE 12 26 DDE REQUEST 12 27 DEC 12 27 DECRYPT 12 27 DIALOGUE 12 28 Index 6 Index ERRORCODE FILE DELETE FILE RENAME FTP CONNECT FTP COPYDLG FTP DIRFIRST FTP DIRNEXT FTP DISCONNECT FTU CANCEL FTU INITIATE INP 12 47 12 48 KBD 12 48 12 48 KINTERCEPT 12 49 KPRESS 12 49 KRAW 12 49 12 49 KSTR 12 50 LAUNCH 12 50 LEN 12 50 LET 12 50 LOW 12 51 LSTR 12 51 MSGBOX 12 51 MSTR 12 52 ONERROR 12 53 PACK 12 53 PACKTAB 12 53 PARSE 12 54 PASSWORD 12 54 PGET 12 55 PSET 12 55 PUT 12 56 QUIT 12 56 RAND 12 56 REPLAY 12 57 RETURN 12 58 RST 12 58 RSTR 12 58 SAVESET 12 58 SEED 12 58 SETINI 12 59 SUBTITLE 12 59 SWITCH 12 60 SYSERR 12 60 TCMP 12 61 TITLE 12 61 TOOLBAR ADD 12 61 TOOLBAR DEL 12 63 TOOLBAR FIX 12 63 TOOLBAR FLOAT 12 63 TOOLBAR HIDE 12 63 TOOLBARINS 12 63 UPP 12 64 VAR 12 64 Index 7 Index WAIT 12 65 WHILE 12 65 WRT 12 66 Script File Arithmeticoperators 12 14 Commanddescriptions 12 23 Commandsummary 12 19 Creating 12 1 Error numbers 12 65 12 67 Examples 12 4 Initiating using Commandline option 12 2 Escapesequence 12 3 File menu option 12 2 Initializationfilecommand 12 1 Key or button definition 12 2 PPF file command 12 1 Numericoperators 12 14 5 amp PGET settings 12 73 Random number generator 12 56 12 58 String operators
120. ACE and NULL as well as the characters shown in the example by default The end delimiter does not need to be the same as the first Delimiters are necessary to prevent hotspots occuring within words that happen to contain the same formation of characters as the keywords The following command groups specify the keywords used in each terminal emula tion mode Keyword definitions that can apply to all modes are specified under the heading Definitions Keyword definitions that apply to a specific mode are specified under the heading Definitions lt emulation gt where emulation must be the name of the terminal emulation mode as already specified in the default hotspot Hotspots definitions file Note that a keyword definition under a Definitions lt emulation gt heading will override the definition given to the same keyword in any other defini tions group when that particular emulation is running Each keyword definition line consists of the keyword immediately followed by an equals sign then the function that it will perform The keyword can consist of any characters except those specified as delimiters in the Separatorsz line TeemTalk will search for the keyword on a case insensitive basis The function that will be performed when the keyword is selected is specified in the same way as for key macros soft buttons and script language programming Entering Control Characters You can enter a control character in a keywo
121. ANLEFT F6 F14 VT_F6 VT_F14 Scroll Right VT_PANRIGHT F17 F20 VT_F17 VT F20 Scroll Up VT_PANUP Find VT_FIND Select VT_SELECT Help F15 VT_HELP Setup VT_SETUP Hold Screen VT_HOLD Tab VT_TAB Tek Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Break TK_BREAK Primary Setup TK_SETUP Cancel TK_CANCEL Print TK_PRINT Default View TK_DEFVIEW Restore View TK RSTVIEW Dialog Area TK DCOPY Screen Copy TK SCOPY D Area Visibility TK DVISIB View Down TK VIEWDOWN Erase Dialog Area TK DERASE View Up TK VIEWUP Erase Graphics Area GERASE Zoom TK ZOOM Fill Patterns TK PATTERNS Except TeemTalk 05W and TeemTalk 05W32 B 2 Key Reference Numbers Key Reference Numbers This appendix lists the reference numbers assigned to keys on the British keyboard and mouse buttons which are used by Tek key programming commands The following tables of reference numbers correspond to the keys listed in the left column The key legends shown are those found on the British versions of the keyboard layouts for the different systems compatible with TeemTalk Note that not all of the function keys are on all of the keyboards The reference numbers for control keys on other national keyboards will be the same as shown for the British keyboard Alphabetic numeric and symbolic key reference numbers for other national key boards are the same as those for the keys in the equivalent positions on t
122. AX 2 pset buttons command SB4L1 lt logon4 gt exit Now we have configured four soft buttons for connection to four different services TEK W3220 VAX 1 VAX 2 using four different LOGON files We have also added the TITLE CONNECT to the Level 1 soft buttons which will be shown in the box under Level 1 You can specify a different terminal emulation for each connection by adding another line to each LOGON script file as follows 12 5 Creating A Script File pset emul mode tek LOGON 2 pset emul mode w3220 LOGONG pset emul mode vt2207 LOGON4 pset emul mode vt2208 Programming Keyboard Macros What we have now achieved using soft buttons could also be done using keyboard macros What you will achieve is less apparent however because you have no visible indication like the name displayed on each soft button However we would attach a LOGON as above to Alt F1 for example with pset macro VK F1 lt logon1 gt You may also want to change the functions normally assigned to specific keys where these are expected to return specific values for your application For example the following lines are from a script that will redefine an Enhanced AT 102 key keyboard for WordPerfect pset macro VK F1 pset macro s VK F1 pset macro c VK F1 pset macro a VK F1 pset macro c VK PRIOR pset macro HOME pset macro ESCAPE pset macro c VK END pset macro c VK NEXT pset macro c V
123. C ITEM DATA DDE RESULT MESSAGE System Sysltems NONE REQUEST _ Provides a list of items in TEXT format that can be used with the SYSTEM DDE Topic i e Sysltems Topics etc System Topics NONE REQUEST _ Provides a list of items in TEXT format of the DDE topics supported by teemtalk i e System Session etc System Formats NONE REQUEST Provides a list of items in CF TEXT format of the Clip board formats supported by teemtalk i e TEXT BITMAP etc System Status NONE REQUEST Returns with a string relating to the current condition of teemtalk i e Online Local System SendMouse X Y coordinates amp POKE Sends coordinates of a mouse button pressed click to a remote application i e host SendMouseStr X Y coordinates amp POKE Sends coordinates of a mouse button pressed click to a remote application i e host as a character string Session Send String of data to be POKE Sends the given string of sent to host remote characters to the host application Session Receive String of data REQUEST Receive a character string from received from the ADVISE the host Delimited by CR LF host by default Session Escape String of commands EXECUTE Data gets interpreted by for teemtalk to teemtalk directly and is acted execute upon accordingly Session CurPos NONE REQUEST Returns coordinates of current cursor position to calling application Session
124. Chrs PRINTer TRANSlate boolean Seconds Close Delay PRINTer CLOSEDELAY range 0 65535 12 75 Creating A Script File GroupID ParamID Value Print Screen Method PRINTer SCReen TEXT GRaph Use Printer Resolution PRINTer X USERESolution boolean Auto Wrap PRINTer boolean Centre Image On Paper PRINTer CENTRE boolean Graphics Scaling PRINTer SCALE range I 100 Graphics Image PRINTer GRMODE NORMal SWAP MONO MONOSwap Auto Print Mode PRINTer AUTO boolean Cancel Print PRINTer CANCEL not applicable Eject Page PRINTer EJECTpage not applicable Serial Settings GroupID ParamID Value Use Serial Port HOST USE immediate Host Port HOST PORT COMI COM4 16 bit COMI COMS 32 bit None Baud Rate HOST BAUDrate 16 bit 50 75 110 134 150 200 300 1200 1800 2400 4800 9600 9600 19200 38400 32 bit 110 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Parity HOST PARity None Odd Even Mark Space Flow Control HOST FLOWcontrol None INPut OUTput INOUT HARDware DTR Data Bits HOST DATAbits 6 7 8 Stop Bits HOST STOPbits 1 1 5 2 Transmit Rate HOST TXLimit range 0 On Line HOST ONLine boolean Local Echo HOST HALFduplex boolean Detect Carrier HOST DCDDetect boolean Test for DCD HOST DCDTest boolean Test for CTS HOST CTSTest boolean 12 76 Creating A Script File NCSI Settings GroupID ParamID Value Baud Rate NCSi BAUDrate 50
125. Cursor Style Factory default Underline This option enables you to specify how the text cursor is displayed either as an underline character or a block Columns Factory default 80 This option enables you to specify a width of 80 or 132 columns for the dialog area Resize Font Factory default Selected This option determines the effect on displayed text when the window is resized When selected resizing the window will cause TeemTalk to search a list of known fonts and select the one that allows the same number of rows specified by the next option and columns to fill the new window size The window will be adjusted to display all the rows When unselected resizing the window will have no effect on the font size and the number of displayed rows will be increased or decreased according to the new window size Note that the number of columns will remain set to 80 or 132 even though the window may be wider leaving a margin on the right Rows Factory default 32 This option determines the total number of text rows that may be displayed in the window which can be set to a maximum of 64 TeemTalk will search a list of known fonts and select the one that allows all the specified rows to be displayed in the 7 36 Setup Menus window The window size will be adjusted accordingly Note that the number of text rows actually used for displaying dialog area text is determined by the setting of the Dialog Area Lines option Di
126. DE link specifying a particular topic of Slave coded as follows atomApplication GlobalAddAtom TTO7W atomTopic GlobalAddAtom Slave SendMessage T WM_DDE_INITIATE hwndClientDDE MAKELONG atomApplication atomTopic GlobalDeleteAtom atomApplication GlobalDeleteAtom atomTopic In this example connection would be attempted between the client and the TeemTalk 07W program assuming that this was named TTO7W EXE 13 6 Dynamic Data Exchange Data Transmission Over A Slave DDE Link Once initiated TeemTalk enters Slave mode diverting all input from the keyboard for example to the Client application and permitting data to be sent to it from the Client Data coming from TeemTalk will be sent in the form of a DDE POKE message A suitable way of accepting this is outlined below DDEWndProc HWND hWnd unsigned message WORD wParam LONG lParam switch message case WM DDE POKE ClientReceivedPoke hWnd HWND wParam lParam break ClientReceivedPoke HWND hWnd HWND hWndPartnerDDE LONG 1Param HANDLE hPokeData DDEPOKE FAR lpPokeData ATOM atomItem char szItemName ITEM MAX SIZE hPokeData LOWORD 1Param atomItem HIWORD lParam GlobalGetAtomName atomItem szItemName ITEM MAX SIZE if lpPokeData DDEPOKE FAR GlobalLock hPokeData lpPokeData gt cfFormat CF_TEXT Pa
127. EARN Define programmed string volatile ESCKD DEFINE Define programmed string non vol ESCKO NVDEFINE Display programmed string MACROSTATUS Enable programmed key strings ESCKW KEYEXPAND Select key string local host character ESC K Y KEYEXCHAR Transmit programmed string ESCKX EXPAND REPORTS HOST PRIMARY SETUP Assign report intro termination chars ESCIS RSIGCHARS Enable TeemTalk status byte ESCIT TBSTATUS Select bypass mode cancellation character ESCNU BYPASSCANCEL Send 4010 status report ESCENQ Send colour hardcopy status report ESCQQ HCREPORT Send device status report ESCJQ Send error report ESCKQ Send GIN position report ESC IP Send port status report ESC PQ Send segment status report ESC S Q Send emulation mode report ESC 0 Send emulation settings report ESCIQ SETTINGS Set report maximum line length ESCIL RLINELENGTH Specify version number TERMINAL Specify XY coords amp integer report format ESCUX COORDINATEMODE E 11 Host Command Summary SEGMENTS HOST PRIMARY SETUP Add primitives to segment ESCUI SGINSERT Assign pick ID nos to graphics primitives ESCMI SGPICKID Assign segment to class ESCSA SGCLASS Call segment as subroutine ESCSF SGCALL Copy segment into current segment def ESCLK SGINCLUDE Delete pick groups from segment ESCUE SGREPLACE Delete segment ESCSK SGDELETE Delete segment part ESCUD SGREMOVE Enable segment visibility
128. ENT settings usually set by ESCape sequences In this case it is imitating what you would do in the New Connection dialog box in order to connect to a remote host hemp command allows you to wait until specific character s are received EXACTLY from the host The number before the string specifies how many seconds to wait for the characters The 0 as used here is an unlimited wait In practice it would be better to use a non zero value and check the system flag to see if the string was received The put command sends the specified characters to the host The exit command terminates the script file but does not QUIT TeemTalk Within this outline script it is necessary to provide the relevant entries for the system to which connection is required The second line defines the particular network interface protocol and nodename being used and initiates the connection The put lines define the userid and password to be used as dave and pericom respectively The hemp lines define the particular prompts provided by the host system at which points the userid and password can be sent to the host It is vitally important to ensure that the string to be waited for in each hemp command is EXACTLY what will be received from the host otherwise the log on will fail It is 12 4 Creating A Script File also sometimes necessary to ensure that the LAST character received from the host is the LAST character of the string to ensure
129. ERPROFILE Selecting A Connection Template The Open Session option in the File menu displays a dialog box that enables you to select a connection template for TeemTalk to use Description Save As Default E Cancel Delete The Description list box displays the one line descriptions of connection templates that were created using the Save Session As dialog box The description of the Getting Started connection template currently in use is highlighted The factory default connection template is Untitled Clicking one of the descriptions then the OK button will cause TeemTalk to use the connection template associated with the chosen description You make TeemTalk automatically use a particular connection template when it is loaded or reset by clicking the required description checking the Save As Default check box then clicking the OK button To delete a connection template select the description then click the Delete button You can also use the following command line option to override the default connection template used when TeemTalk is loaded se description where description must exactly match the description assigned to a connection template already saved using the Save Session As dialog box The description must be enclosed by double quotes Getting Started Selecting The Terminal Emulation When you load TeemTalk for the first time the DEC VT100 emulation will be running
130. ESC X Erase line portion 0 from 1 to 2 all ESC K Erase screen portion 0 from 1 to 2 all ESC J Insert blank lines ESC L Insert space characters ESC Select insert mode ESC 4h Select replace mode ESC 41 GENERAL OPERATION HOST PRIMARY SETUP Cancel current ESC sequence amp display error CAN Local echo mode on ESC 121 ECHO YES Local echo mode off ESC 12h ECHO NO Reset features in ESC h commands ESC 1 Host Command Summary Reset terminal emulation ESCc Restore saved features ESC 8 Save features char set attrib s cursor origin ESC7 Select terminal emulation mode ESC CODE Host 0 Tek 1 ANSI 2 Edit 3 VT52 5 VTIOON 6 VT220N 7 VT220M7 8 VT220M8 Select VT52 mode ESC 21 CODE VT52 Select VT100 mode from VT320 mode ESC 61 p Select VT300 7 bit mode ESC 62 1 p Select VT300 8 bit mode ESC 62 p Select VT300 8 bit mode can be 0 or 2 ESC 62 p Set features in ESC h commands ESC h Soft reset ESC p Sound audible tone BEL KEYBOARD HOST PRIMARY SETUP Disable key autorepeat ESC 81 Disable keyboard ESC Disable keyboard input ESC 2h Enable key autorepeat ESC 8h Enable keyboard ESCb Enable keyboard input ESC 21 Select cursor key application mode ESC 1h Select cursor key normal mode ESC 11 Select keypad application mode ESC Select keypad numeric mode ESC gt PRINTING HOST PRIMARY SETUP Auto
131. ESCRJ LOCKVIEWINGKEYS Read command file from disk ESCAR Reset TeemTalk ESCKV RESET Run a program ESCAS Save parameters ESCJ V SAVE Save parameters in non volatile file ESCKU NVSAVE Select 4107 or 4111 emulation TEKMODE Select auto carriage return ESCKF LFCR Select auto line feed ESCKR CRLF Select code for SYN SYNISESC Select continuous intermittent bell tone BELLTYPE Select control code action or display ESCKS SNOOPY Select error message display level ESCKT ERRORLEVEL Select factory default parameters FACTORY Select local or online mode LOCAL Select response to full page ESCKP PAGEFULL Select terminal emulation mode ESC 96 CODE Host 0 Tek 1 ANSI 2 Edit 3 52 5 00 6 VT220N 7 220 7 8 VT220M8 Select text editing characters ESC KZ EDITCHARS Send print data to file ESC AU Set tab stop positions ESC KB TABS Sound audible tone BEL Specify command source ESCJL LOAD Specify spooling path ESCJS SPOOL Tab to next tab stop HT Vertical tab i e line feed VT Write command file to disk ESC A W GIN HOST PRIMARY SETUP Define GIN window ESC IW GINWINDOW Define tablet GIN area ESCIV GINAREA Disable GIN mode GINDISABLE Enable 4010 GIN mode ESC SUB Enable disable 4953 tablet GIN mode ESC Enable GIN ESCIE GINENABLE Enable GIN gridding amp specify grid spacing ESCIG GINGRIDDING Enable GIN in
132. ESCSV SGVISIBILITY End definition of segment ESCSC SGCLOSE End segment amp start higher segment def ESCSN SGUP End segment amp start lower segment def ESCSB SGDOWN End segment amp start new segment ESCSE SGNEW Renumber segment ESCSR SGRENAME Select segment detectability for GIN pick ESCSD SGDETECT Select segment magnification or rotation ESCSJ SGSCALE Select segment drawing mode ESCSM SGMODE Select segment edit mode ESCUH SGEDIT Select segment flashing ESCSH SGHIGHLIGHT Set segment display amp GIN pick priority ESCSS SGPRIORITY Specify operation classes ESCSL SGMATCHINGCLASS Specify pivot point ESCSP SGPIVOT Specify segment mag rotation amp position ESCSI SGTRANSFORM Specify segment position ESCSX SGPOSITION Start definition of segment ESCSO SGOPEN VIEWS VIEWPORTS amp WINDOWS PRIMARY SETUP Delete specified view ESCRK VDELETE Erase view amp redraw visible segments ESCKN RENEW Select current view ESCRC VSELECT Select overview full part window size ESCUW OWINDOW Select screen update level ESC RF FIXUP Select viewport border visibility ESC RE BORDER Specify current view window boundary ESC R W WINDOW Specify viewport position ESCRV VIEWPORT Specify views in view group ESCRQ VCLUSTER E 12 Host Command Summary W3220 Mode GENERAL OPERATION HOST PRIMARY SETUP Disable local echo ESCN Enable local echo ESCM Select
133. Exiting M TeemTalk will close the connection Cancel 11 11 Initialization Telnet Commands Suppress Telnet Echo Option Private Profile File TelnetEchoSuppress Yes Command Line Not applicable Default Setting No This command will suppress TeemTalk generation of the Telnet echo option on connection It must be placed under the Sessions heading in the TeemTalk private profile file Telnet Binary Options Private Profile File TelnetBinary Yes or No Command Line Not applicable Default Setting Not applicable This command will force generation of Telnet do Yes or dont No Binary options to be sent to the host It must be placed under the Sessions heading in the TeemTalk private profile file Telnet EOR Options Private Profile File TelnetEOR Yes or No Command Line Not applicable Default Setting Not applicable This command will force generation of Telnet do Yes or dont No EOR options to be sent to the host It must be placed under the Sessions heading in the TeemTalk private profile file Telnet Break Settings Private Profile File TelnetSendBreakTM Yes or No TelnetSendBreakCR Yes or No Command Line Not applicable Default Setting TM only These commands enable you to specify whether or not a timing mark TM and or carriage return CR is sent with a Telnet break They must be placed under the Sessions heading in the TeemTalk private profile file 11 12
134. Getting Started ViewUp ViewDn RstView DefView Patterns If the left mouse button is clicked when the zoom cursor is displayed but no zoom rectangles an overview of the entire 4096x4096 display memory will be displayed The zoom function can be exited without changing the window contents by clicking the right mouse button After an increase or decrease in zoom the view of the image prior to the last redraw can be restored by clicking the RstView button Up to four views can be stored clicking RstView repeatedly will recall these views in sequence Not supported by TeemTalk 05W This will save the state of the current view then make the next higher numbered view the current view Not supported by TeemTalk 05W This will save the state of the current view then make the next lower numbered view the current view Not supported by TeemTalk 05W This will display the last four views when clicked repeatedly Not supported by TeemTalk 05W This will display the default view This will display all the predefined fill patterns that can be selected by the Tek Primary Setup FILLPATTERN command to fill polygons Predefined Fill Patterns Solids uw i m Tetwed 8 LL LI LL T TL EEN oo L mmm pp E LLL LIT mE E EENME T C CME Pe There are three types of fill pattern solid textured and dithered A fill
135. Height Left TabIndex Top Width End Il Start 0 False 0 False MS Sans Serif 7 8 0 False 0 False 255 1 120 0 5280 735 Session 1 1 True 0 False System 9 6 0 False 0 False 2295 120 2 0 6255 Session 2 1 True 0 False System 9 6 0 False 0 False 2295 120 26 2880 6255 Begin Label Bezeichnungl Caption Height Left TabIndex Top DDE Info 255 120 19 6000 13 29 Dynamic Data Exchange Width 975 Sub 1 text2 ick index As Integer LinkMode 0 If index 0 Then text2 LinkTopic TTO7W ttlkl Else End If text2 text2 text2 text2 text2 text2 text2 End Sub Sub Exit C Sub format text2 text2 text2 text2 text2 End Sub Sub ftp text2 text2 text2 text2 text2 End Sub text2 LinkTopic TTO7W ttlk2 LinkItem Send LinkMode 2 text2 Chr 13 Chr 10 Chr 0 LinkPoke Chr 13 LinkPoke lick index As Integer Click index As Integer LinkMode 0 LinkTopic TT07W System LinkItem Formats LinkMode 2 LinkRequest ick index As Integer LinkMode 0 LinkTopic TTfler System LinkItem SysItems LinkMode 2 LinkRequest Sub receive Click index As Integer If receive 0 Caption Receive Then
136. However you can specify a different default 11 21 Initialization Commands font size by using one of these commands where index is the index of the font as defined in the following tables The size of the font for a particular index will vary depending on the terminal emula tion Specifying an index outside the range for the emulation will cause the highest valid index number for that emulation to be used The font sizes are defined in pixels Font DEC VT Modes Tek 4205 amp 4207 Tek 4111 Index 80 Cols 132 Cols 80Cols 132Cols 128 Cols 0 24 x 12 24x7 23 x 12 23 7 16 8 1 19x10 19x6 21x11 21x6 14x7 2 18x9 18x5 19x10 19x6 12x6 3 17x8 17x4 17x9 17x5 10x5 4 16x8 16x4 15x8 15x4 8x4 5 15x8 15x4 13x7 13x4 7x3 6 14x7 14x4 12x7 12x4 7x3 7 13 6 13x3 12x6 12x3 7x3 8 12x5 12x3 11x6 11x3 7x3 9 10x5 10x3 9x5 9x3 7x3 10 8x5 8x3 7x4 7x2 7x8 11 7x5 7x8 6x3 6x2 7x8 Bold Font In Full Screen Workspace Initialization File UseBoldFont on CommandLine bf Default Setting off These commands will make the font bolder when the window size is set to full screen using the f or windowSize fullScreen command Flashing Characters Enabled In All Sessions Initialization File FlashInBackground on Command Line fb Default Setting off These commands enable characters with the flashing attribute to be displayed as such in all session windows in addition to the currently
137. I SENDCRTRANS string CR Translation R PARAMETER ASCII RECVCRTRANS string LF Translation S PARAMETER ASCII SENDLFTRANS string LF Translation PARAMETER ASCII RECVLFTRANS string Line Pacing C S PARAMETER ASCII SENDPACECHAR string Line Pacing PARAMETER ASCII RECVPACECHAR string L Pacing Time S PARAMETER ASCII SENDPACETIME integer Expand Blank L PARAMETER ASCII EXPANDBLANKS immediate ZMODEM Parameter Settings GroupID ParamID SubParamID Value Data Conversion S PARAMETER ZMODEM SFILECONV NONE BINARY ASCII RESUME Data Conversion PARAMETER ZMODEM as above 12 87 Creating A Script File GroupID ParamID SubParamID Value Transfer Action S PARAMETER ZMODEM SFILEACTION NONE NEWLONG CRCDIFF APPEND REPLACE NEWER LENGTH ABSENT Transfer Action PARAMETER ZMODEM RFILEACTION as above Receive Existing S PARAMETER ZMODEM SFILEEXIST boolean Receive Existing PARAMETER ZMODEM RFILEEXIST boolean Change to PARAMETER ZMODEM SDOTTOSLASH boolean Send Full Pathname PARAMETER ZMODEM SFULLNAME boolean Remote Cmd 5 PARAMETER ZMODEM SSTARTCMD string Remote Cmd R PARAMETER ZMODEM RSTARTCMD _ string Window Size PARAMETER ZMODEM SWINDOW integer Escape Control Codes PARAMETER ZMODEM ESCCONTROLS boolean Kermit Remote Operations GroupID ParamID Value How To Transfer HOW SEND immediate RECEIVE immediate REMOTE immediat
138. ICI R2C3 DDE REQUEST Syntax DDE REQUEST lt item gt variable lt channel gt Requests that information relating to an item is assigned to a variable name where item is a string containing the name of the item from which information is requested variable is the name of a string variable see var in which the information is to be stored channel is the name of the integer variable identifying the particular channel for the DDE link if specified by the dde initiate command otherwise this is omitted The following example will request that data contained in cells located at row 1 column 1 through row 2 column 3 inclusive is to be placed in the variable datal with no channel specified assuming the DDE partner is an Excel spreadsheet dde request 1 2 3 data1 DEC Syntax DEC variable variable Decreases the integer or floating point number assigned to the specified variable s by one DECRYPT Syntax DECRYPT result lt string gt key Decrypts a string previously encrypted by the encrypt command where result is a previously defined string variable see var which will store the decrypted string lt string gt is a string or string variable containing the hexadecimal characters to decrypt lt key gt is one or more characters that were used to define the original encryption The Error Numbers section lists the possible error numbers for this command
139. Identity 010 013 specifies the string User Identity followed by a line feed then carriage return ASCII Control Character Abbreviations As some ASCII control characters are used frequently within a script file for example LF line feed and CR carriage return special abbreviations may be used instead of their decimal values The list of valid abbreviations for control characters is as follows b Backspace 0x08 hex the equivalent of 008 f Form feed 0 0 hex the equivalent of 012 n New line line feed Ox0A hex the equivalent of 010 r Carriage return 0xOD hex the equivalent of 013 t Tab horizontal 0x09 hex the equivalent of 009 So User Identity 010 013 may be entered as User Identity n Boolean Values When command requires a boolean value this can be any of the following where the value may be abbreviated to the UPPERCASE characters 0 or 1 No or Yes False or True OFF or ON 12 13 Creating A Script File Script Operators The script language supports various arithmetic operators to facilitate calculations and manipulations on numeric variables and discrete numeric values Some of the operators are also extended to provide some useful manipulations on strings and string variables Operators such as and are straight forward Those that are not so intuitive will be described with the aid of script examples The valid operators are as follows lt lt gt
140. K BACK pset macro VK END pset macro c VK HOME pset macro c VK OEM MINUS pset macro s VK TAB pset macro c VK RETURN pset macro c VK ADD pset macro c LEFT pset macro c VK RIGHT pset macro c SEPARATOR pset macro a VK a Note evt f72 lt vt__pfl gt lt vt__f7 gt lt vt__pf2 gt lt vt__f7 gt lt vt__pf3 gt lt vt__f7 gt lt vt__pf2 gt lt vt__f18 gt 2 lt vt__pf4 gt lt f6o gt lt vt__pf2 gt lt vt__remove gt lt vt__pf2 gt lt vt__remove gt lt vt__pfl gt lt vt__remove gt lt vt__pf4 gt lt vt__pf4 gt lt vt__find gt evt f20 gt lt vt__pfl gt lt vk__tab gt lt vt__pfl gt _013 lt vk__subtract gt lt vt__pfl gt _027 D lt vt__pfl gt _027 C lt vt__pfl gt _013 lt vt__pf3 gt A The underscore character in each virtual key name within a string has to be entered twice because a single underscore character is used to introduce an ASCII decimal value or equivalent 12 6 Creating A Script File Similar definitions can also be applied to soft buttons to allow frequently used sequences to be accessible with one mouse click Key combinations are also possible to define by including the complete combination within angle brackets and gt For example to program the key so that it performs the same function as ALT F4 pset macro VK lt F42 Launching An Application amp Changing The Window Focus Ther
141. LF by default but this can be overridden by including the following WIN INI command in the TeemTalk command group SessRecvTerm character s where character s can be CRLF default CR or LF The link is terminated upon receipt of an appropriate WM_DDE_UNADVISE message by TeemTalk Escape The Escape function sends the given string which is interpreted by TeemTalk and nothing is dispatched to the host This provides the ability for an application to directly dispatch for example Tektronix 4207 specific escape sequences to TeemTalk 07W and have it act upon them appropriately Note that this is specified to accept strings of data which means that NULL characters cannot be dispatched as they are interpreted to terminate the string The entire Execute string must be in the form Escape String to send An appropriate way for an application to do this is to make use of the Windows SDK Istrepy function For example to force TeemTalk to display red characters on a white background the following would be specified lstrcpy lpszEscString Escape e 31 47m The IpszEscString would then be attached to the standard DDEEXECUTE data structure and be transmitted by posting it along with a WM DDE EXECUTE message CurPos amp CurPosStr Curpos uses DDE DATA command to pass back data for the requested cursor position The data is held in the structure DDE CURS INF as documented below and sent across to the calling program in CF
142. N INI file TeemTalk 05W tt05w TeemTalk 07W tt07w TeemTalk 11W tt11w 11 1 Initialization The following command group example will cause TeemTalk 07W to attempt to connect to a network host called sparc1 using the LAN Manager protocol and display two levels i e 4 rows of soft buttons tt07w host sparcl protocol lanman buttonlevels 2 You can specify more than one set of commands in the WIN INI file so that each instance of TeemTalk displayed on the screen can be configured differently The heading of the command group to action is specified on the command line using the n command line option so if for example the group of commands above was headed window1 the command for actioning this set of commands instead of the default tt07w set would be nwindowl Teem Talk Private Profile File A private profile file is used to store settings specific to TeemTalk which are inappro priate for placing in any of the standard Windows INI files A default private profile file is automatically created when TeemTalk is installed TeemTalk 05W TT05W INI TeemTalk 07W TTO7W INI TeemTalk 11W TT11W INI You can create additional files to meet various requirements any one of which can be used by TeemTalk instead of the default file by using the command line option pffilename The private profile file can be placed in any of the standard Windows File search directories to enable TeemTalk to locat
143. Rectangle function will only select text contained within the rectangular area defined by the start position top left corner and the finish position bottom right corner The Select and Copy function is the same as Select but will also copy the selected data to the Clipboard automatically The Select Word function will cause the word under the mouse cursor to be selected The Show Hotspots and Action Hotspots functions are described in the Hotspots chapter The Send Keyword function is very similar to the hotspot feature It enables you to send delimited text displayed on the screen to the host just by clicking on it 7 54 Setup Menus Delimiters are the same as for hotspots The Move Cursor function can be used in any of the local block modes as a quick way of positioning the text cursor within a block of text Move the mouse cursor to the position where the text cursor is required then click the mouse button and key combination assigned with the Move Cursor function to cause the text cursor to jump to that location The Cursor Select function performs the same way as Move Cursor The Middle Button setting enables you to make the left or right button and key combination of a two button mouse emulate the middle button of a three button mouse You can also enter a definition of your own in the text box associated with each button and key combination Definitions are entered in the same way as for keyboard macros and soft button
144. Syntax CLIPBD EMPTY This command will open the clipboard clear all the data contained in the clipboard then close it Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command CLIPBD READ Syntax CLIPBD READ variable This command will open the clipboard read all the data contained in the clipboard and place it in the specified string variable then close the clipboard Note that the data placed in the variable could potentially contain carriage returns line feeds and tabs CLIPBD WRITE Syntax CLIPBD WRITE lt string gt This command will open the clipboard write the data contained in the string or variable to the clipboard then close it The string or variable can contain carriage returns line feeds and tabs CLR Syntax CLR Clears the communications buffer CLS Syntax CLS Moves the cursor to home and clears the screen CONV Syntax CONV lt destvar gt lt sourcevar gt This copies data from lt sourcevar gt and converts its variable type string integer or floating point number to that of lt destvar gt which will store the result as follows destvar lt sourcevar gt Result string integer lt destvar gt will contain the ASCII character that has the decimal value given by lt sourcevar gt 12 24 Creating A Script File destvar sourcevar Result integer string lt destvar gt will contain
145. TT11W INI You can create additional files to meet various requirements any one of which can be used by TeemTalk instead of the default file by using the command line option pffilename The private profile file can be placed in any of the standard Windows File search directories to enable TeemTalk to locate it For example assuming a default installa tion of TeemTalk 07W32 the private profile file TT07W INI could be placed in any of the following directories 1 C PROGRAM FILES TEEMTALK default 2 CNWIN95 Windows 95 C WINNT35 Windows NT 3 C WIN9S SYSTEM Windows 95 C WINNT35 SYSTEM32 Windows NT 4 Any other directory referenced via the environment path variable 11 3 Initialization You view the contents of the private profile used by the current instance of TeemTalk by displaying the Startup Options dialog box from the File menu and clicking the Edit button The private profile file will already contain entries similar to the following where commands are grouped under headings enclosed by square brackets Untitled ses Wsp tt07w wsp Nv tt07w nv Sessions Default Untitled ses Startup Dialog 1 SaveAsDefault 1 Editor notepad exe Unless specified otherwise all the initialization commands described in this chapter must be entered under a new heading called startup default for a set of commands to be used by default or startup name for a set of
146. Talk 07W initializa tion commands in the WIN INI file or startup default for TeemTalk 07W32 initialization commands in the TT07W INI file entry is a string or string variable which specifies the initialization command for example protocol variable is the name of a previously defined string or integer variable which will be used to store the setting lt ini file gt is a string or string variable which specifies the name of the initializa tion file This may be omitted if it is the default file WIN INI Windows 3 1 or TTO7W INI Windows 95 NT 12 44 Creating A Script File The following example will get the current protocol setting from the Windows 3 1 WIN INI file and place it in the string variable netprot getini tt07w protocol netprot The following example will get the current protocol setting from the Windows 95 or NT TT07W INI file and place it in the string variable netprot getini startup default protocol netprot tt07w ini The Error Numbers appendix lists the possible error numbers for this command GOSUB Syntax GOSUB label The program goes to the subroutine beginning at the line with the specified label If it does not exist the program continues with the next line The program returns to the line following the gosub when a return command is encountered GOTO Syntax GOTO label The program unconditionally goes to the line with the specified label If the label does n
147. Unselected When selected this will cause the file to be printed by the remote host after it has been received Special Options This enables you to specify any special options to be actioned by the remote system If you are transmitting to VME you can specify special options in the following format keyword value keyword value The relevant keywords are ALL influences the placement of new fully catalogued files PRE Transfer records map on to physical blocks R Transfer records map on to records FDE File description to be used For new fully catalogued files the description used will be STD STDM modified by one or more of the following values provided that at least one of them is supplied BLOCKSIZE CLA CLASS RMI RMIN RMA RMAX RTY RTYPE ORG ORG LOC For spool requests defines the location at which the output is required PRF Forspool VME B only and job requests defines the profile under which they should run Action Message The message entered in this text box may be displayed to the remote operator when the transfer begins depending on the remote system not for VME ICL FTF File Transfer Notes 9 10 File Transfer 10 FTP File Transfer This chapter describes the FTP file transfer utility for TCP IP connections The Transfer Procedure The basic procedure for transferring files is described below Following sections describe the various
148. VE NO TFORMATING 0001 4 The following line must be inserted under the Protocol VCSTS section of NET CFG LOCAL LSAP 0 ICL FTF File Transfer Sending amp Receiving Files The following procedure is used to transfer files between your PC and the remote host Run the File Transfer Responder on the remote host computer 2 Display the TeemTalk File menu on your PC and select File Trans fer to display the Initiate File Transfer dialog box Select ICL FTF in the Transfer Protocol list box The following dialog box will be displayed x Transfer Details Direction 6 ToHost Host nigelpc From Host Local Filename E WORK32N340ic makefile Browse Remote Filename makefile Start Transfer Start Responder Authorisation Data Type Cancel User Name nigel Text At Remote Host C Binary AtRemoteHos During Transfer User Password Note If you close this dialog box you can display it again by clicking the Start button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box when Transfer Protocol is set to ICL FTF Select the name of the remote host in the Host Name list box If you need to provide Authorisation for the remote host enter the required User Name and User Password Note that the password will be echoed as a series of asterisks In the Local Filename text box specify the name and directory path of the file on your PC
149. X message buttons result This command enables you to display a simple message box with buttons where message 15 the message as specified by a string delimited by double quotes or the name of a previously defined string variable see var buttons 15 an integer or integer variable containing a value which specifies the buttons to be displayed see following table result is a previously defined integer variable which is used to store the value of the button that is pressed by the user The value of the buttons integer is found by adding together the value of each button required from the following table Ok 1 Retry 16 Cancel 2 Abort 32 Yes 4 Ignore 64 No 8 12 51 Creating A Script File For example to specify that the Cancel and Retry buttons are to be displayed the buttons integer would be 18 Only the following combinations of buttons are allowed Ok Ok amp Cancel Yes amp No Yes No amp Cancel Retry amp Cancel Abort Retry amp Ignore The following example will display a message box containing the message Do you wish to continue and the buttons Yes and No and cause the value of the button pressed by the user to be stored in the integer variable result msgbox Do you wish to continue 12 result Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command MSTR Syntax MSTR variable lt string gt
150. a is terminated by CR LF lstrcpy LPSTR pTemp iValCount LPSTR r n GlobalUnlock hPokeData atomItem GlobalAddAtom LPSTR szItem if PostMessage hWndPartnerDDE WM_DDE_POKE hWnd MAKELONG hPokeData atomItem GlobalDeleteAtom atomItem GlobalFree hPokeData return 13 9 Dynamic Data Exchange Reading amp Setting Terminal Parameters The TeemTalk for Windows 3 1 slave mode or TeemTalk for Windows 95 or NT session DDE topic supports the ability to set and read the user definable setup settings The majority of settings require an integer value but some require strings which are handled slightly differently The following sample code gives an outline of how to implement this values to identify the changeable setup parameters are defines Settings that refer to strings will return a GLOBAL ATOM value which when converted using the Windows SDK function GlobalGetAtomName will result in the appropriate string It is essential that once converted to a string the Atom is deleted via a call to DeleteAtom in order to free up the resources allocated by Windows that are associated with the atom Reading Parameter Settings The following three examples assume that hWnd the handle to the current window s DDE message processing routine and hWndPartner the handle to the DDE partner are set up accordingly Example 1 Get the serial communication s port
151. able RETURN Return to line following gosub SEED Reset the random number generator seed SWITCH Compare value with cases amp perform command if matched WHILE Perform the following while specified condition is true CLIPBOARD CLIPBD APPEND Append specified string to the clipboard CLIPBD EMPTY Clear all data from the clipboard CLIPBD READ Place clipboard contents in variable CLIPBD WRITE Write data to clipboard COMMUNICATIONS BREAK CAPTURE CLR REPLAY WAIT Break for specified time Log all data received from host to specified file Clear communications buffer Replay host data log file created by capture Host waits for specified time period DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE DDE CANCEL Cancel a DDE conversation DDE EXECUTE Partner to perform specified instructions DDE INITIATE Start a DDE conversation DDE POKE Send data to specified item DDE REQUEST Request information on specified item DISPLAY CLB Clear display buffer CLS Clear display and home cursor 12 19 Creating A Script File DIALOGUE DSP INP MSGBOX PASSWORD RDPXY RDT RDTXY SUBTITLE SYSERR TCMP TITLE TOOLBAR ADD TOOLBAR DEL TOOLBAR FIX Display dialog box with text box Ok amp Cancel buttons Display and action following lines Display prompt amp place entered characters in variable Display message box incorporating specified buttons Display dialog box for password entry Read characters from display buffer pos
152. adsheet Expenses xls n dde execute open h Vexcel excelcbtYexpenses xls channell if errno wrt Open spreadsheet failed n goto lab2 dde poke RequestedInformation R1CI R1C6 channel2 dde cancel channel2 lab2 dde cancel channel1 goto lab3 lab1 if channell lt 0 goto lab4 if int 1 goto lab4 launch h excel excel exe min if errno 0 inc int goto lab5 wrt Unable to launch Excel lab3 inp n rHit Enter to Exit dummy exit lab4 wrt Unable to establish dde link with Excel n if channell 0 channell channell wrt Had channell multiple sessions_n_r wrt ddelist goto lab3 12 8 Creating A Script File Initiating A File Transfer The following script file example will attempt to initiate a file transfer and display various informative messages Transfer a file using Kermit LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLDLLLLILLLLLII VAR reply VAR success 1 VAR files VAR message HRCV HOLD GOSUB lab2 IF success 0 GOTO labi GOSUB lab3 IF success 0 GOTO labi DIALOGUE File Transfer Send Filename files IF errno GOTO labl IF files GOTO labl GOSUB lab4 IF success 0 GOTO labl GOSUB lab5 HRCV PROC EXIT Initiate Kermit Meses se se ste lab2 PUT kermit r HCMP 60 C Kermit IF errno MSGBOX kermit did not get C Kermit gt prompt 1 reply LET
153. again To add a new button select a button bitmap from the Buttons list box then click the Insert at Current button Note that the function of this new button will be the same as that of the previously selected button tool until you redefine it You can insert a space before the current button tool as it is displayed in the toolbar by selecting Space in the Commands list box then clicking the Insert at Current button The Toolbar You are not restricted to the set of predefined button bitmaps displayed in the Buttons list box You can add your own customised buttons to the bottom of the list by clicking the Add Custom button This will display the Load Custom Bitmap dialog box which enables you to select a bitmap file from which a button will be automatically generated Specify the name of the bitmap file to use then click the OK button The dialog box will close and you will see the new button bitmap highlighted at the bottom of the Buttons list box If you want to delete a custom button from the Buttons list box select the button bitmap then click the Delete Custom button DO NOT click the Delete Current button as this will remove the currently selected button tool from the toolbar Note that you cannot delete the predefined button bitmaps displayed by default Assigning Functions To Buttons You can assign a variety of functions to the buttons You can either enter a definition of your own or you can select a menu command from
154. ain window The specified title can be a string delimited by double quotes or a variable An invalid title will set the errno error number variable to 1 TOOLBAR ADD Syntax TOOLBAR ADD bitmap command This will add a button tool to the end of the current set of displayed buttons where bitmap is either a string containing the name of the bitmap file to use or an integer which relates to the standard defined toolbar bitmaps in the order displayed in the Button Tools dialog box the first being 0 the second 1 etc command be a key macro string as described in The Toolbar chapter or an integer that relates to a standard command that is listed in the Button Tools dialog box as follows New Connection dialog box Open Session dialog box Save Session As dialog box Copy command Paste command File Transfer dialog box Run Script dialog box Printer Setup dialog box Print Screen dialog box _ 12 61 Creating A Script File 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Attributes dialog box Keyboard Macros dialog box Soft Buttons dialog box Mouse Button Actions dialog box Increase window size command Decrease window size command Button Tools dialog box GErase command DErase command DVisib command Zoom command except TeemTa
155. ake TeemTalk automatically connect to a network host node each time it is loaded or reset by specifying the host name protocol and if necessary a different default TSR identifier in the initialization file or on the command line The host command is used to specify the name of the host The communications protocol must be specified on the line below the host command using the protocol command On the command line the host name is immediately followed by a forward slash then the protocol as listed in the next section For example to specify the host as pericom and the protocol as CTERM the command line for TeemTalk 07W32 would look like this C PROGRAM FILES TEEMTALK TT07W EXE pericom cterm Network Protocol Initialization File protocol protocol Command Line hostnamelprotocol Default Setting Not applicable You can make TeemTalk automatically connect to a network host node each time it is loaded or reset by specifying the host name protocol and if necessary a different default TSR identifier in the initialization file or on the command line In the initialization file the protocol must be specified on the line immediately below the host command The protocol setting can be any one of the following TeemTalk for Windows 3 1x bapi infoconn lanman netbios penfs bwtcp int6B lanwp netwlat petcp cterm int14 lat newt TeemTalkosi doslanti ipxspx multilan oslan telapi eiconx25 isdn ncsi pathway winsock Init
156. alog Area Lines Factory default 32 This option defines how many lines of the dialog buffer are visible on the screen in the dialog area The size of the text window see Rows and dialog buffer see Dialog Area Buffer determines the maximum number of lines that can be displayed The minimum number of lines that can be displayed is 2 Dialog Area Buffer Factory default 49 This option specifies the size of the buffer which is used to store text for display in the dialog area The number of lines specified must be in the range 2 through 100 Dialog Area Enabled Factory default 1 The dialog area is a region on the screen in which text stored in the dialog area buffer can be displayed This option specifies whether the dialog area is enabled or disabled The dialog area is enabled when set to 1 and disabled when set to 0 In VT52 VT100 and Edit mode text is automatically placed in the dialog area regardless of whether or not the area is enabled In Tek mode with the dialog area enabled all alphanumeric text is placed in the dialog area buffer In Tek mode with the dialog area disabled text is placed in the graphics area at the current graphics position This gives an emulation of the Tektronix 4014 terminal which does not support an equivalent of the dialog area In Primary Setup mode all text entered from the keyboard is displayed in the dialog area 7 37 Setup Menus Gin Settings Tablet Type MM1201 C
157. alog box displayed when this button is clicked is described in the next section Clicking the Connect button or the name of the host in the Services list box twice will cause TeemTalk to attempt to connect to the specified host If a connection cannot be made because the network driver is not installed or the host node name is invalid an error message will indicate this Failure to connect for any other reason will result in a Connection Failed message 7 10 Setup Menus The status line along the bottom of the window displays two LEDs The first LED indicates whether or not you are connected to the host It will show red when not connected and green when you are connected The second LED indicates whether or not data is being sent to or from the host It will show dull green when there is no activity red when data is being sent to the host and bright green when data is being received from the host Connection to the network host node will close if you change the settings in the New Connection dialog box and attempt to connect if you log out of the host or the host closes the connection Warning messages will be displayed if the host closes the connection or you attempt to open a new session or exit TeemTalk while a session is open These message boxes can be disabled using initialization file commands or command line options Refer to the Initialization Commands chapter for details Open Session This enables you to select a co
158. alue on the previous line matches the variable value On a successful match the program performs the specified commands and exits the switch process DEFAULT this is an optional entry which will cause the program to perform the following commands and exit the switch process if the variable value was not matched with any of the case values SYSERR Syntax SYSERR boolean This is used to enable or disable the display of error message boxes The boolean value may be 0 or 1 No or Yes False or True OFF or ON The value may be abbreviated to the characters shown in uppercase 12 60 Creating A Script File TCMP Syntax TCMP delay row column lt string gt This will wait for the specified string to appear on the screen at the start location specified by row and column where delay 15 the number of seconds to wait for the specified string If the string is received within the time period the system flag is set to TRUE otherwise the flag is set to FALSE The program then continues with the next line If the time delay value is zero the program will wait indefinitely until the string is matched lt string gt be a literal string or a variable including integer and floating point There is no case sensitivity Use the brf and brt commands to test for success or failure TITLE Syntax TITLE string This enables you to change the title displayed in the title bar of the m
159. am the F1 key so that another instance of TeemTalk 07W is run when the key is pressed you would enter the following in the relevant text box C TEEMTALK TT07W EXE Changing The Window Focus You can program a key to change the currently selected window or icon that is the window or icon to which keyboard and mouse commands will be directed by entering its window class name as a string enclosed by the lt and gt characters For example to program the F4 key so that the TeemTalk O7W window is selected when the key is pressed you would enter the following in the relevant text box lt 407 gt tt07w is the window class name for TeemTalk 07W Initiating A Script File You can program a key to run a script file when pressed by enclosing the name of the file and any arguments within the left angle bracket and single quote and gt single quote and right angle bracket characters For example to program a key so that it will run the script file myscript scr and assign the values valuel and value2 to two variables you would enter the following lt myscript scr value1 value2 gt Refer to the chapter entitled Creating A Script File for more information on initiating script files Action Locally Or Transmit To Host A key definition may be actioned locally or transmitted to the host when the key is pressed This is determined by the setting of the Local check box next to the definition When the check box is unchecked
160. ame string max 80 Shifted Key MACROs Shift key name string max 80 Control Key MACROs Ctrl key name string max 80 Control Shift Key MACROs Ctrl Shift key name string max 80 Alt Key MACROs Alt key name string max 80 Non Vol Normal MACROs NV key name boolean Non Vol Shifted MACROs NV Shift key name boolean Non Vol Control MACROs NV Ctrl key name boolean Non Vol Ctrl Shift MACROs NV Ctrl Shift key name boolean Non Vol Alt MACROs NV Alt key name boolean Default Normal MACROs DEfault key name immediate Default Shifted MACROs DEfault Shift key name immediate Default Control MACROs DEfault Ctrl key name immediate Default Ctrl Shift MACROs DEfault Ctrl Shift key name immediate Default Alt MACROs DEfault Alt key name immediate European Currency Symbol GroupID ParamID Value Sends EURosign SENds string Received As EURosign RECeived string Printed As EURosign PRInts string 12 82 Creating A Script File Soft Buttons The ParamID setting SB L specifies the soft button number SB which can be any number between 1 and 12 inclusive and the level number L which can be 1 to 4 For example SB4L2 specifies soft button 4 on level 2 GroupID Qualifier ParamID Value Buttons Visible BUTTons VISible boolean Program Button BUTTons COMmand SB L string max 80 Button Name BUTTons NAMe SB L string max 10 Action Locally BUTTons LOCal SB L boolean Defau
161. ame name as an existing one it will be renamed to avoid overwriting it A unique generation number will append or replace part of the old name Send delay for first packet Factory default 0 The setting of this option determines the length of time in seconds before the first packet is sent when sending a file The time delay can be set to any number of seconds between 0 and 63 inclusive Retry limit Factory default 10 The setting of this option determines the number of retries that will be performed before the protocol is exited The retry limit can be set to any number between 1 and 63 inclusive File Transfer Kermit Parameters Kermit Parameters Start of Timeout in Padding count Padding Endofline Quote char Packet size Packet secs char char OutBound Packets 5 7 0 7 CTRL G v CTRL M 80 7 InBound Packets creta s 10 7 CTRL G CTRLM v 7 80 7 Checksum Type Prompt For Filename Save Settings 14 18 Force Print of File C 2Byte C 3Byte CRC Cancel Clicking the Kermit button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box will cause the Kermit Parameters dialog box to be displayed This enables you to set parameters specific to the Kermit protocol Once the settings have been selected the initialization file can be modified to reflect the changes under the heading TeemTalkFTU Kermit by checking the Save Settings box then clicking the OK bu
162. ameters do Send delay for first o s Warming bell packet Retry limit Discard partial file v Duplicate file warning Save Settings Cancel Clicking the General button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box will cause the General Parameters dialog box to be displayed This enables you to set various parameters for any of the transfer protocols Once the settings have been selected the initialization file can be modified to reflect the changes under the heading TeemTalkFTU Kermit by checking the Save Settings box then clicking the OK button Timer Factory default Selected When this option is selected if no packets have been received for a certain period of time then a retry will be attempted The protocol will be exited if the number of retries exceeds that specified by the Retry limit option Warning bell Factory default Selected When this option is selected an audible tone will sound when a transfer is completed or cancelled Discard partial file Factory default Selected This option determines what happens to a file when an error condition occurs or the Reset or Cancel button is clicked during a file transfer When selected the part of the file already transferred will be deleted When unchecked the part of the file that has been transferred will be kept File Transfer Duplicate file warning Factory default Selected When this is selected if an incoming file has the s
163. ample DIALOGUE lt title gt caption variable Each parameter indicator must be substituted with the relevant information as specified by the description for the command So for the example above you could enter the following DIALOGUE Please enter your name here name If a command includes parameters that may be omitted these will be enclosed by square brackets For example HCMP lt time gt lt string1 gt lt string2 gt where lt string2 gt is optional Do not include the angle or square brackets as part of the command unless you are specifically told to do so in the command description Boolean Values When a command requires a boolean value this can be any of the following where the value may be abbreviated to the UPPERCASE characters 0 or 1 No or Yes False or True OFF or ON 12 18 Creating A Script File Command Summary PROGRAM COMMANDS BRF Branch to specified label line if system flag is false BRT Branch to specified label line if system flag is true ELSE Do the following if previously specified if condition not true EXIT Exit script program but not TeemTalk GOSUB Go to subroutine at specified label line GOTO Go to specified label line IF Perform the following if specified condition is true LAUNCH Launch specified application LET Let the following be true QUIT Exit script program and TeemTalk RAND Put next random number into floating point number vari
164. and resize the palette in the same way as any other window To convert the floating button palette back into the toolbar click the control menu box at the top left corner of the palette window and select Attach If you click the shutdown button on the floating button palette you can restore display of the tool buttons by selecting the Button Tools option in the Settings menu and checking the Visible option in the dialog box The Predefined Button Tools The toolbar displayed by default contains a series of buttons defined with functions found in the setup menus These functions are listed below and described in the Setup Menus chapter Displays the New Connection dialog box for making a serial or network host connection Displays the Open Session dialog box This enables you to load a particular setup configuration Displays the Save Session As dialog box This enables you to specify how the current session configuration is to be saved Copies selected data to the clipboard Pastes clipboard data at the current cursor position Displays the Initiate File Transfer dialog box for transferring files using the Kermit XMODEM XMODEM 1K YMODEM Batch ZMODEM ASCII or ICL FTF protocols Refer to the File Transfer chapter for details B e uw Displays the Run Script dialog box for specifying the name of a script file to execute Displays the Printer Setup dialog box This enables you to select any printer that is co
165. and line is to be associated with if insert a line containing the open curly brace character before the first command line and a line containing the close curly brace character following the last command line For example if integer gt 3 inc integer goto routinel else goto routine2 The if command may be used on the same line as else for example if N 1 Xz2 else if N 2 4 else 1 If and associated else commands may be nested up to 32 times INC Syntax INC variable lt variable gt Increases the integer or floating point number assigned to the specified variables by one INP Syntax INP lt string gt variable Displays the string as a prompt and causes all following characters typed from the keyboard to be assigned to the specified variable until the Enter or Return key is pressed future references to the string may be made using the variable name 12 47 Creating A Script File For example to ask the user to enter his name and cause the name to be assigned to the variable UserID the following line would be entered inp Please Enter Your Name UserID KACT Syntax KACT lt string gt This command will cause the script program to perform the function of a key as if a terminal operator had pressed the key on the keyboard This can be used on its own or in conjunction with the kraw command to accept and perform an intercepted keystroke
166. ap for display in the toolbar and the second stage is to assign a function to it Adding Button Bitmaps Clicking the arrow button in the Current Tool box will display a list box showing all the button bitmaps in the order displayed in the toolbar together with their functions The Current Tool will be highlighted in this list When you add a new button to the toolbar it is positioned to the left of the button currently selected in this list Select the current tool then close the list box by clicking the arrow button again To add a new button select a button bitmap from the Buttons list box then click the Insert at Current button Note that the function of this new button will be the same as that of the previously selected button tool until you redefine it You can insert a space before the current button tool as it is displayed in the toolbar by selecting Space in the Commands list box then clicking the Insert at Current button You are not restricted to the set of predefined button bitmaps displayed in the Buttons list box You can add your own customised buttons to the bottom of the list by clicking the Add Custom button This will display the Load Custom Bitmap dialog box which enables you to select a bitmap file from which a button will be automatically generated 7 56 Setup Menus Specify the name of the bitmap file to use then click the OK button The dialog box will close and you will see the new button bitmap highlighte
167. are displayed for remapping the keyboard and defining the function of keys for defining soft button functions for defining mouse button functions for defining the toolbar floating button palette 7 24 Setup Menus Emulation Settings Emulation Settings Emulation vr 00 Cancel Code 1 Selects nsi E Terminal ID 0 Multinational Display Controls This dialog box is displayed by selecting Emulation in the Settings menu Emulation Factory default VT100 The setting of this option determines the current terminal emulation mode V T52 and VT100 modes enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT52 and VT100 terminals respectively Tek mode provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Tektronix 4100 or 4200 series terminals Emulation of the Tektronix 4014 terminal can be achieved by selecting this option and setting the Dialog Area Enabled option in the Dialog Settings dialog box to 0 Edit mode provides compatibility with software designed to drive the DEC VT100 terminal In this mode the following features are set to pre determined conditions A The dialog area is enabled and visible B The dialog area buffer and scrolling region are set to 24 lines C Cursor origin mode is set to Absolute refer to the description of the Cursor Origin option in the Dialog Settings dialog box D Insert Replace character mode is set to Replace
168. as asterisks instead of normal text This is useful for security purposes if you need to enter sensitive data such as a password ZMODEM Startup Initialization File zmodemStartup on Command Line zm Default Setting Off When ZMODEM startup is enabled TeemTalk will check incoming data for a remote ZMODEM startup sequence then automatically start a file transfer using the settings 11 15 Initialization specified in the ZModem Settings dialog box Note that the transfer protocol selected in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box will be ignored Refer to the File Transfer chapter for more information Disable Bell Initialization File bell off Command Line be Default Setting Enabled These commands enable you to turn off the terminal bell 11 16 Initialization Commands Display Window Minimized When Loaded Initialization File windowSize minimized Command Line mi Default Setting Not applicable These commands will cause the window to be displayed as an icon when TeemTalk is loaded Window Maximized When Loaded Initialization File windowSize maximized Command Line ma Default Setting Not applicable These commands will cause the window to be displayed at the maximum size possible when TeemTalk is loaded while retaining the default number of lines and columns and including all window elements if enabled title bar soft buttons etc Workspace Fills Screen When L
169. at are automatically set for the tablet type selected 1201 Summagraphics 1201 9600 8 1 Odd 1812 Summagraphics 1812 9600 8 1 Odd 2 10 Getting Started Bitpad Plus Summagraphics Bitpad Plus 9600 7 1 Even Calcomp Calcomp 16 button 9600 7 1 Even Mouse Mouse Uses the communication settings specified in the Serial Settings dialog box Click the button next to the Tablet Type required then specify the Serial Port Device to which the Gin device is attached You can save these settings so that TeemTalk will automatically assert them when loaded or reset by clicking the Save Session option in the File menu Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for a complete description of the Gin Settings dialog box Primary Setup Mode TeemTalk can be configured for your hardware and application either by using setup dialog boxes displayed from the Settings menu in the menu bar or by specifying settings in the Tektronix form of setup called Primary Setup The easiest way to configure TeemTalk is by using the various dialog boxes displayed from the Settings menu Some of these are discussed in this chapter and all of them are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter Primary Setup mode is used by those who have experience in programming No menus are displayed and the only indication that you are in Primary Setup mode is an asterisk character displayed in the first column Primary Setup mode is
170. at the number of char acters that will be read is four More than one variable and length specifier if a string variable may be specified to store successive blocks of characters from the file The following example will read ten characters from the file identified by the handle id and assign them to the string variable charl then read the next six characters and assign them to the string variable char2 and finally read the next 2 characters and place them in the integer variable number file read id char1 10 char2 6 number The Error Numbers section lists the possible error numbers for this command FILE RENAME Syntax FILE RENAME filename lt newname gt This will rename the file specified by filename to that of lt newname gt Both filenames can be specified as strings or string variables 12 33 Creating A Script File FILE RGET Syntax FILE RGET handle lt variable gt This will get a single character from a file and assign it to a variable where handle is the integer variable specified by the file open command and used to identify the file varname is a previously defined variable see var which will be used to store the character Note that if the variable was created in the integer for mat the decimal value of the character will be assigned to it More than one variable may be specified to store successive characters from the file Refer to the Error Numbers section later i
171. ata or string which can then be pasted into separate cells Excel recognises these strings as DDE formulae and more importantly as formulae that would provide data links to TeemTalk Negotiation then goes on in the form of hidden windows messages between Excel and TeemTalk and eventually the link is established in this situation Excel is the DDE Client with TeemTalk the Server DDE permanent links with TeemTalk are not just limited to Excel however With the knowledge of how to set up a permanent link it is then possible to get TeemTalk to converse with almost anything To establish a link a client DDE application requires information in the form of application name topic name and item name The application name is easy If you re running TeemTalk 07W then the application name is TT07W Similarly for TeemTalk 11W itis TT11W The topic name is slightly more difficult as it varies according to the instance s of TeemTalk currently running within the Windows environment By default the first instance has a topic of TTLK1 the second TTLK2 and so on The easiest way to determine this is to perform a DDE copy of data to the clipboard within the instance of TeemTalk under question then using the clipboard viewer usually located within the Main Group box determine what data TeemTalk has placed into the clipboard The data is placed in the following form 13 4 Dynamic Data Exchange szAppNamelszTopicName szItemName Therefore the
172. attribute characters described above if relevant Foreground Indices Normal Display GroupID ParamID Value Normal Index ATTRibutes FRGINDNORM 0 I5 char Bold Index ATTRibutes FRGINDBOLD 0 I5 char Underline Index ATTRibutes FRGINDUNDER 0 I5 char 12 80 Creating A Script File GroupID ParamID Value Underline amp Bold Index ATTRibutes FRGINDUNDBOLD 0 I5 char Flashing Index ATTRibutes FRGINDFLASH 0 15 char Flash amp Bold Index ATTRibutes FRGINDFLBOLD 0 I5 char Flash amp Underline ATTRibutes FRGINDFLUNDER 0 I5 char Flash Under amp Bold ATTRibutes FRGINDFLUNDBOLD 0 I5 char Foreground Indices Inverse Display GroupID ParamID Value Normal Index ATTRibutes FRGINDINV 0 15 char Bold Index ATTRibutes FRGINDINVBOLD 0 15 char Underline Index ATTRibutes FRGINDINVUNDER 0 15 char Underline amp Bold ATTRibutes FRGINDINVUNDBOLD 0 15 char Flashing Index ATTRibutes FRGINDINVFLASH 0 15 char Flash amp Bold Index ATTRibutes FRGINDINVFLBOLD 0 15 char Flash amp Underline ATTRibutes FRGINDINVFLUNDER 0 15 char Flash Under Bold ATTRibutes FRGINDINVFLUNDBOLD 0 I5 char Background Indices Normal Display GroupID ParamID Value Normal Index ATTRibutes BCKINDNORM 0 15 char Bold Index ATTRibutes BCKINDBOLD 0 15 char Underline Index ATTRibutes BCKINDUNDER 0 15 char Underline amp Bold ATTRibutes BCKINDUNDBOLD 0 15 char Flashing Index ATTRibutes BCKINDFLASH
173. ave been started If lt ddelist gt is specified and the channel variable is then lt ddelist gt will contain a list of strings relating to each individual session that would have been started Each entry in the list will be separated by a comma as follows szAppNamellszTopicl szAppName2lszTopic2 You can list the available topics for an application by specifying an empty string for the topic entry and including the channel and lt ddelist gt variable names The following example will cause a list of available topics for the application Excel to be stored in the variable ExcelTopics dde initiate Excel channel ExcelTopics DDE POKE Syntax DDE POKE variable lt item gt lt channel gt Sends a poke to the DDE partner placing data contained in a variable into a specified item where variable is the name of the variable which contains the information to be placed item is a string containing the name of the item where the information is to be placed channel is the name of the integer variable identifying the particular channel for the DDE link if specified by the dde initiate command otherwise this is omitted 12 26 Creating A Script File The following example will place data contained in the variable data1 into cells located at row 1 column 1 through row 2 column 3 inclusive with no channel specified assuming the DDE partner is an Excel spreadsheet dde poke data1 R
174. bIndex Width End Receive 0 False 0 False 5 Sans Serif 7558 0 False 0 False 255 0 1080 25 5640 1575 Begin CommandButton status Caption FontBold FontItalic FontName Status 0 False 0 False MS Sans Serif 13 26 Dynamic Data Exchange FontSize 7 8 FontStrikethru 0 False FontUnderline 0 False Height 255 Index 4 Left 5280 TabIndex 24 Top 5640 Width 735 End Begin CommandButton formats Caption Formats FontBold 0 False FontItalic 0 False FontName MS Sans Serif FontSize 7 8 FontStrikethru 0 False FontUnderline 0 False Height 255 Index 2 Left 4440 TabIndex 23 Top 5640 Width 735 End Begin CommandButton topics Caption Topics FontBold 0 False FontItalic 0 False FontName MS Sans Serif FontSize 7 8 FontStrikethru 0 False FontUnderline 0 False Height 255 Index 1 Left 3600 TabIndex 22 Top 5640 Width 735 End Begin CommandButton Sysitems Caption SysItems FontBold 0 False FontItalic 0 False FontName MS Sans Serif FontSize 7 8 FontStrikethru 0 False FontUnderline 0 1 Height 255 Index 0 Left 2760 TabIndex 21 13 27 Dynamic Data Exchange Top Width End Begin TextBox Text2 Height Left TabIndex Top Width End Begin CommandB
175. bleshooting pur poses Preserve Record Boundaries Factory default Unselected Select this option if you want the receiving system to preserve the record boundaries in the transmitted data when it writes the file to disk Note that the MS DOS filestore does not support record oriented files Preserve Horizontal Tabs Factory default Unselected Select this option if you want the receiving system to preserve horizontal tabs in the transmitted data when it writes the file to disk otherwise tabs may be expanded to spaces File Transfer Remote Host Options At Remote Host x Details Remote File Operation 19999 Cancel File Password _ Information Message r Account Text Storage Code Account Password Host Default Output Device Type ASCII Output Device Qualifier C EBCDIC Special Actions Special Options Action Message This dialog box is displayed by clicking the At Remote Host button in the FTF dialog box Remote File Operation Factory default Make or replace This specifies what operation should be performed on the file Click on the arrow button to display a list of operations supported then double click to select the mode you want to use The modes which are available are as follows Make The file must not exist on the remote system and will be created If the file is being sent to VME this will cause a new generation to be created if the f
176. board is being used Mouse Cursor Style Initialization File mouseCursorz0 0 Command Line 0 10 Default Setting I beam cursor These commands enable you to specify the style of the mouse cursor displayed by default in the TeemTalk window The values 0 through 10 correspond to the styles shown in the table below Default Cursor 0 I Beam 4 8 m 1 5 9 5 2 6 10 No Cursor 3 7 N Disable Editing Functions Initialization File mouseEdit off or mouseEdit disabled Command Line 0 allows highlighting but no copy paste except via menus mel all editing functions enabled me2 all editing functions disabled Default Setting functions enabled 11 25 Initialization In some cases it may be necessary to disable the copy and paste function of the mouse buttons to prevent accidental editing This can be achieved by using one of these commands When the editing functions are disabled use the Edit menu options or the numeric keypad keys Shift i e Del to copy and Shift 0 i e Ins to paste instead 11 26 Initialization Commands Printing Default TeemTalk Printer Initialization File device printer details Command Line Not applicable Default Setting specified in the Control panel This command enables you to specify a different printer which TeemTalk will use by default instead of that specified
177. by default All the terminal emulations supported by TeemTalk can be accessed from the Emulation Settings dialog box This is displayed by selecting Settings in the menu bar then Emulation The emulations available are listed in the Emulation list box Emulation Settings Emulation 100 Cancel Code 1 Selects L Terminal ID vrioo Multinational Display Controls To change the current emulation mode select the emulation required then click the OK button The emulation setting may be saved so that TeemTalk will automatically run it when it is loaded or reset by selecting the Save Session option in the File menu A brief description of the emulation options follows V T52 and VT100 modes enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT52 and VT100 terminals respectively Tek mode provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Tektronix 4100 or 4200 series terminals Emulation of the Tektronix 4014 terminal can be achieved by selecting this option and setting the Dialog Area Enabled option in the Dialog Settings dialog box to 0 Edit mode provides compatibility with software designed to drive the DEC VT100 terminal In this mode the following features are set to pre determined conditions A The dialog area is enabled and visible B The dialog area buffer and scrolling region are set to 24 lines C Cursor origin mode is set to Absolute refer to the
178. bypass mode ESC CAN Transfer data between aux amp host ports ESCX Transfer data from aux to host port ESCL GIN MODE HOST PRIMARY SETUP Define polygon amp enable polygon dragging ESCIRD ESCIRE Enable line dragging ESCIRA Request cursor position report ESCENQ Select GIN cursor position ESCIR Terminate dragging ESCIRF GRAPHICS TEXT HOST PRIMARY SETUP Move graphics text cursor down LF Move graphics text cursor left BS Move graphics text cursor right HT Move graphics text cursor up VT Select graphics text size 128 cols 52 lines 8x15 ESC 8 Select graphics text size 128 cols 52 lines 8x15 5 9 Select graphics text size 128 cols 52 lines 8x15 Select graphics text size 204 cols 98 lines 5x8 ESC Select graphics text size 204 cols 98 lines 5x8 5 Select graphics text size 204 cols 98 lines 5x8 ESC Select graphics text size 204 cols 98 lines 5x8 5 gt Select orientation of graphics text 2 Normal ESCIO Upwards Backwards C Downwards Text magnification level 1 A 2 B 3 ESC E MODE SELECTION HOST PRIMARY SETUP Deselect GIN amp enter graphics text mode CR Deselect GIN amp enter graphics text mode ESC FF Deselect point plot amp enter graphics text mode CR Deselect point plot amp enter graphics text mode ESC FF Deselect point plot amp enter graphics text mode US Deselect vector mode amp enter graphics text CR Deselect vector mode amp en
179. ce then automatically start a file transfer using the settings specified in this dialog box Note that the transfer protocol selected in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box will be ignored Data Conversion Factory default None This specifies whether or not the file being transferred is converted to ASCII or Binary format at the receiving end or remains unchanged None 8 14 File Transfer The Resume option enables you to send the remainder of a file if the transfer process is interrupted for example if data blocks were missed or the connection was lost This saves you having to retransmit the entire file again File Transfer Action Factory default Default This specifies what action is to be taken by the receiving end on files that are transferred Selecting Default will use the action specified by the receiving end Newer or Longer will cause files to be transferred if they do not exist in the destination directory and will replace files with the same name if the transfer files are more recent or contain more data CRC Different will cause the source and destination files to be compared and files will only be transferred if the file lengths or polynomials differ Append will cause the contents of the transfer file to be appended to the end of the file with the same name in the destination directory Replace will cause the contents of the transfer file to replace that of the file with the same name in the destination
180. ch between Local and Online mode The label indicates the mode TeemTalk will switch to if the button is clicked Button 2 This enables you to Pause or Resume scrolling data in the window The label indicates the action that will be taken if the button is clicked Field 2 Indicates the current terminal emulation Field 3 displays the line column location of the text cursor Field 4 This indicates whether Overstrike Mode or Insert Mode is currently selected In Overstrike Mode default new characters will replace already existing characters at the cursor position When Insert Mode is selected new characters will be inserted at the cursor position without deleting existing characters which will move to the right 2 19 Getting Started Field 5 Indicates the status of the printer as follows None signifies that the printer is not turned on or not connected or not installed in Microsoft Windows Not Ready signifies that the printer is not ready to receive data for printing Ready signifies that the printer is ready to receive data for printing Auto signifies that the emulation is in Auto Print mode in which the current cursor line is sent to the printer when a command for the cursor to move to the next line is issued Controller signifies that the emulation is in Printer Controller mode in which the host has direct control over the printer Print screen commands issued from the keyboard or mouse will be ignored
181. ciativity Left to Right unary Right to Left Left to Right Left to Right lt lt gt gt Left to Right zz Left to Right Right to Left The above table summarises the rules for precedence and associativity of operators available in the script language Operators on the same line have the same precedence lines in order of decreasing precedence So for example and have the same precedence which is higher than that of and Note that the brackets have the highest priority and are used to override the default precedences assumed by the script decoder For example var Data Data 14 2 34 4 wrt Data Data would output Data 11 whereas var Data 1 2 3 4 wrt Data Data n would output Data 21 12 17 Creating A Script File Command Descriptions The commands that can be used in the script file are described in alphabetical order on the following pages Conventions Character Case Each command description begins by showing the basic command followed by the command format with any parameters The command itself is shown in uppercase though it is not case sensitive Commands referred to within the main text and program examples are generally shown in lowercase Parameters If a command requires one or more parameters then an indication of the entry required is enclosed in angle brackets For ex
182. combination will be replaced with the Help function indicated in the text box by VT If you want the mapping of this key to be saved when you perform a Save Session make sure the Non Volatile box is checked Click the OK button to activate the change and close the dialog box Note that you will now have two keys which emulate the same function the default mapping and the mapping you have just specified You can either leave them this way or assign a new function to the key which was mapped by default When you have finished remapping the keyboard click the OK button in the Keyboard Macros dialog box to close it and cause TeemTalk to assert the changes You can save the new keyboard mapping so that TeemTalk will reassert it each time it is loaded or reset by displaying the Save Session As dialog box selecting the Keyboard Macros option then clicking the OK button Programming A Key Most of the keys on the keyboard may be programmed with up to five definitions each Keys that cannot be redefined include Shift Caps Lock Alt Alt Gr and Print Screen Both Ctrl keys can be redefined To program a key click the key in the upper layout which represents your keyboard The Define Key Macro dialog box will be displayed This dialog box shows the current definitions of all the following combinations for the selected key Key Shift Key Control Key Control Shift Key Alt Key Each key combination may contain a string of
183. command has been initiated Options that include an underlined character may be actioned by pressing the key bearing that character For example pressing the X key while the File menu is displayed will cause TeemTalk to shut down Options that are not followed by an ellipsis perform a particular function when selected For example selecting Save Session in the File menu will cause TeemTalk to save the session configuration to the currently selected saved settings files Options that are followed by an ellipsis indicate that a dialog box will be displayed with all the selections applicable to that option For example selecting New Connection in the File menu will display a dialog box in which you can specify host communication settings Some options display a tick mark when they are selected or activated such as the Clipboard Text option in the Edit menu Setup Menus To select a menu option Mouse Click the menu option Keyboard Method 1 If the option includes an underlined character press the key bearing that character For example pressing X while the File menu is displayed will cause TeemTalk to shut down Method 2 Use the up or down arrow keys to highlight the option required then hit Return Dialog Boxes Selecting an option which is followed by an ellipsis will cause a dialog box to be displayed The example shown below is displayed by selecting the Dialog option in the Settings menu
184. countered GOSUB label will cause the program to go to the line with the specified label when an error is encountered and then return to the line fol lowing the error Refer to the Script Error Trapping Functions section later in this chapter PACK Syntax PACK result lt string gt This command will remove redundant spaces between ASCII characters in a string together with any spaces and tabs before and after the string and place the resulting string in a variable result is a previously defined string variable see var which will contain the modified string string is the string or variable containing the string to be packed This is useful to prevent an otherwise valid user response becoming invalid due to extra spaces See also packtab PACKTAB Syntax PACKTAB result string This command will reduce multiple spaces and or tabs in a string into a single tab convert single spaces into tabs if a digit follows and place the resulting string in a variable result is a previously defined string variable see var which will contain the modified string string is the string or variable containing the string to be packed This is useful for making data suitable for a spreadsheet See also pack 12 53 Creating A Script File PARSE Syntax PARSE lt string gt lt 1 gt key variable2 This command enables you parse a string using a specified key
185. cros Off SoftButtons Off MouseButtons Off ButtonTools Off Help Menu Helpmenu Off Window Size lt lt Off gt gt Off 11 19 Initialization Disable Menu Bar Initialization File menubar off Command Line mb Default Setting These commands will remove the menu bar from the window The File Edit and Settings menus and the lt lt and gt gt window resize commands will be unavailable Disable Toolbar Initialization File toolbar off Command Line l Default Setting These commands will remove the toolbar from the window Disable Scroll Bar Initialization File scrollbar off Command Line sb Default Setting These commands will remove the scroll bar from the window Window Title Initialization File title title Command Line t title Default Setting TeemTalk TT W where is 05 07 or 11 These commands enable you to specify the title that is to be displayed in the title bar This is useful when you are running more than one instance of TeemTalk When specifying the title on the command line you must enclose it within double quotes For example to use the command line option to specify the title as New Data you would enter the following t New Data If no title is specified then the name of your version of TeemTalk will be displayed 11 20 Initialization Commands Window Subtitle Initialization File subTitle subtitle Comma
186. cted item hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer across to the opposite directory list box so that it rests on the icon or file contents of the destination directory then release the mouse button The Confirm Copy Files dialog box will be displayed The From box displays the name and location of the file or directory to be transferred The To box shows the name that the transferred file or directory will have at the destination By default this is the same as the source but you can change the name here 10 4 File Transfer Confirm Copy Files x Destination lt pericoms gt Zesport home andy ftptest 1folder From c mytempHTMLTEST DOC To HTMLTEST DOC Include Subdirectories 1 Yes to All Cancel If the current directory contains subdirectories that you wish to transfer check the Include Subdirectories check box This will ensure that FTP creates the relevant subdirectories on the destination drive Note A new Confirm Copy Files dialog box will appear for each subdirectory when it is opened ready for transferring its contents The dialog box will close when the relevant items in its subdirectory have been transferred Clicking the Yes button will transfer the named file or directory then wait for confirmation for the next if applicable Usually clicking Yes To All will copy all files and subdirectories from that directory down without waiting for further confirmation However if yo
187. cursor size 11 23 Default font size 11 21 Default TeemTalk printer 11 27 Disable bell 11 16 Disable close window menu item 11 18 Disable closed connection box 11 11 Disable control menu 11 18 Disable copyright message 11 17 Disable Exit TeemTalk box 11 11 Disable graphics show thru 11 24 Disable maximize button 11 18 Disable menu 11 20 Disable menuitems 11 19 Disable min max buttons 11 18 Disable minimize button 11 18 Disable mouse editing 11 25 Disable remote printing 11 28 Disable scrollbar 11 20 Disable status bar 11 21 Disable system menu 11 18 Disable title bar 11 19 Disabletoolbar 11 20 Disable window frame 11 19 Flashing for all sessions 11 22 Hide script parameters 11 15 LK450 keyboard 11 25 Mouse cursor style 11 25 NetBIOS version 11 9 Network hostname 11 8 Network input queue size 11 10 Network protocol 11 8 New session warning message 11 11 Number of segments 11 24 Path for nv file 11 14 Path for wsp file 11 14 Preload Winsock DLL for PPP usage 11 9 Print data to 11 28 Printmanager 11 27 Return script values in uppercase 11 15 Run script file 11 15 Segment memorysize 11 24 Softbuttons displayed 11 21 Startup command group to action 11 13 Support multiple surfaces 11 23 Suppress telnetecho option 11 12 Telnet binary options 11 12 Telnet break settings 11 12 Index 4 Index Telnet EOR options 11 12 Textredraw delay 11 23 TSRidentifier 11 10 Use Windows default printer 11 27
188. d Auto Wrap Factory default Selected This option determines whether characters wrap to the next line when the right margin is reached When unselected on reaching the right margin the last character position will be overwritten by every new character received until a command positions the cursor at a different location Dialog Indices Locked Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will prevent the host from changing the current colour settings of the dialog area In some circumstances the dialog indices may have to be locked to prevent the text becoming unreadable due to clashes between the character foreground colour and the background colour This is because TeemTalk does not have a separate dialog and graphic colour map 7 35 Setup Menus Dialog Area Visible Factory default Selected This option enables you to make the dialog area visible or invisible Cursor Origin Factory default Relative The setting of this option defines the relationship between the cursor position and the emulation workspace When this option is set to Absolute the cursor position is calculated using the first column and row of the emulation workspace as its origin so allowing addressing outside the current text scrolling region When set to Relative the cursor position is calculated using the first column and row of the current text scrolling region as its origin Cursor movement is restricted to the scrolling region
189. d Macros Keyboard Macros 102 Key Enhanced AT Layout British Ei GREE EPEEIEIERIEIEIEE a Default Keyboard Action Click the PC key you wish to define or sh M 7 aD Click VT320 key to show its mapping a oo a 817 wipsrded This dialog box is displayed by selecting Keyboard Macros in the Settings menu The Keyboard Macros dialog box enables you to redefine the function of most of the keys on your keyboard and shows the mapping of the keyboard for the current terminal emulation mode Two keyboard layouts are displayed The upper layout corresponds to the keyboard you are using which will be one of the following 101 key 102 key 84 key Digital s LK250 or LK450 KEA Systems PowerStation depending on the type specified within Microsoft Windows Setup for your PC Note When an LK250 LK450 or PowerStation keyboard driver is loaded the SYSTEM INI file is scanned by TeemTalk to see if the string LK250 LK450 or PowerStation is present and maps the keyboard accordingly The lower layout represents the keyboard associated with the terminal currently being emulated as specified in the Emulation Settings dialog box Keyboard Mapping You can show how TeemTalk has mapped your keyboard within the current terminal emulation mode by setting the Keyboard Action option between the two layouts to 7 44 Setup Menus Show Map then moving the poi
190. d as 013 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references 7 33 Setup Menus End Of Message Characters Factory default M CR and J LF This option is used to specify up to two ASCII characters in the decimal range 0 through 127 which are sent by TeemTalk to end a line of data transmission To change the current definition delete the definition displayed in the text box and type in the new one either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the ASCII character LF can be entered by typing the characters and J representing the keys Ctrl J which when pressed together would generate the LF code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of LF is 10 so this would be entered 010 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references EOM Frequency Factory default High The end of message frequency specifies how often TeemTalk inserts end of line strings into reports that it sends to the host Terminal Factory default 4207 The setting of this option determines the extent of control over text displayed in the graphics area Specifying 4105 will cause the Tek emulation to use string precision text only whereas 4207 or 4111
191. d at the bottom of the Buttons list box If you want to delete a custom button from the Buttons list box select the button bitmap then click the Delete Custom button DO NOT click the Delete Current button as this will remove the currently selected button tool from the toolbar Note that you cannot delete the predefined button icons displayed by default Assigning Functions To Buttons You can assign a variety of functions to the buttons You can either enter a definition of your own in the same way as for keyboard macros and soft buttons or you can select a menu command from the Commands list box The buttons displayed in the toolbar by default are defined with some of the functions listed in the setup menus Refer to the chapter entitled The Toolbar for details These enable you to quickly action a command or display a setup dialog box without having to display the menu first The Commands list box displays all the menu items that can be assigned to the buttons To assign a function to a button make sure that the button bitmap required is displayed in the Current Tool box enter the new definition in the associated text box or select a menu command from the Commands list box then click the Change Current button to action the change The toolbar will not be updated until you click the OK button to close the dialog box Removing Button Tools You can remove individual button tools from the toolbar or you can remove the entire toolbar an
192. d floating button palette from the display A button tool is removed by selecting it in the Current Tool list box then clicking the Delete Current button To remove the toolbar and floating button palette from the display deselect the Visible check box 7 57 Setup Menus Help Menu Help Contents How To Use Help About TeemTalk Help Contents Selecting this option will display a help window listing the contents of help for TeemTalk Clicking an underlined topic or pressing Tab to highlight the topic then pressing Enter will cause the window to display information on that topic Text that has a continuous underline will cause another topic to be displayed when clicked while text with a dotted underline will display a small temporary window with a description of the term How To Use Help This option will display a window which provides information on how to use help About TeemTalk Selecting this option will cause a dialog box to be displayed in which details of your version of TeemTalk will be shown To close the box click the OK button 7 58 File Transfer File Transfer This chapter describes how to transfer files using the Kermit XMODEM XMODEM 1K YMODEM Batch ZMODEM and ASCII protocols Introduction TeemTalk includes a file transfer utility which enables two way file transfer between the host and your PC A range of file transfer protocols are supported to provide compatibility
193. d from the host are stripped The Through Print Action options enable you overcome this problem If you want to use the Print Manager but disable its print formatting process so that the original escape sequences from the host are retained select both the Use Print Manager and PassThru options Note that the PassThru option will be unselectable if the printer driver currently selected does not support this facility If you want to bypass the Print Manager deselect the Use Print Manager option The FormFeed Terminator and Translate National Characters options will become available Selecting the FormFeed Terminator option will cause the printer to advance the paper to the top of the form when it has finished printing The setting of the Translate National Characters option determines whether or not the ISO Latin characters used by Microsoft Windows are translated to IBM characters for the printer If you find a through print results in data being split into lines each treated as a separate print job specify a time in the Seconds Close Delay box e g 5 seconds This will enable the next line of data to be sent before the print job is assumed to have finished and therefore prevents the print job from being closed prematurely When Auto Line Feed is selected every carriage return command will be followed by a line feed command The Setup button enables you to display the Microsoft Windows Print Setup dialog box for the currently selected
194. d in the Foreground and Background colour palettes For default display deselect this option Swap Black White Factory default Unselected This option is not applicable to TeemTalk 05W 07W or 11W and will therefore be unselectable Inverse Colours Factory default Unselected When this option is selected characters with the inverse attribute will have the text foreground colour swapped with that of the text cell background AutoColour Factory default Unselected This option is not applicable to TeemTalk 05W 07W or 11W and will therefore be unselectable Ansi Colours Disabled Factory default Unselected This option is not applicable to TeemTalk 05W 07W or 11W and will therefore be unselectable 7 41 Setup Menus Colours Cleared With Attributes Factory default Unselected This option is not applicable to TeemTalk 05W 07W or 11W and will therefore be unselectable Attributes Use Normal BG Factory default Unselected This option is not applicable to TeemTalk 05W 07W or 11W and will therefore be unselectable Customizing The Colour Selection You can change any of the 16 colours displayed in the Foreground and Background colour selection boxes To do this select the colour you wish to change in one of the selection boxes then click the Set Colour button to display the Colour Palette dialog box Colour Palette Set Colour Hue Red Lightness o E Green p E From To Sat
195. d in the Terminal Settings dialog box will be used Only characters found in this character set may be generated When this option is selected the multinational character set will be used This consists of the 7 bit ASCII character set and the 8 bit VT220 Additional character set as shown in the Character Sets appendix This enables characters from all national character sets to be generated Display Controls Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether received control codes are actioned or displayed When selected a representation of most control codes will be displayed on the screen 7 26 Setup Menus Serial Settings Serial Settings Baud Rate Data Bits 2400 Cancel Parity 1 r Stop Bits 1 None 1 Flow Control Transmit Rate M OnLine Output z 12200 v L F Detect Carrier This dialog box is displayed by selecting Serial in the Settings menu or by clicking the Configure button in the New Connection dialog box when the connection type is set to Serial or Interrupt 14 Note that the port for serial communications is selected via the New Connection dialog box which is displayed from the File menu Baud Rate Factory default 2400 This specifies the transmit and receive baud rates for the port selected for host communications Parity Factory default None This option specifies the parity mode f
196. d then the variable will always be 0 zero See also the description of the seed command 12 56 Creating A Script File RDPXY Syntax RDPXY variable row column lt count gt This causes the program to read a specified number of characters from the specified row and column position in the display buffer and assign them to a previously defined string variable Note that the row and column position is relative to the display buffer not the current screen display The top row in the display buffer designated as row 0 For example to read twenty characters beginning at row 3 and column 18 and place them in the variable called name you would enter the following rdpxy name 3 18 20 RDT Syntax RDT variable lt count gt This causes the program to read a specified number of characters from the current cursor position wherever it is in the display buffer and assign them to a previously defined variable For example to cause twelve characters from the cursor position to be assigned to the variable called name you would enter the following rdt name 12 RDTXY Syntax RDTXY variable row column count This causes the program to read a specified number of characters from the specified row and column position on the current screen display and assign them to a previously defined string variable Note that the row and column position is relative to the current screen display not the display
197. depending on your version of TeemTalk will allow both string and stroke precision text String precision text only consists of alpha mode fonts Stroke precision allows both alpha and user defined fonts to be displayed and provides greater precision when slanting rotating or sizing the text Answerback String This option enables you to specify the Answerback string that is sent to the host in response to an ANSI mode enquiry command The string may be up to 30 characters long Answerback Concealed Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause the Answerback string specified in the text box above to be locked from change and displayed as asterisks Note that deselecting this option will cause the Answerback string to be deleted 7 34 Setup Menus Dialog Settings Dialog Settings Burst Scroll Dialog Indices Locked Auto Wrap Dialog Area Visible Cursor Origin 1 r Cursor 5 r Columns Relative Underline 80 C Absolute C Block 132 Window Resize Acton Resize Font Rows 32 Dialog Area Lines 3 Dialog Area Buffer fag Dialog Area Enabled fi Cancel This dialog box is displayed by selecting Dialog in the Settings menu Burst Scroll Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether data is scrolled one or several lines at a time when the window becomes full Data will scroll up several lines at a time when this is selecte
198. e LOCAL immediate Local Change Dir LOCAL CHANGE DIR see note below Remote Command REMOTE COMMAND see note below Remote Change Dir REMOTE CHANGE DIR see note below Remote Get REMOTE GET see note below Remote Erase REMOTE ERASE immediate Remote Finish REMOTE FINISH immediate Remote Log Out REMOTE LOGOUT immediate Remote Bye REMOTE BYE immediate Note The ftu set remote get ftu set remote local change dir and ftu set remote command commands have their values specified on the ftu start command line 12 88 Dynamic Data Exchange 13 Dynamic Data Exchange This chapter describes the support of dynamic data exchange DDE by TeemTalk Introduction With the adoption of a standard user interface within the Microsoft Windows environment personal computer users are becoming accustomed to the formalised methods by which keystrokes and mouse actions have a common effect making it easier for users to become familiar with and switch between a whole range of unrelated but important applications This commonality extends beyond just the look and feel of applications The ability to share data between totally independent applications must by now be a very familiar operation to many Windows users Generally this is achieved by using the EDIT facilities of an application either by copying cutting or pasting portions of required information These operations make use of the Windows system clipboard The cl
199. e an application may display information relating to keys you can press to perform a particular function Instead of pressing the key on the keyboard you could invoke the function by moving the mouse cursor over the displayed key name holding down the Control key and clicking the Left mouse button assuming default mouse configuration Hotspots are supported in ALL terminal emulation modes TeemTalk provides a set of default hotspot keywords for each mode These relate to key functions specific to the emulation For example in VT200 mode you can click on the word Help displayed on the screen and TeemTalk will execute the function associated with the Help key Refer to the Hotspots chapter for details You can identify hotspots that are currently present in display memory by holding down the Control key and the Right mouse button colour attributes will be temporarily removed from the display and the hotspots will be highlighted with a red background Releasing the keys will return the display to its original state Send Keyword The Send Keyword function enables you to click on any delimited word displayed on the screen and it will be sent to the host as long as the word is not already defined as a hotspot Keyword delimiters are the same as for hotspots by default that is space NULL and Moving The Cursor In Block Mode When TeemTalk is in any of the local block modes you use the Move Cursor function to q
200. e Account as well Specify the type of operating system used by the remote host by selecting one of the following from the System list box Auto VAX MultiNet VAX TCPWare HP3000 VAX UCX V1 NT Prime AS400 VAX UCX V2 UNIX IBM MVS KNET MVS VAX UCX Tandem Dos IBM Interlink Auto will cause FTP to automatically select the appropriate operating system and this setting will be suitable in most cases Note that some DOS based FTP servers cannot automatically be resolved so it is advisable to select Dos when you know the target server is based on a DOS machine VAX UCX applies to versions higher than V2 10 2 File Transfer The Local and Remote Directory boxes enable you to specify the start directories and drive name if required that FTP will automatically attempt to locate and display in the TTWFTP window when a session is connected The normal default directory home will be displayed if no directory is specified or the directory is notaccessible Click the Connect button at the top right corner of this dialog box TeemTalk will attempt to connect to the specified host If the connection is successful you will be returned to the TTWFTP window after a few seconds was TTWETP 155 File Session Configure View Help t Sa e Binary Local Directory Remote Directory ANON HE tcreator 2 autoexec old HE tmelltn ttwftp ini Ho stech PI H bboard 2 DEAN ZIP demos
201. e Insert key found on the DEC VT320 keyboard enter the following line in the relevant Defini tions command group Insert lt VT_INSERT gt To define a keyword so that it will perform the same function as pressing two or more other keys together type the lt character followed by the virtual key names linked Hotspots together with characters and ending with the gt character For example to define the keyword Help so that when it is clicked it performs the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together enter the following line in the relevant Definitions command group Help lt ALT F4 gt To define a keyword so that it will perform the same function as pressing a sequence of keys one after the other enter each virtual key name in the order required enclosing each name with the lt and gt characters Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces For example to define the keyword Command so that when it is clicked it performs the same function as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following Command lt F2 gt lt F3 gt lt F4 gt Entering Command Lines You can enter a command line in a keyword definition by enclosing it within the characters For example to define the keyword TT07W so that when it is clicked another instance of TeemTalk 07W32 is run you would enter the following TTO7W C PROGRAM FILES TEEMTALK TT07W EXE
202. e are 2 additional special sequences which be programmed into soft buttons or keyboard macros To launch an application include the command line within round brackets PSET MACRO VK c TeemTalk tt07w exe To change the window focus window class name include it within quotes within angle brackets PSET MACRO VK F2 lt 034tt07w 0342 Note The decimal value of the double quote character is used within the string to prevent the script program assuming that it terminates the string Initiating A DDE Conversation The following script file example will attempt to initiate a DDE conversation with the application Excel and display various informative messages var dummy var gochannell var channel2 var RequestedSelectInfo var int 0 var RequestedInformation var ddelist var title TT07W Script to Excel DDE interface n pset curr dht bg blue fg yellow wrt title pset curr dhb wrt title pset curr clr lab5 DDE initiate Excel system channell ddelist 12 7 Creating A Script File if errno goto labl DDE initiate Excel sheet1 channel2 if errno goto lab2 wrt DDE initiation with Excel succeeded n r wrt Excel Supports the following Clipboard formats n r t dde request Formats RequestedInformation channell dde request Selection RequestedSelectInfo channel1 wrt RequestedInformation n wrt RequestedSelectInfo n wrt About to open the Excel Spre
203. e first item in the toolbar whether it is a button or a space is at position 1 You must include any spaces in the count TOOLBAR FIX Syntax TOOLBAR FIX This will fix the toolbar under the menu bar TOOLBAR FLOAT Syntax TOOLBAR FLOAT This will cause the tool buttons to be displayed in a floating window TOOLBAR HIDE Syntax TOOLBAR HIDE This will remove the toolbar from the display TOOLBAR INS Syntax TOOLBAR INS position bitmap command TOOLBAR INS position space This enables you to insert a tool button or space immediately before the specified position in the toolbar where position is an integer that specifies the position in the toolbar before which the button or space is to be inserted The first item in the toolbar whether it is a button or a space is at position 1 You must include any spaces in the count 12 63 Creating A Script File bitmap is either a string containing the name of the bitmap file to use or an integer which relates to the standard defined toolbar bitmaps in the order displayed in the Button Tools dialog box the first being 0 the second 1 etc command can be a key macro string as described in The Toolbar chapter or an integer that relates to a standard command that is listed in the Button Tools dialog box Refer to the Button Tool Command Selection section later for a list of standard commands and related integers space ent
204. e is not a string as defined by the var command then the ASCII decimal value of the character s will be placed in the variable e g A will be 65 Note You can use the command to convert the decimal value to an ASCII character Examples hget char Gets one character from the host hget str 5 Gets five characters from the host hget str 5 10 Gets five characters from the host timeout after 10 seconds The system flag will be set to FALSE and the errno error number variable will be set to 0 if a timeout occurs TRUE and errno set to 1 if the command was successful HRCV Syntax HRCV IGNORE HRCV PROCESS HRCV HOLD This command specifies what happens to characters received from the host while the script program is running When set to ignore characters will be thrown away When set to process characters will be processed as normal When set to hold characters will be held but not actioned until an hrev process command is received except for the hget or hemp commands which will be processed The ignore process and hold settings can be abbreviated to I P and H respectively 12 46 Creating A Script File IF Syntax IF condition Informs the program to perform the command s on the following line s if the specified condition is true The else command may be used in conjunction with if For example if integer gt 3 goto routinel else goto routine2 If more than one comm
205. e it For example assuming a default installa tion of TeemTalk 07W the private profile TT07W INI could be placed in any of the following directories 1 CATEEMTALK default 2 CA WINDOWS 3 CAWINDOWS SYSTEM 4 Any other directory referenced via the environment path variable You can view the contents of the current private profile file by displaying the Startup Options dialog box from the File menu and clicking the Edit button The format of entries is the same as for those in the WIN INI file A heading enclosed by square brackets is followed by one or more commands on separate lines as in the example below 11 2 Initialization Commands Untitled ses Wsp tt07w wsp Nv tt07w nv Sessions Default Untitled ses Startup Dialog 1 SaveAsDefault 1 Editor notepad exe All entries within the file are searched for on a case insensitive basis Note TeemTalk WIN INI commands cannot be placed in the private profile file Settings which should be placed in the private profile file will be clearly indicated Windows 95 amp NT The TeemTalk private profile file contains various commands which affect the way in which TeemTalk is initially run and displayed A default private profile file is auto matically created when TeemTalk is installed and this has the name TT W INI where is the particular version of TeemTalk installed as follows TeemTalk 05W32 TT05W INI TeemTalk 07W32 TTO7W INI TeemTalk 11W32
206. e text that will appear to the left or above the text box as specified by a string delimited by double quotes or the name of a previously defined string variable lt entry gt is a previously defined string variable which is used to store the text entered in the text box by the user but only if the Ok button is pressed otherwise the variable is set to NULL lt gt lt gt specify the horizontal and vertical position of the top left corner of the dialog box in relation to the top left corner of the screen in pixels These can be integers or variables The following example will display a dialog box with the title Password containing a text box with the prompt Enter your password and cause the text entered in the 12 54 Creating A Script File text box by the user to be stored in the string variable result when the Ok button is pressed password Password Enter your password result 100 100 The Error Numbers section later in this chapter lists possible error numbers PGET Syntax PGET variable lt groupID gt lt paramID gt This command enables you to get most terminal emulation setup parameters and the current values of some attributes where variable 15 a previously defined variable see var lt groupID gt identifies a group of parameters e g host settings lt gt identifies the particular parameter e g baud rate For example to get the current baud rate setting and place
207. e that some DOS based FTP servers cannot automatically be resolved so it is advisable to select DOS when you know the target server is based on a DOS machine VAX UCX applies to versions higher than V2 The Local and Remote Directory boxes enable you to specify the start directories and drive name if required that FTP will automatically attempt to locate and display in the TTWFTP window when a session is connected The normal default directory home will be displayed if no directory is specified or the directory is not accessible To save you having to enter details of the remote host each time you want to make a connection you can assign a session name to them which will automatically set the 10 10 File Transfer host login password and account details when you click on it A session name is assigned by clicking the Add button to display the following dialog box Connection x New Session Name ew Session Name EE Cancel Enter a unique name the name of the remote host for example then click OK to save the current host connection settings to that name The session name will be displayed in the Sessions list box together with any others that have been defined Clicking on a session name will automatically update the host connection settings in the dialog box If you need to change any of the settings assigned to a session name click on the name make the relevant changes then click the Add button then OK to the
208. eading TeemTalkFTU ASCII by checking the Save Settings box then clicking the OK button Note The ASCII protocol has additional parameters which can be set in another dialog box by pressing the General button This dialog box was described earlier CR Translation Factory default CR This determines how carriage return characters are interpreted When set to None all carriage returns are removed before data is transferred When set to CR carriage returns are transmitted as they are When set to CR LF every carriage return character will be appended with a line feed character Note On a PC most text files are delimited by a CR LF sequence whereas most mainframes and other systems expect ASCII files delimited only with a CR LF Translation Factory default LF This determines how line feed codes are interpreted When set to None all line feeds are removed before data is transferred When set to LF line feeds are transmitted as they are When set to LF CR every line feed character will be appended with a carriage return character 8 12 File Transfer Line Pacing Character Factory default None This specifies the pacing character used to indicate that the host or PC is ready to receive the next line of data Line Pacing Time Factory default 0 This specifies the time in 1 10 seconds that the program will pause between each line transmission Expand Blank Lines Factory default Unselected The setting of this
209. eady saved using the Save Session As dialog box and must be enclosed by double quotes 11 14 Initialization Commands Run Script File Initialization File scriptfile filename Command Line sefilename Default Setting Not applicable TeemTalk provides a script language which can be used to automate certain activities such as logging into remote computers These commands enable you to specify the name and directory path if necessary of the script file to initialize The format of the script file is explained in the chapter Creating A Script File Return Script Values In Uppercase Initialization File ScriptUppercase on CommandLine su Default Setting Values returned in upper and lowercase By default script PGET values are returned unabbreviated with essential characters in uppercase and non essential characters in lowercase as shown in the Set amp Get Parameters amp Values section in the Creating A Script File chapter For example the value Yes is returned with the essential character Y in uppercase while the other characters are in lowercase If your script requires the entire value to be returned in uppercase use this initialization file command or command line option Hide Script Parameters Initialization File scriptparameter off Command Line hs Default Setting Parameters displayed These commands will cause the values typed in the Parameters box in the Run Script dialog box to be displayed
210. eated if C is specified in the following lt op eration gt string lt operation gt is a string or string variable containing any of the following characters which define the type of operation that is to be performed on the file R 12 32 Creating A Script File read W write and create If this string is omitted the program will assume that the file will have read and write operations performed on it For example to create the file myfile doc and enable characters to be written to it the following line would be entered specifying that the integer identifying the file is to be stored in the variable called id file open id myfile doc cw The Error Numbers section lists the possible error numbers for this command FILE READ Syntax FILE READ handle variable length This will read a specified number of characters from a file and assign them to a variable where handle 15 the integer variable specified by the file open command and used to identify the file variable is a previously defined variable see var which will be used to store the characters Note that if the variable was created in the integer for mat the decimal value of the first two characters will be assigned to it length is the number of characters to be read if the variable is in string format If the variable is in integer format the number of characters that will be read is two and if in floating point number form
211. ed this command will cause all keystrokes entered by the terminal operator to be intercepted and stored in a queue so that the script program can take action on them using the kraw and kact commands You should disable this function before the script program is exited KPRESS Syntax KPRESS key identifier gt This command will cause the script program to perform the function of the key identified by its reference number or virtual key name Refer to the Key Reference Numbers appendix for a list of valid key reference numbers and the Virtual Key Names appendix for a list of key names that can be used KRAW Syntax KRAW lt string gt When keyboard intercept is enabled by kintercept the kraw command is used to retrieve each keystroke in turn from the input queue so that it can either be processed accepted or rejected by the script program A string can be intercepted by placing this command in a loop Keystrokes are represented as virtual key names in the same format as a key macro For example FI the F1 key has been pressed A VK FI the F1 key has been pressed with the Alt key held down If a key has not been pressed then kraw will return a null string KRCV Syntax KRCV IGNORE KRCV PROCESS KRCV HOLD This command specifies what happens to characters received from the keyboard while the script program is running When set to ignore characters will be thrown away When set to process characters wi
212. ed to link an instance of TeemTalk to a particular TSR This enables two or more instances of TeemTalk to use different network protocols and also allows other software in the system to use interrupt 63 The default TSR identifier is 5A hex You can specify a different default identifier by including the netid command in the WIN INI file For example to specify the new default TSR identifier as 48 hex you would enter the following line netid 48 If you want to use a different TSR identifier than the default specified in the WIN INI file to enable another instance of TeemTalk to use a different network protocol for example you need to include the i command line option immediately followed by the new TSR identifier when loading the TSR program and when loading TeemTalk as specified in the Microsoft Windows Program Item Properties dialog box For example to run FTPTSR using the identifier 48 hex the line entered at the DOS prompt would be FTPTSR i48 Input Queue Size Initialization File InputQueue 0 4096 Command Line 40 4096 Default Setting 255 These commands enable you to set the input queue size for network data The size of the input queue will determine how quickly an interrupt command takes effect For example pressing the keys Ctrl Q while receiving a long listing will only cause data input to stop once the input queue is empty The larger the input queue the longer the interrupt command will take to st
213. eed LF Move cursor down one line ESC B Move cursor down one line VT Move cursor home ESC H Move cursor one column left BS Move cursor one column left ESC D Move cursor one column right ESC C Move cursor to left margin of current line CR Move cursor to next tab stop HT Move cursor up one line ESC A Reverse line feed ESCI Host Command Summary TEXT ERASURE HOST PRIMARY SETUP Erase text to end of line ESCK Erase text to end of screen ESC J GENERAL HOST PRIMARY SETUP Cancel current ESC sequence amp display error CAN Sound audible tone BEL MODE SELECTION HOST PRIMARY SETUP Select terminal emulation mode ESC CODE Host 0 Tek 1 ANSI 2 Edit 3 52 5 VTIOON 6 VT220N 7 VT220M7 8 VT220M8 Select numeric keypad application mode ESC Select numeric keypad normal mode ESC gt Select VT100 mode ESC lt PRINTING HOST PRIMARY SETUP Auto print off ESC _ Auto print on ESC Print controller off ESCX Print controller on ESCW REPORTS HOST PRIMARY SETUP Request mode identification report ESCZ Send terminal emulation mode report ESC 0 E 2 Host Command Summary ANSI VT100 Mode CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES Assign attribute s to following characters Default attributes 0 Bold on 1 Underline on 4 Flashing on 5 Inverse video on 7 Half intensity off 22 Underline off 24 Flashing off 25 Inverse video off 27 Black foreground 30 Red foreground
214. efault and where work is carried out with an application Refer to the section entitled Selecting The Terminal Emulation earlier in this chapter for details on how to change the emulation In Tek mode the emulation workspace effectively consists of two layers one lying on top of the other One layer referred to as the dialog area is used to display alphanumeric text The other layer is used to display graphics and graphics text and is called the graphics area The dialog area is a window into the dialog buffer which is used to store alphanumeric text The dialog area may fill the entire emulation workspace or consist of only two lines You can specify the size of the dialog buffer and the number of lines actually displayed in the Dialog Settings dialog box as described in the Setup Menus chapter When the dialog area is disabled within Tek mode all incoming alphanumeric text is directed to the graphics area providing an emulation of the Tektronix 4014 terminal which does not support a separate dialog area In any other terminal emulation mode the dialog area is always enabled there is no separate graphics layer and all alphanumeric text is directed to it You can toggle the visibility of the dialog area on and off by clicking the DVisib soft button in the Soft Buttons window The contents of the dialog buffer can be erased by clicking the DErase button and you can erase the contents of the graphics area and cause all visible segments
215. efinition displayed in the text box and type in the new one either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the default ASCII character LF can be entered by typing the characters and J representing the keys Ctrl J which when pressed together would generate the LF code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of LF is 10 so this would be entered as 010 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references End Of Line Characters Factory default M CR This option is used to specify up to two ASCII characters in the decimal range 0 through 127 which are sent by TeemTalk at the end of reports sent to the host To change the current definition delete the definition displayed in the text box and type in the new one either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the default character CR can be entered by typing the characters and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entere
216. el gt lt ddelist gt This command starts a dynamic data exchange DDE conversation between TeemTalk and an application where lt app gt is a string specifying the name of the DDE partner 1 the application lt topic gt is a string specifying the name of a topic for the DDE partner 12 25 Creating A Script File channel is the name of an integer variable see var into which an ID will be placed reflecting the particular channel for the initiated DDE link A maximum of four channels may be used at any one time each must have a different variable name This may be omitted if only one chan nel is to be used i e only one DDE conversation is to be initiated and the channel ID will be set to 1 lt ddelist gt is the name of a string variable into which a list of topics found for the DDE partner will be placed This may be omitted but if included it must be used in conjunction with lt channel gt The system flag will be set to TRUE and the errno error number variable will be set to 0 if the command is successful or FALSE and an error number other than 0 if the command failed Up to four DDE conversations will be permitted if a channel variable is specified When a DDE connection is successfully made the channel variable will contain the ID of the conversation If the connection was unsuccessful channel will have a value of 0 or where indicates the number of multiple sessions that would h
217. er Settings Timer Warning Bell Discard Partial D File Warning Send Delay Retry Limit GroupID ParamID SubParamID Value PARAMETER GENERAL boolean PARAMETER GENERAL BELI boolean PARAMETER GENERAL 5 boolean PARAMETER GENERAL FILEWarmn boolean PARAMETER GENERAL SENDDelay range 0 63 PARAMETER GENERAL RETRYlimit range 1 63 12 86 Creating A Script File Kermit Parameter Settings GroupID ParamID SubParamID Value Start Of Packet S PARAMETER KERMIT SMARK string Start Of Packet R PARAMETER KERMIT RMARK string Timeout Secs S PARAMETER KERMIT STIMEOUT integer Timeout Secs R PARAMETER KERMIT RTIMEOUT integer Padding Count S PARAMETER KERMIT SPADCOUNT integer Padding Count PARAMETER KERMIT RPADCOUNT integer Padding Char S PARAMETER KERMIT SPADCHAR string Padding Char R PARAMETER KERMIT RPADCHAR string EOL Char Send PARAMETER KERMIT SEOL string EOL Char Receive PARAMETER KERMIT REOL string Quote Char S PARAMETER KERMIT SQUOTE string Quote Char R PARAMETER KERMIT RQUOTE string Packet Size S PARAMETER KERMIT SMAXPKTLEN integer Packet Size R PARAMETER KERMIT RMAXPKTLEN integer Checksum Type PARAMETER KERMIT BLOCKCHECK range 1 3 Prompt For Filename PARAMETER KERMIT REQFILENAME boolean Local File Name PARAMETER KERMIT LOCALFILE string ASCII Parameter Settings GroupID ParamID SubParamID Value CR Translation S PARAMETER ASCI
218. ere is no activity red when data is being sent to the host and bright green when data is being received from the host Connection to the network host node will close if you change the settings in the New Connection dialog box and attempt to connect if you log out of the host or the host closes the connection When the host closes the connection a message box will be displayed giving you the option of reconnecting to the network host node cancelling the message box and returning to TeemTalk or exiting TeemTalk A warning message will be displayed if you attempt to open a new session while a session is already open If you attempt to exit TeemTalk while a network session is still active the following message box will be displayed TTO7W Your network session is still active Exiting fa TeemTalk will close the connection Cancel Any of these message boxes be disabled so that the current connection is automatically closed when the host closes the connection a new session is opened or TeemTalk is exited Refer to the Initialization Commands chapter for details Getting Started Creating A Connection Template You can save the current session configuration as a connection template To make TeemTalk automatically attempt to make a host connection using the same settings the next time it is loaded click the File option in the menu bar to display the File menu then click the Save Session opt
219. ered as shown will insert a space before the specified position UPP Syntax UPP result lt string gt This command will convert all lowercase characters in a string to uppercase and place the resulting string in a variable where result is a predefined string variable see var which will store the converted string string is the string or variable containing the characters to be converted to uppercase VAR Syntax VAR lt name gt lt string gt VAR lt name gt lt integer gt VAR lt name gt lt floating point number gt Specifies one or more variable names for storing one of three types of variable The value of the variable may be defined as part of the command or omitted for entering later in which case the value will be zero or an empty string The name specified for a string variable must be immediately preceded by the dollar character For example to specify an empty string variable with the name Identity you would enter the following var Identity The name specified for an integer variable must be immediately preceded by the percent sign character For example to specify an integer variable with the name number and with a value of 3 you would enter the following var number 3 The name specified for a floating point number e g 0 45 variable must be immediately preceded by the exclamation mark character For example to specify a floating point number variable with the
220. erminal Settings Keyboard Language LF Implies CR CR Implies LF Ignore Deletes Canadian French Application Keypad Danian x Application Cursor Keys Scroll Bar on Maximize Report Maximum Line Length o Bypass Cancel Character g End Of Line Characters M End Of Message Characters Cancel EOM Frequency C Low High Terminal 4207 Answerback String Answerback Concealed This dialog box is displayed by selecting Terminal in the Settings menu Keyboard Language This option enables you to specify the nationality of the keyboard being used It is important that this is correct otherwise the characters displayed may not match the key legends When running TeemTalk for Windows 3 1x the factory default keyboard nationality is determined by the Keyboard Layout setting in the International dialog box within the Microsoft Windows Control Panel You can specify a different nationality while TeemTalk is running and save it so that it is reassserted each time TeemTalk is loaded or reset When you exit TeemTalk the keyboard nationality will revert back to that specified in the International dialog box When running TeemTalk for Windows 95 or NT the factory default keyboard nationality is determined by the system locale setting You can specify a different nationality while TeemTalk is running and save it so that it is reassserted each time TeemTalk is loaded or reset When you exit TeemTalk the
221. es TERMinal IGNoredeletes boolean Application Keypad TERMinal APPLKEYpad boolean Application Cursor Keys TERMinal APPLCURSor boolean Scroll Bar on Maximize TERMinal MAXSCrollbar boolean Report Max Line Length TERMinal REPLength range 0 65535 Bypass Cancel Character TERMinal BYpass string max 2 End Of Line Characters TERMinal EOLChar string max 4 End Of Message Characters TERMinal EOMChar string max 4 End Of Message Frequency TERMinal EOMFReq Low High Terminal TERM inal TYPe 4207 4105 4111 Answerback String TERMinal ANSWerback string max 32 Answerback Concealed TERMinal CONCEAL boolean 12 78 Creating A Script File Dialog Settings GroupID ParamID Value Burst Scroll DIALog BURSTscroll boolean Auto Wrap DIALog WRAPeol boolean Dialog Indices Locked DIALog LOCKINDices boolean Dialog Area Visible DIALog DAVISible boolean Cursor Origin DIALog ORIGin ABSolute RELative Cursor Style DIALog CURSortype UNDerline BLOCK Columns DIALog COLumns 80 132 Resize Font DIALog NOFONTRESize boolean Rows DIALog ROWS range depends on font size amp resolution Dialog Area Lines DIALog DALines range 2 rows Dialog Area Buffer DIALog DABuffer range 2 100 Dialog Area Enabled DIALog DAENable tt05w boolean tt07w boolean ttl Iw range0 1 Gin Settings GroupID ParamID Value Tablet Type GIN TABLet 1201 1812 BITPad CALcomp MOUse Serial Port Device GIN PORT COMI COM2 COM3
222. es will disconnect from the host then close the TTWFTP window 10 6 File Transfer Menu amp Toolbar Options Five menus can be displayed from the menu bar four of which are shown below The fifth menu Help enables you to display the software version number 5 Configure View Copy Connect to Host Transfer Settings v Debug Output Delete Disconnect Ho Save Settings on Exit v File Details Rename Create Directory Remote Change Mode Exit The buttons on the toolbar provide a quick way of performing functions or displaying dialog boxes without having to use the menus o NEM M 5 SK S x 2 S dw amp of ge 9 e The following sections describe each of the options available The File Menu Copy Delete Rename Create Directory Copy This will display a dialog box which enables you to duplicate a file on the local PC 10 7 File Transfer Copy File Lx Current Directory F DEMOS From 320MTRS6 TAZ Cancel 5 1 Delete This will display a message box to confirm that you want to delete the currently selected file s or directory on the local PC or remote host Pressing the Delete key will have the same effect Note that directories have to be empty before they can be deleted Confirm Delete x Delete Files f demos 320mtrs6 taz No Cancel Clicking
223. extension hot instead of wsp For example the default hotspot definitions supplied with TeemTalk 07W32 are stored in the file tt07w hot If you specify a different workspace file name in the Save Session As dialog box and save the current settings TeemTalk will automatically make a copy of the current hotspot file and give it the new workspace name if a hotspot file with the same name does not already exist Note A hotspot file may not necessarily be in use in which case TeemTalk will not attempt to create a new hotspot file with the new workspace file You view the contents of the hotspot file currently in use without leaving TeemTalk by displaying the Mouse Button Actions dialog box selecting one of the hotspot options from a drop down list box if necessary then clicking the Edit button The format of entries in the hotspot definition file is as follows Each hotspot definition is entered on a separate line and definition lines are grouped under headings which specify the terminal emulation mode in which they will take effect The following definition line examples are taken from the tt07w hot file supplied with TeemTalk 07W32 Separators Separators 0 Definitions F1 VK F1 F2 VK F2 Definitions VT52 Definitions V T200 7 Bit F6 VT F6 7 lt F7 The first command group headed Separators specifies the displayed characters which delimit the hotspot keyword Delimiters include SP
224. f MenuCloseltem off MinimizeBox off MaximizeBox off windowFrame off titlebar off menubar off toolbar off scrollbar off title title subTitle subtitle buttonlevels 0 4 statusline off CrosshairSize 4096 defaultFontIndex index UseBoldFont on FlashInBackground on TextRedrawDelay ms planeMasking on hideAlpha on hideGraphics on SegmentMemorySize MaxSegments 16000 Command Line st subtitle bl0 4 V x1 4096 dfindex bf fb rdms pm pmindex h 8 sm256 sn 16000 Command Function LK450 keyboard Mouse cursor style Disable all editing functions Enable all editing functions Enable highlighting only Printing Initialization File LK450keyboard yes mouseCursor 0 0 mouseEdit off disabled mouseEdit on enabled none Command Line kblk450 mc0 10 me2 mel me0 Command Function Default TeemTalk printer Use Windows default printer Send data direct to print port Send data to print manager Send print data to file Disable remote printing sequences Initialization File device printer details Use WindowsPrinter yes UsePrintManager 0 UsePrintManager 1 printtofile filename remotePrinting off Command Line none Wp none none prfilename rp 11 7 Initialization Network Connection Network Host Name Initialization File host name Command Line hostnamelprotocol Default Setting Not applicable You can m
225. file Path for workspace settings file Connection template to use Run script file Return script values in uppercase Hide script parameters ZModem startup Disable bell Display Initialization File none none NVPath directory path WSPath directory path none scriptfile filename ScriptUppercase on scriptparameter off zmodemStartup on bell off Command Line ngroupname pffilename none none se description scfilename Command Function Window minimized on start up Window maximized on start up Initialization File windowSize minimized windowSize maximized 11 6 Initialization Commands Command Function Window fills screen on start up Disable copyright message Disable Control menu amp min max Disable Control menu Disable close window menu item Disable minimize button Disable maximize button Disable window frame Disable title bar Disable menu bar Disable toolbar Disable scroll bar Title to display in title bar Subtitle to display in title bar Soft button levels displayed Disable status bar Crosshair cursor size Font size displayed by default Bold font in full screen workspace Flashing enabled in all sessions Text redraw delay Support multiple surfaces Alpha off during redraw No graphics show thru alpha Segment memory size Maximum number of segments Keyboard amp Mouse Initialization File windowSize fullScreen quiet on SystemMenu none SystemMenu of
226. focused window 11 22 Initialization Commands Text Redraw Delay Initialization File TextRedrawDelay milliseconds Command Line rdmilliseconds Default Setting 1000 These commands enable you to specify the delay period before text is redrawn after terminal inactivity The numeric value specifies the time in milliseconds The minimum delay period is 250 milliseconds Support Multiple Surfaces Initialization File planeMasking on Command Line pmindex index is optional Default Setting Disabled These commands affect the Tek terminal emulation If you are using an application that uses multiple surfaces then you can use these commands to enable TeemTalk to support them Note that your PC must have a display adaptor that supports 256 colour mode and your system must be running in this mode in order for multiple surfaces to be supported The command line option can also be used to specify an alternative colour index for the crosshair cursor by entering the decimal value immediately after pm Alpha Off During Redraw Initialization File hideAlpha on Command Line h Default Setting Alpha is on during redraw These commands enable you to prevent display flicker which is noticeable with some applications when a segment redraw is being performed The commands do not apply to TeemTalk 05W or TeemTalk 05W32 Crosshair Cursor Size Initialization File CrosshairSize size Command Line xsize Default Set
227. g box by using the following command line option d 1 Forexample Ttw32ftp d 1 Time Out You can specify the amount of idle time in seconds allowed before FTP times out unless the host closes the connection first by using the t command line option For example to specify time out after 40 seconds you would enter the following Ttw32ftp t40 10 14 Initialization Commands 11 Initialization Commands This chapter describes all the commands that can be included in the initialization file or on the command line Introduction The initialization file is used to store various settings which specify how TeemTalk is initially run and displayed Once the normal initialization specification has been defined in this file the settings for a particular instance of TeemTalk may be overrid den using command line options The following sections describe how to enter commands in the initialization file and on the command line then describe all the valid initialization commands Note The default settings of functions relating to terminal emulation are specified via pop up menus in the main window These are described in the Setup Menus chapter Initialization File The name and contents of the initialization file will vary depending on which version of Microsoft Windows you are using Windows 3 1x TeemTalk initialization commands are grouped under one of the following headings in the Microsoft Windows WI
228. g on noisy lines or transferring large packets Prompt For Filename Factory default Unselected This option enables you to specify a different file name for each received file When enabled a dialog box will be displayed before each file is sent when performing a Kermit Send File from the host The dialog box displays the name of the file about to be transferred and gives you the opportunity to change it If the filename is acceptable clicking the OK or Cancel button will cause the transfer to continue using the filename displayed If you wish to change the name of the file edit the name in the text box before clicking OK Clicking Cancel will revert back to the original filename Force Print of File Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause data received as part of a Kermit transfer to be directed to the printer through print instead of a file 8 11 File Transfer ASCII Parameters ASCII Parameters LF Line Pacing Line Pacing Translation Translation Character Time Send n Br gt None 71 x Expand Blank Lines Receive v LF None v Save Settings Cancel Clicking the ASCII button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box will cause the ASCII Parameters dialog box to be displayed This enables you to set parameters specific to the ASCII protocol Once the settings have been selected the initialization file can be modified to reflect the changes under the h
229. g spaces contained in a string and store the result in a variable where length is a predefined variable see var which will store the length of the string string is the string of characters and spaces to be counted LET Syntax LET expression This is an assignment statement which enables you to specify a value or change one value to another For example let X Y 12 50 Creating A Script File LOW Syntax LOW result string This command will convert all uppercase characters in a string to lowercase and place the resulting string in a variable where result is a predefined string variable see var which will store the converted string string is the string or variable containing the characters to be converted to lowercase LSTR Syntax LSTR variable lt string gt end This command will copy a number of characters from the start of a string and place them in a variable where variable is a predefined string variable see var which will store the copied characters string is the source string from which characters are to be copied end is the numeric position of the last character to be copied where the first character in the string is 1 If this value is greater than the number of characters in the string then the destination variable will include pad ded spaces so that it matches the number of characters requested MSGBOX Syntax MSGBO
230. gned to operate in 2 modes Mode 1 emulates an AT keyboard and Mode 2 emulates a VT320 keyboard The keyboard is switched between Mode 1 and Mode 2 using Alt F17 Mode 1 is indicated as being active by the SPECIAL LED on the top right hand side of the keyboard TeemTalk requires the keyboard to be in Mode 2 VT320 Mode 1 disables certain function keys Keyboard Nationality When running TeemTalk for Windows 3 1x the factory default keyboard nationality is determined by the Keyboard Layout setting in the International dialog box within the Microsoft Windows Control Panel You can specify a different nationality while TeemTalk is running and save it so that it is reassserted each time TeemTalk is loaded or reset When you exit TeemTalk the keyboard nationality will revert back to that specified in the International dialog box When running TeemTalk for Windows 95 or NT the factory default keyboard nationality is determined by the system locale setting You can specify a different nationality while TeemTalk is running and save it so that it is reassserted each time TeemTalk is loaded or reset When you exit TeemTalk the keyboard nationality will revert back to that specified in the locale To change the current nationality display the Terminal Settings dialog box by selecting Settings in the menu bar then Terminal The Keyboard Language option enables you to specify the nationality of the keyboard being used It is important that th
231. h CR LF NULL A possible way of doing this is as follows Note This example does not contain any allowances for DDE messages that are awaiting ACKnowledgement from the partner or provision of timeouts in the event of a DDE message not being ACKnowledged iData and iValcount should be set to the same value the reason for having these two parameters will become clear later on 13 8 Dynamic Data Exchange SendPoke if hPokeData GlobalAlloc GMEM MOVEABLE GMEM DDESHARE HWND hwnd Our Window handle HWND hWndPartnerDDE handle for partner in DDE char szItem String ID for transfer int iData Value to be transferred char szValue Data to be transferred int iValCount Number of bytes in transfer atomItem HANDLE hPokeData DDEPOKE FAR lpPokeData LPSTR pTemp Allocate size of DDE data header plus the data a string terminated by CR lt LF gt lt NULL gt The NULL is counted by by DDEPOKE Value 1 LONG sizeof DDEPOKE iValCount sizeof int 2 return if lpPokeData DDEPOKE FAR GlobalLock hPokeData return lpPokeData gt fRelease TRUE lpPokeData cfFormat TEXT Temp lpPokeData gt Value int far pTemp iData pTemp sizeof int if iValCount fmemcpy pTemp szValue iValCount each line of TEXT dat
232. he window or icon to which keyboard and mouse commands will be directed by entering its window class name as a string enclosed by the lt and gt characters For example to program the F4 key so that the TeemTalk O7W window is selected when the key is pressed you would enter the following in the relevant text box lt tt07w gt tt07w is the window class name for TeemTalk 07W Initiating A Script File You can program a key to run a script file when pressed by enclosing the name of the file and any arguments within the lt left angle bracket and single quote and gt single quote and right angle bracket characters For example to program a key so that it will run the script file myscript scr and assign the values valuel and value2 to two variables you would enter the following lt myscript scr value1 value2 gt Refer to the chapter entitled Creating A Script File for more information on initiating script files Action Locally Or Transmit To Host A key definition may be actioned locally or transmitted to the host when the key is pressed This is determined by the setting of the Local check box next to the definition When the check box is unchecked the definition will be transmitted to the host 3 14 Keyboard Configuration Default Key Definitions The default definition of a specific key may be reasserted by clicking the Default button in the Define Key Macro dialog box for that key The default definit
233. he British keyboard Comparison can be made as follows To find alphabetic numeric and symbolic key reference numbers for non British keyboard layouts refer to the keyboard layouts in the manual supplied by the manufacturer Compare the key positions with those on the British layout in that manual then find the corresponding reference numbers in the following tables Key Reference Numbers BRITISH KEYBOARD KEY REFERENCE NUMBERS KEY NORM SHIFT CTRL CT SH ALT COMPOSE 166 166 166 166 166 DEL 258 264 270 276 348 DELETE 127 34 35 36 373 DO F10 231 233 235 237 360 END 259 265 271 277 349 ESCAPE 27 37 38 39 370 HELP F11 232 234 236 238 361 HOME 256 262 268 274 346 INSERT 255 261 267 273 345 NEXT 260 266 272 278 350 PAUSE BR 148 155 22 29 365 REMOVE 257 263 269 275 347 13 49 50 51 374 SPACE 32 52 53 54 N A TAB 9 46 47 48 371 Keypad 0 55 69 83 97 331 Keypad 1 56 70 84 98 332 Keypad 2 57 71 85 99 333 Keypad 3 58 72 86 100 334 Keypad 4 59 73 87 101 335 Keypad 5 60 74 88 102 336 Keypad 6 61 75 89 103 337 Keypad 7 62 76 90 104 338 Keypad 8 63 77 91 105 339 Keypad 9 64 78 92 106 340 Keypad 65 79 93 107 341 Keypad 66 80 94 108 342 Keypad 67 81 95 109 343 Keypad ENTER 68 82 96 110 344 PF1 239 243 247 251 327 240 244 248 252 328
234. hen the window is displayed or the Control menu when the window is displayed or iconized Quitting using the File menu Mouse Click on File in the menu bar to display the File menu then click the Exit option Keyboard Press Alt F to display the File menu then press X to exit Getting Started TeemTalk TTO7W Untitled 0 File Edit Settings Help 518 818 S 5 E L 2119 cS amp Level 1 GErase DErase DVisib Cancel Setup ViewUp VieuDn RstUieu DefUieu Patterns Print Local Pause VT188 881 881 verstrike Mode Printer Ready Quitting using the Control menu Mouse If the window is displayed click the box or icon in the top left corner of the window to display the Control menu then click the Close option If the window is iconized click the icon to display the Control menu then click the Close option Keyboard Ifthe window is displayed press Alt Spacebar to display the Control menu Press the down arrow key until the highlight rests over Close then press Return If the window is iconized press Alt Esc until the icon title is highlighted then Alt Spacebar to display the Control menu Press the down arrow key until the highlight rests over Close then press Return Getting Started Host Communications Creating A Communications Session When TeemTalk is loaded for the first time a dialog box will be displayed which enables you to configu
235. her DEC Decrement value of specified variable by 1 INC Increment value of specified variable by 1 LEN Count characters and spaces in variable PUT Send variable or string to host VAR Specify variable type and name WRT Display variable or string at cursor position 12 22 Creating A Script File Commands BREAK Syntax BREAK time Places a break signal on communications line for the specified time in milliseconds If no time is specified then the break will be for 250 milliseconds BRF Syntax BRF label If the system flag is set to FALSE the program branches to the line with the specified label If the label does not exist the program continues with the next line BRT Syntax BRT label If the system flag is set to TRUE the program branches to the line with the specified label If the label does not exist the program continues with the next line CAPTURE Syntax CAPTURE lt filespec gt CAPTURE CANCEL This will cause all data received from the host to be stored in the specified file until a capture cancel command is issued The file can be replayed later using the replay emul or replay host command CLB Syntax CLB This will cause the contents of the TeemTalk display buffer to be cleared CLIPBD APPEND Syntax CLIPBD APPEND lt string gt This command will append the specified string to the clipboard 12 23 Creating A Script File CLIPBD EMPTY
236. hickness ESCIK Select vector mode GS Specify line style a through w ESC E 14 Host Command Summary TeemTalk Additional Commands MOUSE REPORTING IN ALPHANUMERIC APPLICATIONS Arm TeemTalk for mouse operation ESC argg where arg is of the format bit7 3 00110 bit 2 when set enables motion events bit 1 when set enables button release events bit 0 when set enables button press events If all bits are cleared then any outstanding arming request is cancelled The mouse remains armed until cancelled When any of the selected events occur the following report format is sent to the host ESC Event Type Button Status Column Row Where Event Type is the event s that caused the report in the same format as the arming sequence Button Status is of the format 00110LMR where LMR indicates which button caused the event Column and Row are the alphanumeric position of the mouse MOUSE CURSOR Mouse cursor style see table in Initialization Commands ESC z2 p DISPLAY Number of screen lines window resizes accordingly ESC 1 p SCRIPT FILE Initiate script file filename can include options ESC P 2 z filename ESC LOG HOST FILE Log host file f 0 create new file 1 append file ESC P f z n d ESC n filename d host data to write to file REPORTS Report application name amp version in DEC VT modes ESC 0 1234
237. hift Shift right Spacebar Square Bracket L Square Bracket R Tab Virtual Key Name VK_ADD VK_DIVIDE VK_DECIMAL VK_MULTIPLY VK_SUBTRACT VK_MENU VK_OEM_MINUS 8 7 VK NUMLOCK VK OEM 102 VK NEXT VK PRIOR VK PASTE VK PAUSE VK OEM PERIOD VK OEM PLUS VK SNAPSHOT VK PRINTSCREEN RETURN VK OEM SCROLL VK OEM 1 VK SEPARATOR VK SETUP VK SHIFT VK RSHIFT VK SPACE VK OEM 4 VK OEM 6 VK TAB 02 key keyboard may not appear on others B 1 Virtual Key Names 122 Key Keyboard Additional Keys Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Attn VK ATTN F19 F24 VK OEM FI9 F24 Clear OEM CLEAR No Name NONAME Cu Sel VK CUSEL Erase EOF VK EREOF Play VK PLAY Ex Sel VK EXSEL Reset VK OEM RESET F13 F18 VK FI3 VK FI8 Zoom VK ZOOM DEC VT220 Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Back Tab VT CSIZ Insert VT INSERT Break VT BREAK Keypad 0 9 VT_PADO 9 Backspace VT_BACKSPACE Keypad Comma VT_COMMA Compose VT_COMPOSE Keypad Decimal VT_PADDECIMAL Cursor Down VT_DOWN Keypad Minus VT_MINUS Cursor Left VT_LEFT Next Page VT_NEXT Cursor Right VT_RIGHT PF4 VT_PF4 Cursor Up VT_UP Previous Page VT_PREV Datatalk VT_DATATALK Print VT_PRINT Delete VT_DELETE Remove VT_REMOVE Do F16 VT_DO Return VT_RETURN Enter VT_ENTER Scroll Down VT_PANDOWN Escape VT_ESCAPE Scroll Left VT_P
238. his command FILE WRITE Syntax FILE WRITE handle variable length This will write characters assigned to a variable to a file where handle 15 the integer variable specified by the file open command and used to identify the file 12 35 Creating A Script File variable is a previously defined variable see var which contains the characters to be written to the file length is the number of characters to be written if the variable is in string for mat If the variable is in integer format the number of characters that will be written is two and if in floating point number format the number of characters that will be written is four More than one variable may be specified to write successive blocks of characters to the file Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command FSTR Syntax FSTR align new orig length This command enables you to format a string of characters to a required length by adding spaces and aligning the text to the left right or centre where align is a single character that indicates the text alignment C centred L left aligned R rightaligned new is a predefined string variable see var which will contain the formatted string orig is a string or variable containing the text to be formatted length is the length of the string required If this is shorter than the
239. host is enabled When unselected TeemTalk is in Local mode and data will not be sent to or received from the host Data typed on the keyboard will be displayed on the screen or actioned if a control command is typed Local Echo Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether keyboard entered characters are displayed on the screen as well as sent to the host When unselected characters are not displayed when they are transmitted unless the host echoes them back Detect Carrier Factory default Unselected This option is only valid if the script command PSET HOST DCDDETECT YES has been specified refer to the Creating A Script File chapter for details When this option is selected TeemTalk will check to see whether a modem connection is running If the DCDDETECT command is not specified or set to NO the check will always be true Note The script command PGET HOST DCDTEST can be used to test whether DCD was present when the last character was sent 7 28 Setup Menus NCSI Settings NCSI Settings Baud Rate Data Bits 3600 8 Parity Stop Bits None 1 rFlow Control Xon Xoff Show Port Details This TeemTalk for Windows 3 1x dialog box is displayed by clicking the Configure button in the New Connection dialog box when the connection type is set to Extended NCSI Baud Rate Factory default 9600 This specifies the transmit and receive baud rates in the range
240. iable for the file read or rget command Invalid string size for file read or rget command The end of the file has been reached file read or rget command 9 Invalid string size for file write command 10 Write error file write or wput command 11 Invalid position type for file seek command 12 Seek error file seek command 13 Could not supply statistics for file file stat command FTP 0 The command was successful 1 Failed to connect ftp connect command 2 Failed to disconnect ftp connect or disconnect command 3 Failed to determine file system UNIX VAX ftp connect command Note that UNIX is the default 4 Notconnected 5 Invalid remote file ftp get put or rm command 6 Invalid local file ftp get put or rm command 7 Invalid remote directory ftp cd command 8 Invalid local directory ftp cd command 9 dirnext requires dirfirst beforehand 10 Invalid local drive name 11 Unknown mode specified 12 Memory allocation failed 12 68 Creating A Script File FTU 2 lt lt BRR SU N E Transaction done Unknown packet Cancelled Too many retries File open error File read error File write error File close error Sending Send initialize error Send filename error Send data error Send end of file error Send end of transmission error Cann
241. iable upon which they were operating For example var Int 9 Int 1 wrt Int Int n exit would print the line Int 10 String Operators There are a limited number of operators that will successfully manipulate strings These are as follows l lt lt gt gt Copying Strings These operators will copy one string either onto the end of another or copy one string to another For example var String Hello var Result Result String Everybody would set Result to contain the string Hello Everybody Or alternatively var String Hello String Everybody would change String to contain the string Hello Everybody String Comparison lt lt gt gt These operators enable strings to be compared The operator will check that two strings are the same whereas the operator will check that they are not the same 12 16 Creating A Script File For example var String while String Exit inp Give me a string String exit would keep requesting for input until the string equals Exit The and operators compare the decimal values of each character in the string in turn to see if the values are less than that of the equivalent characters in the string to which it is compared In a similar way the gt and gt check whether the decimal values are greater Precedence amp Order Of Evaluation Operator Asso
242. ialization Commands TeemTalk for Windows 95 amp NT CTERM TCPIP LAT TEEMTALKOSI MULTILAN WINSOCK2 NETBIOS Refer to the Network Connection chapter in the Networking Guide for a description of these protocols Note that if you only specify the host name on the command line then TeemTalk will assume you are using TCP IP If you are using the NetBIOS protocol refer to the NetBIOS Version section in the Network Connection chapter of the Networking Guide for an additional initialization file command that has to be included Load Winsock On Startup Initialization File LoadWinsockOnStartup on Command Line lw Default Setting Off These commands will initialize the Winsock stack immediately when TeemTalk is started enabling dialup over PPP or SLIP to gain a connection to a service provider NetBIOS Version Initialization File UngBassExtendedNetBIOS No Yes Command Line Not applicable Default Setting This command is used to specify the version of NetBIOS being used when you select NetBIOS for network communications If you are using the Ungermann Bass Net One NetBIOS set this command to Yes otherwise set it to No 11 9 Initialization Identifier WIN INI File netid identifier CommandLine iidentifier Default Setting 5 TeemTalk for Windows 3 1x communicates with its TSR programs and the network kernel software via interrupt 63 hex A unique TSR identifier is us
243. iately followed by a colon but note that the label must not begin with a number otherwise it will be treated as a line number by the program For example start pset subroutinel are valid labels whereas 2start start start are not valid Note that the label may include the same characters as a script command such as pset above but will not be treated as a command as long as it is immediately followed by a colon References to labels e g by gosub or goto must include the colon Strings amp Variables Strings should normally be enclosed by double quote characters unless specified otherwise You can include double quote characters within a string by entering each character twice with no space in between The maximum size of a string or variable is 256 characters Underline Characters In Strings To include an underline character in a string so that it is treated as such and not as a control character introducer enter the character twice with no space in between 12 12 Creating A Script File Decimal Value Of ASCII Characters In Strings You can enter the decimal value of ASCII characters within character strings A decimal value is entered as a three digit number preceded by an underline character Decimal values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example _027 means ESC the Escape character _010 means LF the Line Feed character 095 means the underline character So User
244. ile already exists Replace The file must already exist on the remote system and it will be replaced by the file to be transferred Make or replace The file will be created on the remote system if it does not already exist but will replace an existing file of the same name This is the mode of access used if you select the direc tion of transfer To Host in the main FTF dialog box Append The file must exist on the remote system and the data transferred will be appended to it Make or append The file will be created on the remote system if it does not already exist but if it does the transferred data will be ap pended to it ICL FTF File Transfer The file which must be SCL or VME will be submitted for execution See also Special options Print The file which must be text will be printed by the remote system after the transfer has completed See also Special Options This mode is used if you select direction To Host in the main FTF dialog box and Print in this dialog box Read and remove The file must exist on the remote system After being transferred to the local system it will be deleted on the remote system Read The file must exist on the remote system and will be transferred to the local system This mode is used if you select direction From Host in the main FTF dialog box Destructive read file must exist on the remote system and will be erased as it is transferred to the local system This
245. ill continue to transfer data until you cancel it Note Once the file transfer is initiated you can minimize the window to run it in the background File Transfer Cancelling A File Transfer When a file transfer is in progress the File Transfer Data window will be displayed This will provide information on the progress of the file transfer similar to that shown below File Transfer Data Iof xl Transfer by XMODEM Sending file TEST DOC Saved as test doc Bytes moved 3072 Total packets 24 Total retries 0 Percentage 30 Last message Sending File Clicking the Cancel button will display another dialog box with four cancel options Kermit Cancel x C Cancel Batch C Cancel Nicely YES NO Cancel Abruptly Selecting Cancel File then clicking the YES button will cause transfer of the current file to be cancelled by sending a Cancel File message Selecting Cancel Batch then clicking YES will cause transfer of the current file and all remaining files to be cancelled by sending a Cancel Batch message Selecting Cancel Nicely then clicking YES will stop the transfer by sending an error packet with a Transfer Cancelled message Selecting Cancel Abrubtly then clicking YES will stop the transfer immediately without any messages being sent Clicking the NO button will close the Cancel dialog box File Transfer Setting Protocol Parameters General Parameters General Par
246. in the Control panel Use Windows Default Printer Initialization File UseWindowsPrinter yes Command Line wp Default Setting TeemTalk default printer used These commands will cause TeemTalk to use the Windows default printer by default instead of its own default printer Use Print Manager Initialization File UsePrintManager 0 1 Command Line Not applicable Default Setting 0 This command enables you to specify that data is sent to the print manager instead of directly to the port when in Auto Print or Printer Controller mode To specify that data is to be sent to the print manager you would enter the following UsePrintManager 1 Data will be spooled to the printer but will not be printed until either Auto Print mode is disabled or the Eject Page option in the File menu is selected To specify that data is to be sent directly to the port instead of the print manager you would enter the following UsePrintManager 0 11 27 Initialization Send Print Data File Initialization File printtofile filename Command Line prfilename Default Setting Not applicable These commands enable you to direct print data to a specified file instead of the printer Disable Remote Printing Sequences Initialization File remotePrinting off Command Line rp Default Setting Remote printing sequences enabled These commands will disable all remote printing sequences 11 28 Creati
247. in this chapter for a complete list of valid group and parameter IDs If the setting of a parameter under investigation is a control character the decimal value of the character will be stored in the variable For example if the setting is DEL i e decimal 127 then 127 will be returned Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command FTU INITIATE Syntax FTU INITIATE Initiates a link to the file transfer utility If it cannot get a link then it will try to launch the utility and re initiate the link Once a link is established TeemTalk will be in file transfer mode and normal data transmission with the host will not be possible until the ftu cancel command is sent Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command FTU SET Syntax FTU SET lt groupID gt lt gt lt subparamID gt lt value gt This command enables you to set file transfer setup parameters and specify operations to perform on a remote host where lt groupID gt identifies a group of parameters lt paramID gt identifies a particular parameter or in the case of Parameter set tings a sub group of parameters lt subparamID gt identifies a particular parameter when the lt groupID gt is specified as Parameter otherwise this is omitted lt value gt is the value to be set if required 12 42 Creating
248. ing the Paste command The next block of data that is copied will delete the previous block on the clipboard When DDE Row Copy or DDE Column Copy is selected various commands representing the selected screen area will be copied to the clipboard These commands can be pasted to an appropriate area of the screen by another Windows application that can interpret the commands for example Microsoft Excel DDE messages will be exchanged between TeemTalk and the application in which the commands were pasted and if acknowledged positively by both parties an automatic update will be performed from TeemTalk to the application if data in the selected area changes To use the Copy option hold down the left mouse button and move the pointer across to the right to display additional options as shown below v Clipboard Text Clipboard Graphics DDE Row Copy DDE Column Copy Copy ShiteDe Clear Buffer The first option enables you to perform a standard copy Pressing the keys Shift Delete together will perform the same function The last three options are only available when Clipboard Graphics is selected They enable you to copy the graphics image with black and white reversed with colour converted to monochrome or both Note A standard copy can also be performed by clicking the middle mouse button on a 3 button mouse or the right button on a 2 button mouse Paste This only functions when the Clipboard Text or Clipboard Graphics optio
249. ing two or more other keys together type the character followed by the virtual key names linked together with plus sign characters and ending with the gt character For example to program the F1 key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together enter the following characters in the relevant text box lt ALT F4 gt To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of keys one after the other enter each virtual key name in the order required enclosing each virtual key name with the lt and gt characters Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces 3 13 Keyboard Configuration For example to program the A key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys F2 then then F4 enter the following characters in the relevant text box lt 2 gt lt gt lt 4 gt Entering Command Lines You can enter a command line in a key definition by enclosing it within the and characters This enables you to launch an application by just pressing a key For example to program the F1 key so that another instance of TeemTalk 07W is run when the key is pressed you would enter the following in the relevant text box C TEEMTALK TT07W EXE Changing The Window Focus You can program a key to change the currently selected window or icon that is t
250. ings File text box specify the name of the terminal emulation settings file and the directory path if different from the default which is to store settings only affecting the terminal emu lation The default filename is tt w nv where is 05 07 or 11 depending on your version of TeemTalk A 1 Troubleshooting Save Session As Save As File Name Description Untitled Cancel Saved Items Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Attributes Window Metrics Text Rows Buffer Rows Connection Terminal Settings Settings File korwe 4 In the Save As File Name text box specify the name of the workspace settings file and the directory path if different from the default which is to store the user preference settings selected by the Saved Items options The default filename is tt w wsp where is 05 07 or 11 depending on your version of TeemTalk Note Splitting the saved settings into two files enables users to share a common terminal emulation settings file while allowing each user to have their own workspace settings file 5 In the Description text box enter a unique description up to 132 characters long which will be used to identify the connection template for future selection This description will also appear in the Open Session dialog box 6 Click the OK button to save the connection template If you specified the names of settings files that already exist a message box will a
251. ion TeemTalk enables you to create multiple connection templates one of which can be used either when TeemTalk is loaded or while it is running The procedure is as follows 1 Inthe File menu select the Save Session As option to display a dialog box Save lt File Name Description Untitled Cancel Saved Items Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Attributes Window Metrics Text Rows Buffer Rows Connection Terminal Settings Settings File tO Tw 2 Inthe Saved Items box indicate which user preference settings are to be saved by checking the boxes next to the relevant options 3 IntheSettings File text box specify the name of the terminal emulation settings file and the directory path if different from the default which is to store settings only affecting the terminal emulation The default filename is tt w nv where is 05 07 or 11 depending on your version of TeemTalk 4 Inthe Save As File Name text box specify the name of the workspace settings file and the directory path if different from the default which is to store the user preference settings selected by the Saved Items options The default filename is tt w wsp where is 05 07 or 11 depending on your version of TeemTalk Note Splitting the saved settings into two files enables users to share a common terminal emulation settings file while allowing each user to have their own workspace settings file
252. ion of the entire keyboard may be reasserted by clicking the Default button in the Keyboard Macros dialog box Euro Sign TeemTalk enables you to generate the euro sign from the keyboard by pressing the keys Alt 4 by default TeemTalk also provides a cross mapping mechanism to allow any unused character symbols or string to be cross mapped to display the euro This means for instance that a host application needing to display the euro could be adjusted to send an unused character or character string which TeemTalk would convert to the euro symbol Keyboard mapping is also configurable to allow the input to the application to be similarly cross mapped The cross mapping configuration is specified in the Euro Currency Symbol dialog box which is displayed by clicking the Euro Sign button in the Define Key Macro dialog box European Currency Symbol Cancel Sends Received As 8 Printed TeemTalk also provides the ability to print the euro symbol on printers that are euro compliant or to send a set of sequences that approximate to that symbol on non euro compliant printers Similarly data can be copied to or pasted from other Microsoft Windows desktop applications that are also euro compliant 3 15 Keyboard Configuration Compose Character Sequences Compose character sequences can be used to generate codes for characters not shown on your keyboard when you are in VT220 mode The characters that can be
253. ipboard is a temporary repository of information that requires direct involvement of the user to initiate and complete transfer of text or graphics data Such a means of transferring information is completely manual in its operation The user issues a command in an application to copy or cut selected data to the clipboard then in another application the user issues a command to paste the data from the clipboard into that application s workspace Dynamic Data Exchange or DDE is an altogether more sophisticated means of sharing data between applications and as suggested by its name the ability to make the fly links between applications becomes a reality DDE is most appropriate for data exchanges that do not require ongoing user interaction Normally an application provides a method for the user to establish the link between applications exchanging data But once that link is established the data exchanges between applications with no further user involvement DDE can be used to implement a broad range of application features including Linking to real time data such as stock market updates scientific instruments or process control 13 1 Dynamic Data Exchange Creating compound documents such as a word processing document that includes a chart produced by a graphics program Using DDE the chart will change when the source data is changed while the rest of the document remains the same Performing data querie
254. is is correct otherwise the characters displayed may not match the key legends Select the nationality required in this list box then click the OK button to action the change and close the dialog box If you want to save the setting display the File menu and select Save Session Cursor Keys The cursor arrow keys on some keyboards will only function when the Alt key is held down This applies to IBM PC or any keyboards which do not have a separate cluster of four cursor keys Keyboard Configuration To enable the cursor keys permanently so that the Alt key does not have to be held down when you want to use them press the keys Alt Num Lock together so that the Num Lock indicator is not lit To make the cursor keys generate their numeric values again press Alt Num Lock The Num Lock indicator should be lit Remapping The Keyboard The Keyboard Macros dialog box enables you to redefine the function of most of the keys on your keyboard and shows the mapping of the keyboard for the current terminal emulation mode This dialog box is displayed by selecting Keyboard Macros in the Settings menu Keyboard Macros 102 Key Enhanced AT Layout British eso rs re F7 a l jelels s elz el ele mol Defaut eleva ateei ai sled a e ea 4 mI Ow Esperto rcd s Keyboard Action Show Map Click the PC
255. is slower then data will be stored on the network This may cause a problem if an error occurs because the message will take longer to get through to the sender due to the amount of data still waiting on the network This option enables you to overcome the problem by limiting the amount of data that is stored on the network before waiting for an acknowledgement from the receiver The window size relates to the network area taken up by the transfer data A setting of 0 zero specifies that the window size is unlimited Any other numeric value entered here will be rounded to 256 bytes or the nearest multiple of 64 if higher Escape Control Codes Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether control codes are sent on their own default or preceded by the escape code CTRL X The escape code prevents problems caused by the removal of control codes during transmission When this option is selected control codes are sent as readable characters preceded by CTRL X 8 16 File Transfer Kermit Remote Operations Kermit Remote Operations Get Command Change Dir Directory Erase Help Space Type Who Finish Logout Bye Cancel When Kermit is selected as the transfer protocol the Remote button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box provides access to commands that enable you to perform various operations on the host Kermit has to be operating in server
256. ish Norwegian Dutch Finnish French Belgian German Italian Portuguese Spanish EI MI GE E PO GE Swedish Swiss French Swiss German c This table shows the characters that replace certain ASCII characters in VT220 Alpha overall mode when the Multinational option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is not selected The national character set consists of the ASCII set with the changed characters listed on the line for the selected keyboard nationality Character Sets NATIONAL REPLACEMENT CHARACTERS Tek Alpha Mode BINARY BIT a 0O00 00 OCTAL DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL British Danish Norwegian French German Swedish This table shows the characters that replace certain ASCII characters in Tek overall mode for the keyboard nationality chosen in the Terminal Settings dialog box The national character set consists of the ASCII set with the changed characters listed on the line for the selected keyboard nationality Character Sets LINE DRAWING CHARACTER SET Tek amp VT220 Alpha Modes IO mmo ou 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 0 8 8 1 gt lt lt
257. it Menu egi e RR C gone Pe s 7 21 Settings Eae qe etri Dent 7 24 Emulation Settings teen heoge leti cecsdacscsuetsseonasesces 7 25 Serial Settings 7 27 NGSI Settings tet ie Et te 7 29 Terminal Settings 1 igit eei tp rege eee eti 7 31 Dialog Settings emt etg 7 35 Gin Settings iac te pet t ht RET ERES FUE Ue 7 38 Attribute Setan a ERI Dep E eei eta 7 40 Keyboard Macross ire Ree te Ce EON Der 7 44 Euro Sign deii ee eite elegir 7 49 Soft Buttons et rt i t adel HEURE RC 7 50 Mouse Button Actions nee ertet treten 7 54 Button Tools tet tet aei 7 56 Help Menu ine tec eite ie rre ren 7 58 Contents 3 Contents File ITalsfer ee ECKE IntFOQUCIQfi shi ree eet te tT denne ex ee epe eee 6 1 Protocols Supported esses eene nennen 6 1 Sehdihg Files s NIRE RPG EN S NEN ERES 6 3 RECEIVING Files ttiv ect 6 5 Cancelling A File Transfer 8 7 Setting Protocol Parameters 8 8 General Parameters sei e d D I RO HIR PEE 8 8 Kermit Parameters ren 8 10 ASCH Parameters gae Oe RE ERE ES 8 12 ZMODEM Parameters 3 eret bt oU RP E 8 14 Kermit Remote Operations eese entrent 6 17 Local Operation nose eot ee te ret E RENE REIHE HERR 6
258. it in the previously defined variable called speed you would enter the following pget speed host baud where host is the group ID and baud is the parameter ID Refer to the section entitled PGET amp PSET Parameters amp Values at the end of this chapter for a complete list of group ID s parameter ID s and values that will be returned Note that the values will be returned in their full non abbreviated versions with the abbreviation characters in uppercase and the remainder in lowercase If you require the value to be returned entirely in uppercase use the su command line option or ScriptUppercase on initialization file command PSET Syntax PSET lt groupID gt lt gt value This command enables you to set most terminal emulation setup parameters and the current values of some attributes where lt groupID gt identifies a group of parameters e g host settings lt gt identifies the particular parameter e g baud rate value is the value to be set e g 9600 For example to specify that the baud rate is to be set to 4800 you would enter the following pset host baud 9600 where host is the group ID baud is the parameter ID and 9600 is the value 12 55 Creating A Script File More than one setting within the same group of parameters can be specified on the same line For example to set the baud rate to 9600 and the serial port device to dev ttya you would enter the followi
259. ith the currently selected screen element The setting of the Use Colours option determines whether or not a specific colour is assigned to the text attribute When the Use Colours option is selected the colour of the screen element can be changed by clicking on the required colour block in the palette of Foreground and or Background colours The two palettes enable you to specify a different colour for text foreground and text cell background The set of 16 colours displayed can be customized using the Colour Palette dialog box which is described later The following sections describe items in the Attributes dialog box in more detail 7 40 Setup Menus Screen Element This list box enables you to select the screen element for definition Normal UL BD FL BD UL Screen FL BD IV UL BD Bold BD FL UL IV FL BD Underline UL IV FL IV FL UL Flashing FL IV BD IV FL BD UL Inverse IV IV UL Attribute The list of attribute options allow you to enable or disable the actual display of attributes associated with the selected screen element Text with the bold attribute may be displayed as such by checking the Font box when the Screen Element is set to one of the bold options Note that text display will be slower when Font is selected to display characters with the bold attribute as bold instead of a substitute colour Use Colours When selected the currently selected screen element will be displayed in the colours highlighte
260. ition amp place in variable Read characters from cursor position amp place in variable Read characters from screen position amp place in variable Display specified text as a subtitle in the title bar Enable disable display of error message boxes Wait for specified string to appear on the display Display specified text as a title in the title bar Add a button tool to end of current toolbar set Delete a button tool or space from toolbar Fix toolbar under menu bar TOOLBAR FLOAT Toolbar displayed as floating palette TOOLBAR HIDE Remove toolbar from display TOOLBAR INS WRT Insert button tool or space at specified position Display variable or string at cursor position ERROR TRAPPING ERRORCODE ERRORLINE ONERROR Return program error code ID or message Return number of line containing program error Perform specified action when program error encountered FILE OPERATIONS DIRFIRST Get first entry in working directory DIRNEXT Get next entry in working directory FILE CLOSE Close specified file FILE COPY Copy specified file FILE DELETE Delete specified file FILE OPEN Open specified file FILE READ Read file characters amp assign to variable FILE RENAME Rename the specified file FILE RGET Get single file character amp assign to variable FILE SEEK Specify location in file for read write operation FILE STAT Get statistics for specified file FILE WPUT Write single character from variable
261. key you wish to define or Click a VT320 key to show its mapping VT320 Layout North American l a 1 0 3E mE 7 8 1 BENTE E Two keyboard layouts are displayed The upper layout corresponds to the keyboard you are using which will be one of the following 101 key 102 key 84 key Digital s LK250 or LK450 or KEA Systems PowerStation depending on the type specified within Microsoft Windows Setup for your PC Note When an LK250 LK450 or PowerStation keyboard driver is loaded the SYSTEM INI file is scanned by TeemTalk to see if the string LK250 LK450 or PowerStation is present and maps the keyboard accordingly The lower layout represents the keyboard associated with the terminal currently being emulated as specified in the Emulation Settings dialog box 3 10 Keyboard Configuration You can show how TeemTalk has mapped your keyboard within the current terminal emulation mode by setting the Keyboard Action option between the two layouts to Show Map then moving the pointer over a key in the lower layout and holding down the left mouse button The key or combination of keys which emulate the function of the key you are currently pressing will be displayed in the upper layout as if pressed in Note Control key functions are not shown TeemTalk provides two quick and easy ways of changing the default keyboard map
262. keyboard nationality will revert back to that specified in the locale LF Implies CR Factory default Unselected When selected this will cause TeemTalk to interpret each line feed character it receives as a line feed and carriage return pair 7 31 Setup Menus CR Implies LF Factory default Unselected When selected this will cause TeemTalk to interpret each carriage return character it receives as a carriage return and line feed pair Ignore Deletes Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether TeemTalk ignores or actions delete characters received from the host Application Keypad Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing keys in the keypad on the right side of the keyboard When unselected the keypad is in numeric mode and keys will generate the characters shown on the key caps When selected the keypad is in application mode and keys will generate control functions when pressed Note some keyboards the keypad acts as both a numeric keypad and a cursor key block depending on the setting of some modifier such as the Num Lock key This option only affects the characters generated when the keypad is acting as a numeric keypad Application Cursor Keys Factory default Unselected When this option is selected the cursor keys will generate application program codes when pressed Unselected the keys will generate normal cursor moveme
263. king ESCII GININKING Enable rubberbanding ESCIR GINRUBBERBAND Enable tablet amp keys ESC KJ MOUSEMAP Select format of GIN reports GINREPORT Select GIN cursor speed ESCIJ GSPEED Select GIN ink rubberband start points GINSTARTPOINT Select GIN pick aperture size ESCIA GINPICKAPERTURE E 8 Host Command Summary Select segment for GIN cursor ESCIC GINCURSOR Select tablet area ESCIN TBSIZE Set GIN stroke report frequency ESCIF GINFILTERING Specify GIN cursor movement ESCIU GINRATES Specify GIN key characters ESCIZ GINTABCHARS Specify GIN stroke report key characters ESCIH GINSHEADERCHARS Specify tablet type ESCIB GRAPHICS ALPHA TEXT HOST PRIMARY SETUP Select alpha text font GO ESC SI Select alpha text font G1 ESC SO Select underline mode DAMODE Specify 4014 alpha text size 128 cpl ESC Specify 4014 alpha text size 128 cpl ESC Specify 4014 alpha text size 80 cpl ESC 8 Specify 4014 alpha text size 80 cpl ESC 9 GRAPHICS PRIMITIVES HOST PRIMARY SETUP Change graphics position ESC LF MOVE Define line style ESC M X LSDEFINE Draw curve ESC UC CURVE Draw marker ESCLH MARKER Draw vector ESCLG DRAW End panel definition ESCLE ENDPANEL Fill rectangle ESCUR RECTANGLE Finish fill pattern definition ESCME ENDFILLP Select marker style ESCMM MARKTYPE Select panel fill pattern ESCMP FILLPATTERN Se
264. le Transfer 9 1 FTP File Transfer 10 1 Progess bar display 10 14 Synchronous WINSOCK calls 10 13 G GErase Button 2 17 Getting Started Hostcommunications 2 3 Keyboard operation 3 1 Loading TeemTalk 2 1 Mouse functions 4 1 Quitting TeemTalk 2 1 Setup configuration 2 11 Terminal emulation selection 2 9 Toolbar functions 5 1 Using window elements 2 12 Gin Cursor 2 23 Gin Settings 7 38 Map mouse to joystick 7 39 Serial port device 7 38 Tabletcharacters 7 39 Tablettype 7 38 Graphics Area Description 2 21 Erasing contents of 2 17 H Help Menu 7 58 Host Command Summary ANSI VT100 mode E 3 TeemTalk additional commands E 15 Index 3 Index Tek mode 7 VT220 mode 6 VT52 mode E 1 W3220 mode E 13 Host Communications Bypasscancelcharacter 7 33 End of message characters 7 34 End of message frequency 7 34 Gettingstarted 2 3 NCSI settings menu 7 29 Report max line length 7 33 RS232 overrun errors A 3 Serial settings menu 7 27 Host Connection LED indicators 2 19 Hotspots Defining 6 2 Displayingall 6 1 Using 6 1 IBM 3270 Mode Telnet options 7 19 ICL FTF File Transfer 9 1 Iconizing TeemTalk 2 13 Initialization Commands Introduction 11 1 Initialization File Private profile file Windows 3 1 11 2 Windows 95 amp NT 11 3 WIN INI Windows 3 1x 11 1 Windows 95 amp NT 11 3 Initialization File Commands Alpha off during redraw 11 23 Bold font in full screen workspace 11 22 Crosshair
265. lect panel filling features ESCMS PFILLMODE Select pixel rectangle features ESCRT PXFACTORS Select rectangle drawing boundary ESCUB BOUNDMODE Specify 4014 line style to ESC Specify style of line panel boundary ESCM V LINESTYLE Start fill pattern definition ESC MD BEGINFILLP Start panel definition ESC LP BEGINPANEL GRAPHICS SURFACES HOST PRIMARY SETUP Erase graphics area ESC FF Select current view surf erase border index ESCRA VATTRIBUTES Select surface visibility ESC RI SVISIBILITY Specify number of surfaces amp bit planes ESC RD SDEFINITIONS Specify surface priority level ESC RN SPRIORITIES GRAPHICS TEXT HOST PRIMARY SETUP Begin graphics text character definition ESCS T GTBEGIN Define graphics text font grid dimensions ESC S G GTGRID Delete user defined character from font ESC S Z GTDELETE Display graphics text ESCLT GTEXT End graphics text character definition ESCSU GTEND Graphics area replace overstrike ESCMG GAMODE E 9 Host Command Summary Select font for stroke precision ESCMF GTFONT Select graphics text control precision ESCMQ GTPRECISION Select graphics text slant angle ESCMA GTSLANT Select size of graphics text ESCMC GTSIZE Specify graphics text string rotation angle ESCMR GTROTATION Specify graphics text writing direction ESCMN GTPATH HOST COMMUNICATIONS HOST PRIMARY SETUP Direct host data to specified port ESCJC COPY HO
266. lists the possible error numbers for this command SUBTITLE Syntax SUBTITLE lt string gt This enables you to change the subtitle portion of the title bar in the main window The subtitle will be separated from the main title by a hyphen The specified subtitle can be a string delimited by double quotes or a variable If no string is specified the current contents of the title bar will remain unchanged No error numbers will be generated 12 59 Creating Script File SWITCH Syntax Seebelow This is used to compare the value of a variable with a list of possible values and perform the commands specified for the matching case The format is as follows SWITCH variable CASE valuel commands CASE lt value2 gt lt value3 gt lt commands gt DEFAULT lt commands gt where lt variable gt can be a string integer or floating point variable containing the value to be matched and mark the beginning and the end of the switch sequence These must not be omitted CASE lt value gt specifies a possible value for the variable which can be a literal string a variable or a number Note that you can specify more than one value on the same line by separating each value by a comma and or space If the value of the variable matches the case value then the lt commands gt on the following line s will be performed commands specifies what the program must do if the case v
267. lk 05W amp 05W32 Setup command Dialog Settings dialog box GIN Settings dialog box Patterns command View Up command except TeemTalk 05W amp 05W32 View Down command except TeemTalk 05W amp 05W32 Rst View command except TeemTalk 05W amp 05W32 Def View command except TeemTalk 05W amp 05W32 Overview command except TeemTalk 05W amp 05W32 Reset command Clear command Help Index dialog box Capture File dialog box Replay File dialog box Factory Default command Save Session command Startup Options dialog box Cancel Capture command Cancel Replay command file transfer dialog box Print Buffer command Auto Print command Cancel Print command Eject Page command Cancel Script command Exit command Clipboard Text command Clipboard Graphics command Copy Rows command Copy Columns command Select command Emulation Settings dialog box Host Settings dialog box Terminal Settings dialog box How To Use Help dialog box 12 62 Creating A Script File 55 About TeemTalk message box 56 Copy Reverse command 57 Mono command 58 Mono Reverse command 59 Close Session command 60 Reverse command TOOLBAR DEL Syntax TOOLBAR DEL position This will delete the tool button or space at the specified position in the toolbar where position is integer that specifies the position in the toolbar where the button or space for deletion is located Th
268. ll be processed as normal When set to hold characters will be held but not actioned until a krev process command is received except for the kget and kbd commands which will be processed The ignore process and hold settings can be abbreviated to L P and H respectively 12 49 Creating A Script File KSTR Syntax KSTR string This command will treat the characters contained in the string or string variable as macros to be performed Refer to the Macros Settings dialog box description in the Setup Menus chapter for the macro definition format More than one macro definition can be specified in the same string or variable The string example below will perform the function of the keys Alt F4 pressed together followed by the A key kstr lt ALT F4 gt lt A gt LAUNCH Syntax LAUNCH application This command enables you launch an application where application is either the name of the application and directory path if required enclosed by double quotes or the name of a string variable containing the application name You can cause the application to run in a minimized state when launched by including the string after application The following example will launch the application Excel so that it runs in a minimized state mW Chua launch h VexcelVexcel exe min LEN Syntax LEN length lt string gt This command will count the number of characters includin
269. lp key when pressed together First click the key in the upper layout representing your keyboard to which you want to assign a function The Define Key Macro dialog box will be displayed as shown below This example shows how the F1 key is mapped by default Define Key Macro Undefined Normal UP Shit Cancel Control Control Shift Default Alt leVT_CSIZ gt Euro Sign Predefined Macros Non Volatile Apply vk coNTROL 7 45 Setup Menus The Predefined Macros option at the bottom of this dialog box enables you to select from a list of standard functions associated with the current terminal emulation Clicking the arrow button will display a list box in which the names of valid key functions called virtual key names are shown Note The Virtual Key Names appendix lists all the functions and associated virtual key names for each terminal emulation Before making a selection from this list box click the pointer in the text box next to the key combination that will be required to perform the function that is Normal key pressed on its own Shift key shifted etc For example to assign the Help key function to the key combination Alt F1 click the pointer in the text box next to Alt display the Predefined Macros list box and scroll through the selection until VT HELP is displayed click the pointer on it then click the Apply button The current function of the Alt F1 key
270. lt Setting BUTTons DEFault SB L immediate No Of Levels Displayed SHOWlevel 1104 Top Level BUTTons LEVel 1104 Level Title BUTTons L TITle string max 7 Note The Program Button qualifier COMmand is optional Mouse Button Actions The asterisk in the ParamID settings below must be substituted with the button or button and key combination identifiers as follows Left Button Right Button Normal L R Shift 15 RS Control LC RC Control Shift LCS RCS Alt LA RA Double Click LDC RDC GroupID ParamID Value User Defined String MOUSE STRing string Standard Function MOUSE ACTion see below The Standard Function Values are as follows UNAssigned EDITPaste SENDCR WORDselect SELecttext SHOWhotspots SENDKEYword COPYselect EXTendsel ACTionhot MIDdlebutt EDITCopy RECTselect 12 83 Creating A Script File Current Operating System Settings GroupID ParamID Value Current Disk Drive CURRent DRIVE string A Current Directory CURRent DIRectory PWD CWD string 255 chrs Current Environment CURRent ENVironment string string max 255 chars Get Current Time CURRent TIMe string HHMM Get Current Day CURRent DAY string 3 chars Get Current Date CURRent FULLDATE string YYYYMMDD Get Milliseconds Elapsed Since Windows Started CURRent TICKcount integer See note Note When using the Get Milliseconds command the value will return to 0 zero after a
271. ltinational degree sign o space National plus or minus sign superscript 2 2 superscript 3 3 or U micro sign in order paragraph sign proe centred period superscript 1 1 masculine ordinal indicator 0 0 double closed angle brackets ST fraction 14 in order fraction 12 one half in order fraction three 34 quarters Dutch in order fl Florin Dutch in order ij ij sign Dutch in order inverted A grave A A acute A A circumflex A A tilde A 3 17 Keyboard Configuration COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES continued A umlaut A A ring A or A degree sign A E diphthong A E in order C cedilla or JU in order E grave E E acute E E circumflex E E umlaut o E EA grave i acute I Hm circumflex A ES umlaut I or I N tilde N O grave O acute O circumflex O O tilde O umlaut E diphthong OE DEC Multinat in order O slash O U grave U U acute U E E01 ES Em U circumflex U U umlaut U o U DEC Multinat TEX Geman small ss a grave a a acute a
272. m lines provide an example of their use var integer1 string1 onerror gosub errorhandler put your program here Krror Handler errorhandler errorline string errorcode integer1 wrt Error integer1 return Stringl r n ONERROR Syntax ONERROR action This command will perform the specified action when it encounters an error while the script program is running where action can be one of the following REPORT will display a message box indicating the type of error and the program line that caused it IGNORE will ignore any errors encountered in the program GOTO label will cause the program to go to the line with the specified label when an error is encountered GOSUB label will cause the program to go to the line with the specified label when an error is encountered and then return to the line fol lowing the error ERRORLINE Syntax ERRORLINE variable This command will return the line number of the last error ERRORCODE Syntax ERRORCODE variable This command specifies the type of error code that will be returned when an error is encountered Specifying an integer variable will return an error ID number while a string variable will return an error message The following list shows the ID codes and error messages that can be displayed and their meanings 12 71 Creating A Script File ID Message Displayed Meaning 1 Syntax error
273. m the keyboard first find the displayable character equivalent by adding 64 to the decimal value of the control character in the relevant character set table For example the control character CR carriage return has a decimal value of 13 Adding 64 makes 77 which is the decimal value of the displayable character M When the Ctrl control key is held down and Shift M is pressed or M alone if Caps Lock is on this will generate a CR code in local mode Some setup options require you to specify one or more control characters A control character can be specified by typing to represent the Ctrl key immediately followed by the displayable character equivalent of the control character as described in the previous paragraph For example M represents Ctrl M which generates the control character CR Another way of specifying control characters is by entering the decimal value of the ASCII character Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as 013 Character Sets ASCII MULTINATIONAL 7 BIT CHARACTER SET Tek amp VT220 Alpha Modes TO mm oou 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7i 7 7 0 8 8 1 gt gt gt miN lt
274. me of the directory The Files list box will be updated accordingly and the new directory will be displayed at the bottom of the dialog box Click the Cancel button to action the change and close the dialog box Note The Cancel button in this particular dialog box functions as an OK button 8 19 File Transfer Notes 8 20 File Transfer File Transfer This chapter describes the transfer utility supported by TeemTalk for Windows 3 1x in all terminal emulation modes Configuration Requirements 1 FTF requires the DOSLANTI TSR to be loaded but it is not necessary for the user interface providing you do not attempt to initiate a transfer 2 Thelist of hosts that can be selected from the FTF dialog box depends on entries in the private profile file OSLANSVF INI This file is described in the OSLAN section of the Network Connection chapter in the Networking Guide The LocalTSAP RemoteTS AP and RemoteLSAP entries for each host must be as shown in the example below nigelpc RemoteDteAddress 020723feda67 LocalTSAP 0881 this entry must be the same for all hosts RemoteTSAP 0882 this entry must be the same for all hosts RemoteLSAP fe this entry must be the same for all hosts 3 For an ICL host system to initiate file transfers to FTF it is necessary that the TFRFOUT command is used The FTTEXTOPTION parameter should be set to the following RECPRESER
275. mmary Enable cursor ESC 50h Enable cursor autowrap ESC 7h Index cursor move down one line ESCD Insert FF character amp advance cursor FF Line feed LF Move cursor down lines Move cursor down line VT Move cursor left columns ESC D Move cursor one column left BS Move cursor right columns ESC C Move cursor to beginning of next line ESCE Move cursor to left margin of current line CR Move cursor to line 1 column c ESC 1 cH Move cursor to line 1 column c ESC 1 cf Move cursor to next tab stop HT Move cursor up lines ESC A Reverse index cursor move up one line ESCM Select absolute origin mode ESC 61 Select auto carriage return ESC 20h LFCR Select relative origin mode ESC 6h Set tab stop at current cursor position ESCH TABS Tab cursor backward tabs ESC Z Tab cursor forward tabs ESC I DISPLAY HOST PRIMARY SETUP Scroll display down lines ESC T Scroll display up lines ESC S Select 80 column display mode ESC 31 Select 132 column display mode ESC 3h Select invisible display ESC 751 Select normal colour display mode ESC 51 Select reverse colour display mode ESC 5h Select visible display ESC 75h Set left 1 and right r margin positions ESC 1 rr EDITING HOST PRIMARY SETUP Delete characters from cursor position right ESC P Delete lines from cursor position down ESC M Erase characters amp attributes from cursor right
276. mode on the host for remote commands to function A command is initiated by selecting it in the Kermit Remote Operations dialog box then clicking the Action button Most commands will cause a dialog box to be displayed in which you have to enter information though if the OK button is not initially dimmed then the information is not essential for the command to function A window will display the results of commands If the results are extensive an Edit window will display them enabling you to edit and even transfer them to another Windows application Get This will display a dialog box in which you specify the name of a file to be obtained from the host Command This enables you to specify a command which is to be executed by the host The command must be entered using a valid syntax for the host Change Dir This enables you to specify a different working directory for the host and enter your password If no directory is specified the host will execute its default action for this command UNIX will enter the home directory 8 17 File Transfer Directory This enables you to specify which filenames are listed from the host s working directory Clicking OK when nothing has been specified will cause all filenames to be displayed Erase This enables you to specify the names of files to be deleted from the host s working directory Help This enables you to specify the topic on which help is required If nothing i
277. n Instead of pressing the key on the keyboard you could invoke the function by moving the mouse pointer over the displayed key name holding down the Control key and clicking the Left mouse button Hotspots are supported in ALL terminal emulation modes TeemTalk provides a set of default keywords for each mode These keywords relate to key functions specific to the emulation For example in VT200 mode you can click on the word Help displayed on the screen and TeemTalk will execute the function associated with the Help key You can identify hotspots that are currently present in display memory by holding down the Control key and the Right mouse button assuming default mouse configuration All colour attributes will be temporarily removed from the display and the hotspots will be highlighted with a red background Releasing the keys will return the display to its original state In summary the following key and mouse button combinations are used to identify and action hotspot functions by default Identify hotspots Control Right Mouse Button Action hotspot function Control Left Mouse Button Note These functions may be assigned to different mouse button and key combinations Refer to the Mouse Functions chapter for details Hotspots Defining Hotspots Hotspot keywords and associated functions are specified in a text file which has the same name and is in the same directory as the current workspace file but with the
278. n hold down the Shift key while dragging the mouse 10 Once all files to send have been highlighted click the Send button to start transferring data to the host A window will be displayed showing how the file transfer is progressing The transfer will continue until all selected files have been received by the host or the transfer is cancelled refer to the Cancelling A File Transfer section later File Transfer Receiving Files The following procedure is used to transfer files from the host to your PC 1 Start the transfer procedure on the host computer and specify that files are to be sent Display the TeemTalk File menu on your PC and select File Transfer The Initiate File Transfer dialog box will be displayed Initiate File Transfer x Transfer Protocol How e Kermit Send C Receive Parameters perations General Remote Kermit Local Cancel Select the transfer protocol you wish to use in the Transfer Protocol list box If you want to change the default parameter settings for the chosen transfer protocol click the relevant Parameters button and make your selections in the displayed dialog box then click the OK button The ASCII protocol requires the Discard partial file option in the General Parameters dialog box to be unselected Note If the file transfer fails it is probably because of differences between the local and remote parity and
279. n is selected and will cause data that has been copied to the clipboard to be pasted at the 7 22 Setup Menus current cursor position The same block of data may be pasted repeatedly as the clipboard stores it until the Copy command is used again Note The same function can be performed by clicking the right mouse button on a 3 button mouse or Shift Left or Right Button on a 2 button mouse or by pressing the keys Shift Insert Select All This will cause the window contents not the entire buffer to be selected Clear Buffer This will erase the contents of the window and the scroll buffer 7 23 Setup Menus Settings Menu Emulation Serial Terminal Dialog Bin Attributes Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Mouse Button Action Button Tools The following dialog boxes can be displayed from this menu Emulation Settings Serial Settings Terminal Settings Dialog Settings Gin Settings Attributes Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Mouse Button Actions Button Tools for specifying the terminal emulation terminal identity and displayable characters for specifying serial communication settings for specifying terminal and keyboard settings for specifying the text window format buffer size and cursor movement for configuring TeemTalk for compatibility with the attached GIN device for assigning colours and specifying how characters with attributes
280. n the Dialog Settings dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details The Selection Cursor The selection cursor is a vertical bar which is displayed when the mouse pointer is moved into the emulation workspace It is controlled by the mouse and is used to select text for editing To select text position the selection cursor next to the first character position to be selected hold down the left mouse button then move the cursor to the end of the selection Moving the cursor above or below the boundary of the emulation workspace while the left mouse button is held down will cause the display to scroll enabling selection of text stored in display memory The text will be highlighted when selected You can use the copy and paste commands in the Edit menu on selected text as described in the Setup Menus chapter When the selection cursor is moved outside the emulation workspace or when menus or dialog boxes are displayed it changes back to the mouse pointer enabling you to select window elements 2 22 Getting Started The Gin Cursor The Gin Graphics Input cursor is a small crosshair cursor which is used to make selections and specify locations in the graphics area The Gin cursor can be steered using the mouse or cursor keys You can change the size of the cursor by using the following initialization file command or command line option where size is a numeric value in the range 1 to 4096 i e world coordinates Ini
281. n this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command FILE SEEK Syntax FILE SEEK handle position lt count gt This command specifies the location within a file at which character read and write operations are to occur where handle is the integer variable specified by the file open command and used to identify the file position defines the approximate position in the file as start current or end which may be abbreviated to S C and E respectively count defines the particular character location as the number of characters from the position setting which is entered as a minus or plus figure e g 6 or 25 This parameter may be omitted The following example will move the location to twelve characters from the end of the file identified by the handle id file seek id e 12 Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command FILE STAT Syntax FILE STAT filename size mode lt modtime gt uname lt gname gt This will get the statistics of the specified file and place them in the previously defined string variables where filename is a string or string variable that specifies the name of the file This is the only entry that must be specified the others are optional 12 34 Creating A Script File size is a previously defined string or integer variable see var which will sto
282. nal Settings Settings File Ow TeemTalk enables you to create multiple connection templates one of which can be used either when TeemTalk is loaded or while it is running The procedure is as follows 15 In the Saved Items box indicate which user preference settings are to be saved by checking the boxes next to the relevant options In the Settings File text box specify the name of the terminal emulation settings file and the directory path if different from the default which is to store settings only affecting the terminal emulation The default filename is tt w nv where is either 05 07 or 11 depending on your version of TeemTalk Note There is no need to specify file extensions as defaults are applied when the files are created In the Save As File Name text box specify the name of the workspace settings file and the directory path if different from the default which is to store the user preference settings selected by the Saved Items options The default filename is tt w wsp where is either 05 07 or 11 depending on your version of TeemTalk Note Splitting the saved settings into two files enables users to share a common terminal emulation settings file while allowing each user to have their own workspace settings file 7 12 Setup Menus 4 Inthe Description text box enter a unique description up to 132 characters long which will be used to identify the connection template for futu
283. name float and with a value of 0 45 you would enter the following 12 64 Creating A Script File var float 0 45 future references to a variable are made by using its name without the variable type identifying characters Note You can convert the type of data string integer floating point number from one variable to another using conv You can specify more than one variable name and value on the same line Variable names are linked to their assigned values by an equals sign spaces are optional and each variable name with value is separated from the next by a comma or and space For example var integer1 32 integer2 string1 Hello string2 Variables that are not assigned a value will be given NULL for strings or 0 zero You can incorporate a special variable called errno in your script file which will be used to store a number indicating the result of a command i e success or type of failure The errno variable is an integer variable which is already defined as part of the script language that is you do not need to use the var command to include it in your script file When the command is successful the number 0 will be assigned to errno Refer to the section entitled Error Numbers later in this chapter for more details WAIT Syntax WAIT time Causes the host to wait for the specified time in seconds The default time is one second WHILE Syntax WHILE condition
284. nd Line st subtitle Default Setting Untitled These commands enable you to specify a subtitle for display in the title bar of a specific TeemTalk window By default the subtitle is the name of the session Soft Buttons Displayed Initialization File buttonlevels 0 4 Command Line bl0 4 Default Setting 1 A set of soft buttons is displayed at the bottom of the TeemTalk window by default There are four soft button levels Level 1 is displayed by default Each level consists of twelve programmable buttons providing a combined total of 48 buttons You can display all four levels 48 buttons at the same time if required All levels are accessible even if not all are displayed levels stored off screen can be scrolled into view by clicking the Level button You can specify how many soft button levels are actually displayed by using this initialization file command or command line option All four levels can be displayed by specifying 4 Specifying 0 will cause no soft buttons to be displayed Disable Status Bar Initialization File statusline off Command Line v Default Setting These commands will remove the status bar at the bottom of the window Default Font Size Initialization File defaultFontIndex index Command Line dfindex Default Setting Depends on the display adaptor The size of the font used by default when TeemTalk is loaded usually depends on the type of display adaptor in your system
285. nfigured in Microsoft Windows 2 Toolbar BEAR 9 D E S Displays the Print Screen dialog box for producing a hardcopy of screen data in a particular format Displays the Attributes dialog box This enables you to specify the colours used in the dialog area and how text with attributes is displayed Displays the Keyboard Macros dialog box This shows the mapping of your keyboard and enables you to redefine the function of keys Displays the Soft Buttons dialog box for redefining the buttons at the bottom of the TeemTalk window Displays the Mouse Button Actions dialog box for assigning up to six functions to each mouse button Increases the size of the window to the next font size up while retaining the same number of rows and columns Decreases the size of the window to the next font size down while retaining the same number of rows and columns Displays the Button Tools dialog box for redefining the toolbar Closes the current session Resets the current terminal emulation mode Erases the contents of the window and the scroll buffer Displays the Help contents dialog box Erases the contents of the graphics area and redraws all visible segments Toolbar Erases the contents of the dialog area and buffer Toggles dialog area visibility on and off E E Activates the zoom pan feature except TeemTalk 05W and TeemTalk 05W32 To
286. ng pset host baud 9600 port dev ttya In this case the group ID only has to be entered once at the beginning of the line followed by each set of parameter IDs and values You can also use the pset command to define key macros The following example will define the F1 key so that when it is pressed in conjunction with the Shift and Ctrl keys s c it will send the string in the double quote characters pset macro s c XK F1 logon n r Note that when you want to enter a control character in a definition you must use the three digit decimal value of the ASCII character preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as 013 You cannot use a control key character equivalent e g M for CR in a PSET definition Refer to the section entitled PGET amp PSET Parameters amp Values at the end of this chapter for a complete list of group ID s parameter ID s and values and the abbreviations that can be used PUT Syntax PUT string PUT variable Send the string s within double quote characters or variable s to the host QUIT Syntax QUIT The script program terminates and TeemTalk is exited RAND Syntax RAND variable This will put the next random number into the variable which can be a floating point number or string variable The number will be less than 1 If an integer variable is use
287. ng amp Copying Text essent 4 3 Disabling The Copy amp Paste Functions esses 4 3 2 Button Mouse Emulating 3 Button 4 4 Show amp Action Hotspots sss eee 4 4 Seid Keyword s ie ERN ON E 4 4 Moving The Cursor In Block Mode sess 4 4 OST Using Ihe Toolb r un oae ttes 5 Contents 2 Contents The Predefined Button Tools esee 5 2 Redefining The Toolbar essent 5 5 Adding Button 5 5 Assigning Functions To Buttons eese 5 6 Removing Button Tools esee 5 8 Saving The Button Tools eere 5 8 Hotspots elenco tussi sdda T USING FIOUSDOUS uie e et ete 6 1 Defining Hotspots iere tpe 6 2 Setup Mentis sister 7 1 Selecting amp Closing Menus sess 7 1 Usine he MENIS ce n et tee tee 7 2 Dialog Boxes e Ree 7 3 Default Settings ER SWR REO DEREN ERR 7 4 Creating A Connection Template essen 7 5 Using Environment Variables To Locate Settings Files 7 6 Selecting A Connection Template 0442222 7 1 Menu Descriptions ette iet 7 8 File Menu oni rae reete e ipn 7 8 Telnet Options 4 mter ae an B redes 7 19 Ed
288. ng A Script File 12 Creating A Script File This chapter describes TeemTalk s scripting language Introduction TeemTalk provides a comprehensive script language which allows all aspects of the emulator to be controlled via user written command files Operating in real time the script language can be used to create customised environments detect and act upon host events and simulate user input A script file can be written using any text editor Initiating A Script File The script file can be initiated in any of five ways using an initialization file command command line option from the File menu user defined key or button or remotely using an escape sequence Using An Initialization File Command TeemTalk for Windows 3 1 To specify the name of the script file in the WIN INI initialization file use a text editor to insert the following line under the command group headed tt07w i e for TeemTalk 07W separating it from the next command group by a blank line scriptfile filename For example to initiate the script file named LOGON the command group for TeemTalk 07W would include the following lines tt07w scriptfile LOGON 12 1 Creating A Script File TeemTalk for Windows 95 amp NT To specify the name of the script file in the TT W INI private profile file where is your version of TeemTalk e g 07 for TeemTalk 07W use a text editor to insert the following line under the command gro
289. ngs dialog box as described in the Setup Menus chapter The total number of dialog buffer lines may not exceed 100 A mouse is required to enable scrolling as keyboard commands for moving through the buffer are not supported The scroll bar includes up and down scroll arrow buttons and a scroll box to enable you to scroll through the buffer The scroll arrow buttons allow you to scroll up or down a line at a time or several lines at a time when clicked depending on the setting of the Burst Scroll option in the Dialog Settings dialog box Holding down the mouse button while a scroll arrow is selected will enable continuous scrolling The scroll box allows you to quickly move through the buffer when it is dragged up or down the scroll bar by placing the pointer over it holding down the left mouse button then moving the mouse Clicking the pointer in the scroll bar above or below the scroll box will cause the previous or next block of data to be displayed A block is equal to the number of lines and columns displayed in the window The Soft Buttons Level 1 GErase DErase DUisib Cancel Setup Zoon Vieulp VieuDn RstUieu DefUieu Patterns Print A set of soft buttons is displayed at the bottom of the TeemTalk window by default These can be programmed so that they perform various functions when clicked There are four soft button levels Level 1 is displayed by default Each level consists of twelve programmable buttons providing a combined to
290. nnection template for TeemTalk to use The following dialog box will be displayed Description Save As Default Cancel Delete The Description list box displays the one line descriptions of connection templates that were created using the Save Session As dialog box The description of the connection template currently in use is highlighted The factory default connection template is Untitled Clicking one of the descriptions then the OK button will cause TeemTalk to use the connection template associated with the chosen description You can make TeemTalk automatically use a particular connection template when it is loaded or reset by clicking the required description checking the Save As Default check box then clicking the OK button To delete a connection template select the description then click the Delete button Close Session This will close the current session 7 11 Setup Menus Save Session Selecting this option will cause the current session configuration to be saved to the connection template specified in the Save Session As dialog box Save Session As This will display a dialog box which enables you to save the current session configuration as a connection template Save Session Save As File Name Description untitled Cancel Saved Items Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Attributes Window Metrics Text Rows Buffer Rows Connection Termi
291. nt commands Note some keyboards the keypad acts as both a numeric keypad and a cursor key block depending on the setting of some modifier such as the Num Lock key This option only affects the characters generated when the keypad is acting as a cursor key block Scroll Bar on Maximize Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines whether or not a scroll bar is displayed when the window is maximized 7 32 Setup Menus Report Maximum Line Length Factory default 0 The setting of this option determines the maximum number of characters per line for reports sent to the host The numeric value must be in the range 0 through 65535 This feature is disabled if 0 is specified Bypass Cancel Character Factory default J LF This option sets the bypass mode cancellation character Bypass mode is entered when TeemTalk sends a report to the host so as to prevent reports echoed by the host being actioned by TeemTalk AII characters subsequently received from the host are discarded until the terminal receives the bypass cancel character after which it resumes processing received data If the host does not echo then bypass mode can be disabled by specifying the character as NULL ASCII decimal 00 in one of the ways described in the following paragraphs Otherwise set the bypass character to the last character that the host sends when it echoes a line of text To change the current definition delete the d
292. nter over a key in the lower layout and holding down the left mouse button The key or key combination which emulate the function of the key you are currently pressing will be displayed in the upper layout as if pressed in Note Control key functions are not shown TeemTalk provides two quick and easy ways of changing the default keyboard mapping to suit your requirements Remapping Normal Key Functions The following method is suitable when the function to be remapped does not require a combination of keys to be pressed to action it For example you can make the F1 key on your keyboard emulate the Insert key of the terminal keyboard being emulated but you cannot specify that pressing the keys Alt F1 together will perform the Insert key function First set the Keyboard Action option to Map Key click the key in the lower layout showing the legend of the function required then click the key in the upper layout which you want to assign that function to Note that you will now have two keys which emulate the same function the default mapping and the mapping you have just specified You can either leave them this way or assign a new function to the key which was mapped by default Remapping Key Combination Functions The following method is suitable for both normal key functions and key combination functions For example you can map the Insert key function to the F1 key on your keyboard and you can make the keys Alt F1 emulate the He
293. o the data using the WM DDA DATA message sending the ItemName as an identifier to the particular area on the screen that has changed Either a NULL data item will be sent informing the client that the particular piece of information has changed and allowing it to transmit a WM DDE REQUEST message using the ItemName to get the data from TeemTalk when it wants to 1 e a Warm link or the data will be sent directly Hot link Direct Initiation Of A DDE Link An application that knows the area of the TeemTalk screen that contains data of interest to it can directly initiate a DDE link to TeemTalk using the appropriate szAppname and szTopicName Data messages can then proceed as described in the previous section using szItemName s to reflect the area of the screen This method is adopted by Excel when a particular spreadsheet that contains these command strings is recalled or reopened using the File menu As long as the AppName and DocName TopicName match then TeemTalk can then start sending fresh updates to Excel once the initial WM DDE ADVISE preamble is successfully completed 13 5 Dynamic Data Exchange File Transfer TeemTalk for Windows 3 1 not Windows 95 or NT supports DDE links with its file transfer executable TTFLER EXE distributed with the standard TeemTalk package Without getting too deep into the internal windows messages that are transmitted the link between TeemTalk and TTFLER can briefly be summarised as
294. oaded Initialization File windowSize FullScreen Command Line f Default Setting Not applicable These commands will cause the emulation workspace to fill the entire display when TeemTalk is loaded while retaining the default number of lines and columns Note that the title bar menu bar scroll bar and soft buttons will not be displayed even if they are enabled You can use the bf or UseBoldFont On commands to make the font bolder if required Disable Copyright Message Initialization File quiet on Command Line qt Default Setting off copyright message displayed These commands will stop the copyright message from being displayed when TeemTalk is loaded 11 17 Initialization Disable Control Menu amp Min Maximize Buttons Initialization File SystemMenu none Command Line sy Default Setting These commands will remove the Control System menu icon and the minimize and maximize buttons from the TeemTalk window Disable Control Menu Initialization File SystemMenu off Command Line ms Default Setting These commands will remove the Control System menu icon from the TeemTalk window Disable Close Window Items Initialization File MenuCloseItem off Command Line mt Default Setting These commands will remove the Close window option from the Control System menu and in Windows 95 and NT disable the close window X button at the top right corner of the
295. ock LOWORD 1Param if bRelease GlobalFree LOWORD 1Param return 13 22 Dynamic Data Exchange The CurPosStr function is an alternative string version of CurPos This returns a string of two three digit decimal values for the X and Y coordinates in the form KeyStr KeyStr is a straightforward POKE of data that is treated as a key macro to be performed More than one macro definition can be specified in the same string The string exam ple below will perform the function of the keys Alt F4 pressed together followed by the A key lt ALT F4 gt lt A gt KeyStr must be terminated with a CR LF NULL sequence to keep in line with the CF_TEXT data format Note however that these three characters will not get dispatched through to the host KeyPress Keypress is a straightforward POKE of data that will cause the function of a key to be performed as if it had been pressed by an operator The data is a string containing the virtual key name of the required key Refer to the Virtual Key Names appendix for a list of key names that can be used This must be terminated with a CR LF NULL sequence to keep in line with the CF_TEXT data format Note however that these three characters will not get dispatched through to the host 13 23 Dynamic Data Exchange DDE Link To A Visual Basic Application The following example Visual Basic application DDEDEMO creates a DDE link to two copies of TeemTalk The link
296. ode lt modtime gt lt uname gt lt gname gt This FTP file transfer command will get the next entry in the working directory following an ftp dirfirst command and place it in the previously defined string variables where filename is a previously defined string variable see var which will store the name of the file This is the only variable that must be specified the others are optional size is a previously defined string or integer variable which will store the size of the file mode is a previously defined string variable which will store the mode lt modtime gt is a previously defined string variable which will store the time of the last modification uname is previously defined string or integer variable which will store the user name gname is previously defined string or integer variable which will store the group name Note that if you require a value which follows one or more that are not required you will still need to supply variables for them For example if you only wanted the time that the file was last modified you would need to specify a variable for size and mode as well as lt modtime gt This can be followed by more ftp dirnext commands to work through the directory listing If the command is invalid or there are no more directory entries then the variable will be set to zero length Note Both the local and remote directories can be listed at the same
297. olbar Redefining The Toolbar Clicking the last button in the default toolbar or selecting Button Tools from the Settings menu will display a dialog box which enables you to redefine the toolbar Button Tools Current Tool ew Connection Delete Current Buttons Commands New Connection Insert at Current pen Session Paste Shift Ins Add Custom Patterns Print Buffer Print Screen Printer Setup Replay File Reset Terminal RstView 2 Run Script 21 Cancel Lustor H Visible Up to 64 button tools can be defined all of which can be displayed in the floating button palette but only one row of buttons can be displayed in the toolbar The maximum number of buttons that can be displayed in the toolbar depends on the display resolution and the size of the window A button tool is defined in two stages The first stage is to specify the button bitmap for display in the toolbar and the second stage is to assign a function to it Adding Button Bitmaps Clicking the arrow button in the Current Tool box will display a list box showing all the button bitmapss in the order displayed in the toolbar together with their functions The Current Tool will be highlighted in this list When you add a new button to the toolbar it is positioned to the left of the button currently selected in this list Select the current tool then close the list box by clicking the arrow button
298. ommand Lines You can enter a command line in a soft button definition by enclosing it within the and characters This enables you to launch an application by just clicking a button For example to program the button B3 so that another instance of TeemTalk 07W is run when the button is clicked you would enter the following in the B3 Command text box C TEEMTALK TT07W EXE Changing The Window Focus You can program a soft button to change the currently selected window or icon that is the window or icon to which keyboard and mouse commands will be directed by entering its window class name as a string enclosed by the lt and gt characters For example to program the button B4 so that the TeemTalk 07W window is selected 7 52 Setup Menus when the button is clicked you would enter the following in the B4 Command text box lt tt07w gt tt07w is the window class name for TeemTalk 07W Initiating A Script File You can program a soft button to run a script file when pressed by enclosing the name of the file and any arguments within the lt left angle bracket and single quote and gt single quote and right angle bracket characters For example to program a button so that it will run the script file myscript scr and assign the values valuel and value2 to two variables you would enter the following lt myscript scr valuel value2 gt Refer to the chapter entitled Creating A Script File for more inf
299. on on two numerics If the variable receiving the result of the operation is a float then the defined variable would hold the exact value otherwise with an integer variable the result would be rounded down to the nearest integral value For example var Int var Float Int Float 5 0 2 wrt Float result of 5 0 2 Float n wrt Int result of 5 0 2 Int n exit would print the two lines Float result of 5 0 2 2 50000 Int result of 5 0 2 2 Note that the expression 5 0 2 is specified and not 5 2 This is to ensure that the language interpreter performs the arithmetic operation using floats instead of the default of integers So if the third line was Int Float 5 2 the result would be Float result of 5 2 2 00000 Int result of 5 2 2 The operator will only work on integer operations If a floating point operation contains this operator the system flag will be set to FALSE indicating an error and the rest of the line will be ignored The operator is provided as a means to achieve the remainder of the result of an integral divide For example var Int Int 5 2 wrt result of 5 2 Int n exit would print the line result of 5 2 1 12 15 Creating A Script File Arithmetic Modifiers These operators all act as per their usual function if the was ignored but have the effect that they substitute the resultant value back into the var
300. op incoming data 11 10 Initialization Commands Disable Closed Connection Message Box Initialization File exitOnClose on TeemTalk exits immediately exitOnClose off TeemTalk does not exit exitOnClose connect TeemTalk attempts to reconnect Command Line e TeemTalk exits immediately el TeemTalk does not exit 2 TeemTalk attempts to reconnect Default Setting Message box displayed When the host closes the connection or the connection fails TeemTalk normally displays a message box giving you the option to reconnect cancel or exit These commands will disable the message box and cause TeemTalk to immediately perform the required option Disable New Session Warning Message Box Initialization File sessionWarning off Command Line os Default Setting Enabled A warning message is displayed by default when you attempt to open a new session while a session is currently open These commands enable you to disable the message box so that TeemTalk automatically closes the current session and opens the new session Disable Exit TeemTalk Message Box Initialization File warnExit off Command Line j Default Setting Enabled A message box will be displayed if you attempt to exit TeemTalk while a network session is still active These commands will disable the message box so that TeemTalk automatically closes the network connection when it is exited IE IE SEA j Your network session is still active
301. or each transmitted character If the number of Data Bits is 8 set this option to None Selecting Odd will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number Selecting Even will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number Mark parity will set every eighth bit to 1 and Space parity every bit to 0 Flow Control Factory default Output This option specifies the type of flow control used by the line port to communicate readiness to transmit or receive data from the host None No flow control Input XON XOFF on received data Output XON XOFF on transmitted data 7 27 Setup Menus In Out XON XOFF on transmitted amp received data Hardware DTR CTS hardware flow control Data Bits Factory default 8 This option specifies the number of data bits sent for each transmitted character Stop Bits Factory default 1 This specifies the number of stop bits sent for each transmitted character Transmit Rate Factory default Unlimited The setting of this option determines the maximum effective baud rate that TeemTalk transmits terminal reports and data sent as a result of pasting data to the host On Line Factory default Selected When this option is selected normal two way communication between TeemTalk and the
302. or setting up a link The first is to use the Edit menu Copy and Paste facility to copy DDE header information to the clipboard which a client application can then read and act upon appropriately The second is for the client application to directly transmit a WM DDE ADVISE message to TeemTalk in the same format as defined for the clipboard copy 13 3 Dynamic Data Exchange Using The Edit Menu DDE Functions The most apparent DDE support provided by TeemTalk are the two entries in the Edit menu DDE Row Copy and DDE Column Copy v Clipboard Text Clipboard Graphics DDE Row Copy DDE Column Copy Copy Select All Clear Buffer These two functions do not directly invoke a DDE link to another application Instead they ensure all the information that Microsoft Excel would require to establish a DDE link with TeemTalk is copied to the clipboard This information consists of item topic and application names that TeemTalk would recognise when asked to invoke a DDE link The reason why there are two DDE entries in the Edit menu is to provide the necessary formatting information to enable data to be pasted into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet as a row or column of cells When data is copied the end of each line in the highlighted area of the display is terminated by a TAB character when DDE Row Copy is selected and CR and LF characters when DDE Column Copy is selected Each line is then treated as a separate portion of d
303. or the key defined with the COMPOSE virtual key name again before completing a compose character sequence will cause it to be abandoned and a second sequence to be started An invalid compose character sequence will cause the bell to sound The following tables use several conventions The keys bearing the characters used to compose a special character may be pressed in any order unless in order is specified If a nationality is specified with the character description for example Dutch then the character can only be composed when the Multinational option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is not selected 3 16 Keyboard Configuration ER E MS DE Ea COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES quotation mark space number sign apostrophe space commercial at Multinational aA National opening bracket back slash lt closing bracket space grave accent space opening brace vertical line closing brace tilde space inverted 11 cent sign e s E pound sign a p Ts yen sign p 3 ze Soo 80 National amp Multinational National includes S O or S o currency sign 0 A Io copyright sign co 2 60 Y feminine ordinal indicator a or A double open lt lt angle brackets 0 Mu
304. orking directory and place it in a previously defined string variable Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command FTU CANCEL Syntax FTU CANCEL This will release the current links between TeemTalk and the file transfer utility initiated previously by the ftu initiate command Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command FTU GET Syntax FTU GET variable lt groupID gt lt paramID gt lt subparamID gt This command enables you to get information on a particular setting where variable is a previously defined string variable see var which will store the information 12 41 Creating A Script File lt groupID gt identifies a group of parameters lt paramID gt identifies a particular parameter or in the case of Parameter settings a sub group of parameters lt subparamID gt identifies a particular parameter when the lt groupID gt is specified as Parameter otherwise this is omitted For example to get the current retry limit setting and place it in the previously defined variable called limit you would enter the following ftu get limit parameter general retrylimit where parameter is the group ID general is the parameter ID for a sub group of parameters and retrylimit is the sub parameter ID Refer to the section entitled FTU SET amp GET Parameters later
305. ormation on initiating script files Action Locally Or Transmit To Host A soft button definition may be actioned locally or transmitted to the host when the button is clicked This is determined by the setting of the Local check box next to the definition When the check box is unchecked the definition will be transmitted to the host 7 53 Setup Menus Mouse Button Actions Left Right Normal 8228 M Shit ExendSelecton EdtPate 2 Control Action Hotspot Y Show Hotspots Control Shift Select Rectangle Unassigned v 1g Double Click Selectwod Unassigned Highlight When Actioned OK Cancel dit This dialog box is displayed by selecting Mouse Button Action in the Settings menu This enables you to specify the function of the left and right mouse buttons when they are pressed on their own or in conjunction with modifier keys You can assign up to six functions to each button Clicking one of the arrow buttons will display a drop down list box which lists all the standard functions that can be assigned Unassigned Send CR Select Send Keyword Extend Selection Middle Button Edit Copy Select Rectangle Edit Paste Select Word Show Hotspots Select and Copy Action Hotspot Cursor Select Move Cursor The Select function will select all text from the start position to the finish position working left to right across the entire width of the display whereas the Select
306. ot exist the program continues with the next line HCMP Syntax delay lt string1 gt lt string2 gt Enter the terminal emulation and wait for the first occurance of any of the specified strings from the host where delay 15 the number of seconds to wait for a string to be matched This must be an integer value not a variable If a matching string is received within the time period the system flag is set to TRUE otherwise the flag is set to FALSE The program then continues with the next line If the time delay value is zero the terminal emulation will be maintained indefi nitely until a string is matched stringit be a literal string or a variable including integer and floating point Any number of strings can be entered There is no case sensitivity The errno error number variable will indicate the number of the string matched according to its position after the hemp command Use the brf and brt commands to test for success or failure 12 45 Creating A Script File HGET Syntax HGET variable count timeout This gets one or more characters from the host and assigns them to the specified vari able where count is the number of characters to get from the host If omitted then one character will be returned timeout is the maximum number of seconds during which the operation has to take place before timing out If the format of the variabl
307. ot initiate file transfer utility File transfer quitted Remote dialog open error Send command error Send error Cancelled all transfer protocols except Kermit Timed out all transfer protocols except Kermit Receive error all transfer protocols except Kermit Packet sequence error all transfer protocols except Kermit No files to send Printer open error Kermit Transfer aborted XMODEM YMODEM ZMODEM GET 0 1 command was successful Timeout GETINI amp SETINI 0 The command was successful 1 Invalid parameter in the command string LAUNCH 0 The command was successful 1 Error 12 69 Creating A Script File MSGBOX 0 The command was successful 1 Invalid parameter in the command string 2 Invalid button combination specified 3 Unable to create the dialog box PARSE 0 Thecommand was successful 1 Invalid parameter in the command string 2 Item not located in the string PASSWORD 0 Thecommand was successful 1 Invalid parameter in the command string 2 Cancel button pressed 3 Unable to create the dialog box TITLE 0 The command was successful 1 No title was specified 12 70 Creating A Script File Script Error Trapping Functions The integrity of a script program can be checked by using the onerror errorline and errorcode commands These enable you to quickly find any syntax errors within the program The following progra
308. ox then click OK By default the buttons displayed on level 1 are predefined with functions supported by the Tektronix 4105 or 4207 and 4111 terminals as follows GErase This will erase the contents of the graphics area and redraw all visible segments DErase This will erase all the text contained in the dialog area buffer DVisib This will toggle the visibility of the dialog area on and off Cancel This will halt terminal activity by resetting bypass Gin marker prompt snoopy and vector modes Setup This will toggle the Tektronix form of setup called Primary Setup on and off An asterisk prompt indicates that you are in Primary Setup mode Primary Setup can also be toggled on and off by pressing the keys Alt Z together Refer to the Primary Setup Mode section earlier in this chapter for more details Zoom Not supported by TeemTalk 05W This will activate the zoom pan feature When the pointer is moved into the emulation workspace it will change into the zoom cursor which appears as a two way arrow Click the left mouse button to select that location as the centre of the area to be zoomed Moving the cursor now will cause two rectangles to appear The larger one represents what will be the edge of the window Clicking the middle mouse button or holding down the Shift key while clicking either the left or right button on a two button mouse will cause the contents of this rectangle to be redrawn to fill the window 2 17
309. ping to suit your requirements Remapping Normal Key Functions The following method is suitable when the function to be remapped does not require a combination of keys to be pressed to action it For example you can make the F1 key on your keyboard emulate the Insert key of the terminal keyboard being emulated but you cannot specify that pressing the keys Alt F1 together will perform the Insert key function First set the Keyboard Action option to Map Key click the key in the lower layout showing the legend of the function required then click the key in the upper layout which you want to assign that function to Note that you will now have two keys which emulate the same function the default mapping and the mapping you have just specified You can either leave them this way or assign a new function to the key which was mapped by default Remapping Key Combination Functions The following method is suitable for both normal key functions and key combination functions For example you can map the Insert key function to the F1 key on your keyboard and you can make the keys Alt F1 emulate the Help key when pressed together First click the key in the upper layout representing your keyboard to which you want to assign a function The Define Key Macro dialog box will be displayed as shown below This example shows how the F1 key is mapped by default Define Key Macro Undefined Normal UP Shit Cancel Control Con
310. ple each client has the user environment variable USERPROFILE pointing to a local directory which may be different on each client To make the directory specified by USERPROFILE the location of the TeemTalk settings files nv and wsp the TeemTalk registry entries on the terminal server would look like this NvPath USERPROFILE WsPath USERPROFILE Setup Menus Selecting A Connection Template The Open Session dialog box in the File menu enables you to select a connection template for TeemTalk to use Description Save As Default I Cancel Delete The Description list box displays the one line descriptions of connection templates that were created using the Save Session As dialog box The description of the connection template currently in use is highlighted The factory default connection template is Untitled Clicking one of the descriptions then the OK button will cause the dialog box to close and TeemTalk to use the connection template associated with the chosen description You make TeemTalk automatically use a particular connection template when it is loaded or reset by clicking the required description checking the Save As Default check box then clicking the OK button To delete a connection template select the description then click the Delete button You can also use the following command line option to override the default connection template used when TeemTalk is loaded se
311. pported and for any additional configuration required prior to making a connection Getting Started The Services list box in the New Connection dialog box will display the devices on the network which use the currently selected protocol Click the name of the device required or in the case of TELAPI enter an Internet address in the text box for example 128 127 126 2 Note that either the host name or IP address may be entered for TCP IP connections When Eicon X25 is selected TeemTalk requires you to enter a valid X25 address as none will be listed The Telnet Options button becomes available when a Telnet protocol is selected in the Type list box The dialog box displayed when this button is clicked is described in the Setup Menus chapter Clicking the Connect button or the name of the host in the Services list box twice will cause TeemTalk to attempt to connect to the specified host If a connection cannot be made because the network driver is not installed or the host node name is invalid an error message will indicate this Failure to connect for any other reason will result in a Connection Failed message The status bar along the bottom of the TeemTalk window displays two LEDs The first LED indicates whether or not you are connected to the host It will show red when not connected and green when you are connected The second LED indicates whether or not data is being sent to or from the host It will show dull green when th
312. pproximately 49 7 days Current Display amp Keyboard Settings GroupID ParamID Value Test If Keyboard Locked CURRent KBDLock boolean Test If Screen On Hold CURRent HLDSCR boolean Screen Visible CURRent SCReen boolean Menu Bar Visible CURRent MENU boolean Scroll Bar Visible CURRent SCROLL boolean Cursor Visible CURRent CURSor boolean Mouse Cursor Style MOUSE TYPE 0 10 See table in Initialization Commands Cursor Row Position CURRent ROW range 0 Cursor Column Position CURRent COLumn range 0 Reverse Video CURRent REVersevideo boolean Double Width Characters CURRent DWline immediate Single Width Characters CURRent SWline immediate Double Height Top Chars CURRent DHTop DOUBLE immediate Double Height Bottom Chars CURRent DHBottom immediate Clear Attributes CURRent CLR immediate Underline Attribute CURRent UL UNDERIine immediate Inverse Video Attribute CURRent IV INVerse immediate 12 84 Creating A Script File Invisible Attribute Flashing Attribute Highlight Bold Dim Attribute Normal No Attributes Line Drawing Character Set VT Modes Character Colour Character Cell Colour GroupID CURRent CURRent CURRent CURRent CURRent CURRent CURRent ParamID BLank SECurity FLashing BD BOLD HB HALFBright NORMal LD LINEdrawing FG BG Value immediate immediate immediate immediate boolean BLAck BLUe RED GREen MAGenta CYAn YELlow
313. printer This includes a Fonts button which enables you to change the font settings The Courier New 11 point font will be used by default Note The Printer Setup option will be unselectable if no printer is installed or if the Status option in the Microsoft Windows Printers dialog box is set to Inactive Print Screen This will display a dialog box which enables you to produce a hardcopy of data displayed on the screen in a particular format 7 15 Setup Menus The Text option is selected by default and the printer resolution and scaling options are not accessible Clicking the OK button with Text selected will cause a fast print of the screen using ASCII text codes therefore any graphics displayed in the TeemTalk client area will not be printed TeemTalk Print Screen TeemTalk Print Screen r Method Method OK Eae C Ted Lo C Graphics Cancel Graphics Cancel Use Printer Resolution Use Printer Resolution Auto Wrap Iu Gentrelma Paper Centre Image on Paper Scaling 0 x Scaling 100 Braphics Image Graphics Image Normal 7 Normal Mono Swap Black white Note The virtual key name VT_PRINT will also cause this dialog box to be displayed Selecting Graphics will print all the data in the TeemTalk client area both graphics and text when the OK button is clicked The hardcopy output will be an almost exact representation of the client area Note that a graphics print
314. private profile file CaptureFile This will display a dialog box which enables you to specify the name of a file in which all following data received from the host will be logged Clicking the OK button after entering the name of the file will cause all data received from the host to be stored in this file until the Cancel Capture option which replaces the Capture File option during a capture session is selected The contents of this file can be played back later by selecting the Replay File option 7 13 Setup Menus Replay File Factory default This option will display a dialog box which enables you to replay the contents of a file previously created by the Capture File option Enter the name of the file to be replayed in the Replay File Name text box or alternatively select a file name in the list box below specify whether the replay is directed to the emulation default or host then click the OK button To cancel a file replay select the Cancel Replay option which replaces the Replay File option while a file is being replayed File Transfer This option provides access to the file transfer utility Refer to the File Transfer chapter for details FTP This option provides access to the FTP file transfer utility Refer to the FTP File Transfer chapter for details Printer Setup This displays a dialog box which enables you to select any printer that is configured in Microsoft Windows in
315. pt scr in the example above ArgV1 contains 1 ArgV2 contains value2 and so on The ArgC and ArgV variables are predefined by the script language and so are not defined by the var command Just use the variable names in the program where applicable remembering that the number of the ArgV variable name must match the location number of the value that will be entered on the command line Itis up to the user to ensure that the values specified on the command line are in the right order so that they are assigned to the correct ArgV variables 12 3 Creating A Script File Script File Examples Log On Script To introduce scripting here is an example of probably the most obvious task to automate logging on to a host computer over a network hrcv hold pset network protocol protocol nodename nodename connect hemp 0 login put dave hemp 0 password put pericom hcmp 0 exit The hrcv command on the first line will be necessary in most cases when checking data from the host Because characters usually 1 only from the host are normally processed between lines of the script file it is normally necessary to include a hrev hold command to stop this i e to HOLD characters from being processed This will be in force EXCEPT during hemp and hget commands until another hrev command is encountered The pset command enables you to change most items on the Settings menus and also CURR
316. r after which the original settings will be reasserted ASCII ASCII file transfer enables characters to be sent with no handshaking unless XON XOFF is enabled or error checking ICL FTF The ICL FTF protocol supported by TeemTalk for Windows 3 1x can be used in any terminal emulation mode It requires the DOSLANTI TSR to be loaded but it is not necessary for the user interface providing you do not attempt to initiate a transfer Refer to the ICL FTF File Transfer chapter for details on how to use it File Transfer Sending Files The following procedure is used to transfer files from your PC to the host 1 Start the transfer procedure on the host computer and specify that files are to be received 2 Display the TeemTalk File menu on your PC and select File Transfer to display the Initiate File Transfer dialog box Initiate File Transfer x Transfer Protocol How e Kemit Send C Receive Parameters Operations General Remote Kermit Local Cancel 3 Select the transfer protocol you wish to use in the Transfer Protocol list box 4 Ifyou want to change the default parameter settings for the chosen transfer protocol click the relevant Parameters button and make your selections in the displayed dialog box then click OK See the section entitled Setting Protocol Parameters later in this chapter for details Note If the file transfer fails it is p
317. rd definition either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the control character for the Return key function CR carriage return can be entered by typing the characters and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code This could be used to define the keyword Login to enable you to log on to a host Login hostname M Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as 013 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references Key Combinations amp Sequences You can define a keyword to perform the function of a particular key a combination of keys or a sequence of keys For example you can define a keyword to perform the same function as pressing the key F4 or pressing the keys Alt F4 together or pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names appendix You may omit the VK VT etc parts of the name To define a keyword so that it will perform the function of a particular key type the character followed by the virtual key name then the character For example to define the keyword Insert so that it will perform the same function as th
318. re TeemTalk for a serial or network host connection Type Services CORE Serial Configure tior Note If you do not wish to make a host connection at this moment just click the Cancel button to close the dialog box You can display the New Connection dialog box again later by clicking File in the menu bar and selecting New Connection in the menu The Type option specifies whether a serial or network connection is to be made Clicking the arrow button will display a drop down list box containing all the possible settings The Services option specifies the port or network host node which TeemTalk is to communicate with This is a text box with an associated drop down list box You can either make a selection from the list box or enter a valid host name or internet address in the text box Note If you are unfamiliar with using dialog boxes and setup menus refer to the beginning of the Setup Menus chapter Making A Serial Host Connection To connect to a serial host select Serial in the Type list box default then select the Com port required in the Services list box Click the Configure button to display the Serial Settings dialog box shown overleaf and make sure the settings match that of the host Click OK to return to the New Connection dialog box then click the Connect button Getting Started Serial Settings Baud Rate Data Bits 2400 1 fe
319. re selection This description will also appear in the Open Session dialog box 5 Clickthe OK button to save the template settings If you specified the names of settings files that already exist a message box will ask you to confirm whether or not you want to overwrite the existing files with the new settings Startup Options The following dialog box will be displayed when this option is selected Startup ptions At Startup Connect from Saved Settings Display New Connection Dialog Display Open Session Dialog Cancel Edit This enables you specify whether TeemTalk is to make a host connection using the default connection template display the New Connection dialog box or display the Open Session dialog box when it is loaded but not when it is reset Refer to the relevant descriptions earlier in this section for information on these dialog boxes Clicking the Edit button will open a text editor window in which the contents of the TeemTalk private profile file containing startup settings will be displayed This enables you to make changes without leaving TeemTalk Note that changes will not take effect until the next time TeemTalk is loaded The text editor used by default is notepad exe You can specify a different text editor by modifying the Editor line in the command group headed Startup in the TeemTalk private profile file Note Refer to the Initialization Commands chapter for information on the
320. re the size of the file lt mode gt is a previously defined string variable which will store the mode lt modtime gt is a previously defined string variable which will store the time of the last modification lt uname gt is a previously defined string or integer variable which will store the user name lt gname gt is a previously defined string or integer variable which will store the group name Note that if you require a value which follows one or more that are not required you will still need to supply variables for them For example if you only wanted the time that the file was last modified you would need to specify a variable for size and mode as well as lt modtime gt You can use this command to check for the existence of a file For example to check the existence of the file myfile tmp you could specify the following file stat myfile tmp if errno 13 wrt did not find myfile tmp FILE WPUT Syntax FILE WPUT lt handle gt lt variable gt This will write the character assigned to a variable to a file where handle 15 the integer variable specified by the file open command and used to identify the file variable is a previously defined variable see var which contains the character to be written More than one variable may be specified to write successive characters to the file Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for t
321. rk ISDNDIALSUBADDRESS string Controller Card Number NETwork ISDNCONTROL 1 127 B1 Physical Layer NETwork ISDNB1 0 5 B2 Data Layer NETwork ISDNB2 0 5 B3 Network Layer NETwork ISDNB3 0 3 Local Dial Number NETwork ISDNLOCALNUMBER string Local Dial Sub Address NETwork ISDNLOCALSUBADDRESS string Channel NETwork ISDNUSECHAN 0 2 B1 Baud Rate NETwork ISDNBIRATE 0 65535 B1 Data Bits NETwork ISDNBILEVEL 0 65535 B1 Parity Bits NETwork ISDNBIPARITY 0 2 B1 Stop Bits NETwork ISDNBISTOPS 0 2 B2 Address A NETwork ISDNB2ADDRESS A 0 255 B2 Address B NETwork ISDNB2ADDRESS B 0 255 B2 Modulo 8 128 NETwork ISDNB2MODULO Oorl B2 Window Size NETwork ISDNB2WINDOWSIZE 0 255 B2 XID NETwork ISDNB2XID 0 65535 Lowest Incoming Ch NETwork ISDNB3LIC 0 65535 Highest Incoming Ch NETwork ISDNB3HIC 0 65535 B3 Lowest 2 Way Ch NETwork ISDNB3LTC 0 65535 B3 Highest 2 Way Ch NETwork ISDNB3HTC 0 65535 Lowest Outgoing Ch NETwork ISDNB3LOC 0 65535 Highest Outgoing Ch NETwork ISDNB3HOC 0 65535 B3 Modulo 8 128 NETwork ISDNB3MODULO Oorl B3 Window Size NETwork ISDNB3WINDOWSIZE 0 65535 Printer Settings GroupID ParamID Value Printer Device PRINTer DEVice string Default Printer PRINTer DEFault string Print Buffer PRINTer BUFFER immediate FormFeed Terminator PRINTer FFTerm boolean Use Print Manager PRINTer USEPrintman boolean Print Man Pass Through PRINTer PASSthru boolean Translate National
322. rminal ID Setting 7 26 TerminalReset 7 9 Terminal Server Settings files onclients 2 7 7 6 Terminal Settings 7 31 Text Cursor 2 22 Title 2 12 Disable 11 19 Toolbar Adding buttons 5 5 Assigningfunctions 5 6 Disable 11 20 Floating button palette 5 1 Predefined button tools 5 2 Redefining 5 5 Removing buttons 5 8 Using 5 1 Windowelement 2 15 Troubleshooting Display problems 2 3 Incompatibility message 1 RS232communications 3 Setup problems 1 V ViewDn Button 2 18 ViewUp Button 2 18 Virtual Key Names B 1 Standard 1 mode 2 VT220 mode 2 VT100 Mode Host command summary Selecting 2 9 VT220 Mode Host command summary Selecting 2 9 Virtual key names 2 52 Mode Host command summary Selecting 2 9 W W3220 Mode Host command summary Selecting 2 9 WIN INI Commands Summary 11 6 WIN INIFile 11 1 Command groups 11 2 Window Elements lt lt and gt gt 2 14 Border amp corners 2 20 E 6 E 13 Emulation workspace 2 21 Gincursor 2 23 Hotspots 4 4 Menu 2 13 Minimize amp maximize buttons 2 13 Scrollarrow 2 16 Scrollbar 2 16 Scroll box 2 16 Selecting amp using 2 12 Selectioncursor 2 22 Soft Buttons 2 16 Status bar 2 19 Textcursor 2 22 Title bar 2 12 Toolbar 2 15 Window Frame Disable 11 19 Window Resize 2 14 Index 9 X XMODEM 8 1 XMODEM IK 8 1 Y YMODEM Batch 8 2 Z ZMODEM 8 2 Zoom Button 2 17
323. robably because of differences between the local and remote parity and the word size 5 Select Send in the How box 6 Click the Start button to display the Send File dialog box File Transfer File Transfer Send File x Search specification ewin35 inst13 clp installl clp install2 clp d 10 inst11 clp inst12 clp install3 clp installd clp install5 clp install6 install clp 21 Cancel Files select Path select 7 Specify the directory which contains the file s for transfer in the right list box by clicking on one of the path options and clicking the Select button until the full directory path displayed above the list box is correct The files contained in this directory will be displayed in the left list box 8 Display the name s of the file s to send in the left list box either by using the scroll bar or by specifying a filename type e g exe for all files ending with exe in the Search specification text box then pressing Return or clicking the Select button Note Using the Search function will cause all filenames displayed in the list box to be automatically selected 9 Select the file to send by clicking on the filename in the left list box to highlight it If more than one file is to be sent hold down the Ctrl key while clicking each additional filename If the files for selection are listed contiguously point to the first file the
324. rporates an impressive range of additional features formulated to increase productivity and reduce network loading These include file transfer session capture and replay dynamic data exchange a toolbar hotspots soft buttons keyboard mapping mouse button definition connection templates customising capabilities a comprehensive script language and an optional Application Programming Interface APD 1 1 Introduction About This User s Guide This User s Guide describes how to use TeemTalk 05W TeemTalk 07W and TeemTalk 11W version 4 3 1 for Windows 3 1x 95 and NT The information contained in the following chapters applies equally to TeemTalk 05W TeemTalk 07W and TeemTalk 11W unless indicated otherwise The illustrations in this User s Guide that show the TeemTalk window or dialog boxes are shown in the Windows NT style The layout for Windows 3 1 and 95 will be very similar but if their are significant differences then these will be illustrated accord ingly If you require information on network protocols and facilities refer to the TeemTalk for Windows Networking Guide Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Introduction Introduces TeemTalk for Windows and the contents of this User s Guide Getting Started Describes how to use TeemTalk and configure it for compatibility with your hardware and the application Keyboard Configuration De
325. rs section lists the possible error numbers for this command DIRFIRST Syntax DIRFIRST filename lt size gt mode lt modtm gt lt uname gt lt gname gt This will get the first entry in the working directory and place it in the previously defined string variables where lt filename gt lt size gt lt mode gt lt modtime gt lt uname gt is a previously defined string variable see var which will store the name of the file This is the only variable that must be specified the others are optional is a previously defined string or integer variable which will store the size of the file is a previously defined string variable which will store the mode is a previously defined string variable which will store the time of the last modification is a previously defined string or integer variable which will store the user name UNIX only 12 28 Creating A Script File gname is a previously defined string or integer variable which will store the group name UNIX only Note that if you require a value which follows one or more that are not required you will still need to supply variables for them For example if you only wanted the time that the file was last modified you would need to specify a variable for size and mode as well as lt modtime gt Note that on a UNIX system the first entry is always This command can be followed by one or more dirnext commands to work
326. rtnerSentData szItemName lpPokeData Value FALSE PostMessage hWndPartnerDDE WM DDE hWnd MAKELONG 0 atomItem return Save value of fRelease since pointer may be invalidated by GlobalUnlock bRelease lpPokeData fRelease 13 7 Dynamic Data Exchange GlobalUnlock hPokeData if bRelease GlobalFree hPokeData PostMessage hwndPartnerDDE WM DDE ACK hwnd MAKELONG 0x8000 atomItem return The important call here is PartnerSentData which actually does the processing of the received data The IpPokeData Value parameter although defined in the DDE H file as a character array containing 1 character serves as a pointer to a larger block of data defined as follows a An INTEGER value reflecting the number of bytes of valid data sent followed by b The data This is done in clipboard TEXT format so each block of data is terminated with a CR a LF and a NULL The function returns TRUE if successful or FALSE if not Note that upon receipt of a FALSE return ClientReceivedPoke will send a negative DDE ACK message back to TeemTalk to reflect the failure Sending data to TeemTalk requires the client to posta WM DDE POKE message with a pointer to the data as defined previously i e the first 2 bytes constitute a integer count of the number of bytes of data followed by those bytes and appended wit
327. s Startup Options Select All Clear Buffer Capture File Replay File File Transfer Printer Setup Print Screen Print Buffer Auto Print Eject Page Run Script Exit Emulation Serial Terminal Dialag Gin Attributes Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Mouse Button Action Button Tools Help Contents How To Use Help About TeemTalk Setup Menus To display a menu Mouse Click the title of the menu required Keyboard Hold down the Alt key and press the key bearing the underlined character in the menu title For example pressing Alt F will display the File menu When the menu bar is not displayed you can still display the menus by pressing the following keys Alt F forthe File menu Alt E forthe Edit menu Alt S Settings menu Alt H forthe Help menu To close a menu Mouse Click anywhere outside the menu Keyboard Press the Alt key Using The Menus When you display a menu and move the cursor over the menu options the status bar at the bottom of the TeemTalk window will change to display a brief description of the option at the cursor position The menu options follow several conventions Options that are displayed dimmed are not applicable to the current mode of operation and cannot be selected An example of this is the Cancel Print option in the File menu This can only be selected after a print
328. s The setting of the Highlight When Actioned option determines whether or not a visual indication is given that a function has been actioned when a hotspot is clicked The Edit button becomes active when you select the Show Hotspots or Action Hotspot setting Clicking the Edit button will open a text editor window in which the contents of the current hotspot definition file will be displayed This enables you to make changes without having to leave TeemTalk The text editor used by default is notepad exe You can specify a different text editor by modifying the Editor line in the TeemTalk private profile file 7 55 Setup Menus Button Tools Button Tools Current Tool Connection Delete Current Buttons Commands New Connection Insert at Current pen Session Paste Shift Ins Add Custom Patterns Print Buffer Jelete Print Screen Printer Setup Replay File Reset Terminal Run Script 21 Cancel ustom B Visible This dialog box is displayed by selecting Button Tools in the Settings menu This enables you to redefine the button tools displayed in the toolbar or floating button palette Up to 64 buttons can be defined For a complete description of how to use the toolbar and floating button palette refer to the chapter entitled The Toolbar A button tool is defined in two stages The first stage is to specify the button bitm
329. s You can program a button tool to perform the function of a combination or sequence of keys For example you can cause a button to perform the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together or pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names appendix The name has to be enclosed by the and characters in the Current Tool text box You may omit the VK VT parts etc of the virtual key name To program a button so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more other keys together type the character followed by the virtual key names linked together with characters and ending with the gt character For example to program a button so that when it is clicked it performs the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together enter the following characters in the Current Tool text box lt ALT F4 gt To program a button so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of keys one after the other enter each virtual key name in the order required enclosing each virtual key name with the lt and gt characters Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces For example to program a button so that when it is clicked it performs the same function as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following characters in the Current Tool text box lt F2 gt lt F3 gt lt
330. s a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation INFOConnect and Unisys are trademarks of Unisys Corporation Microsoft and MS DOS are registered trademarks and Windows and Excel are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation NEWT is a trademark of NetManage Inc OSLAN is a registered trademark of ICL Path Way is a trademark of the Wollongong Group Inc PC TCP is a registered trademark of FTP Software Inc PowerStation is a trademark of KEA Systems Prime is a registered trademark and PT250 is a trademark of Prime Computer Inc Reflection is a registered trademark of Walker Richer amp Quinn Inc Retrographics and VT640 are registered trademarks of Digital Engineering Inc Sun PC NFS and NFS are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc Tandem NonStop and LXN are trademarks of Tandem Computers Inc TeleVideo is a registered trademark and TeleVideo 910 910 and 925 are trademarks of TeleVideo Systems Inc Tektronix is a registered trademark of Tektronix Inc Westward is a registered trademark of Telemetrix Inc WordPerfect is a trademark of WordPerfect Corporation WYSE is a registered trademark and WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 are trademarks of Wyse Technology Inc other product names are trademarks of their respective manufacturers 1988 2003 Neoware UK Ltd Rights Reserved Before reproduction of this material in part or in whole obtain written consent from Neoware UK Ltd
331. s between applications such as a spreadsheet querying a database application for accounts past due The following hypothetical example illustrates two co operating Windows DDE applications as seen from the user s point of view A Microsoft Excel spreadsheet user wishes to track the price of a particular stock on the Stock Exchange The user also has the Quote application which gives access to Stock Exchange data The DDE conversation between Excel and Quote takes place as follows 1 The user initiates the conversation by supplying the name of the application Quote that will supply the data and the particular topic of interest PRICES The resulting DDE conversation is used to request quotes on specific stocks Excel broadcasts the application and topic names to all DDE applications currently running in the system Quote will respond recognising that the target application name matches it s own establishing a conversation with Excel relating to the PRICES topic The user can then request that the spreadsheet be automatically updated when ever a particular stock quotation changes by entering a spreadsheet formula in a cell For example the user could request an automatic update whenever a change in the selling price of EG s stock occurs by specifying the following Excel formula Quote l PRICES EG The user can terminate the automatic updating of the EG stock quotation at any time Other data links that were established separa
332. s entered then clicking OK will cause the remote commands understood by the host to be displayed Space This enables you to specify the area for the host to display disk usage information on Type This enables you to specify the names of files to be typed on the host Who This enables you to enquire who is currently using the host Finish When this command is actioned the remote Kermit will exit server mode Logout This command will execute a logout on the remote host Bye This command will execute a logout on the remote host and close the Kermit program 8 18 File Transfer Local Operation Local System Directory Change Directory x Specification Directories 2 Cancel e windS Clicking the Local button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box will display a dialog box which enables you to specify the default local directory for sending and receiving files The current directory is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box The Specification text box is used to specify which files in the current directory are displayed in the Files selection box For example to display all the files with the extension exe type exe then click the Dir cd button To change the current directory scroll through the available directories in the Directories list box then either click the name of the directory once so that it is highlighted and click the Dir cd button or double click the na
333. s that operate on file based documents the topic is usually a file name For other applications the topic is an application specific name A DDE data item is the actual information related to the conversation topic that is exchanged between applications Values for the data item can be passed from the server to the client or from the client to the server Once a DDE conversation has begun the client can establish one or more permanent data links with the server A data link is a communication mechanism by which the server notifies the client that the value of a given data item has changed The data link is considered as permanent because this notification process continues until the data link or the DDE conversation itself is terminated Hot amp Warm DDE Links There are two kinds of permanent data links Hot and Warm In the case of a Warm data link when the server application detects that the value of a data item has changed it will notify the client that a change has occurred but will not actually send the new value for that data item The onus here is on the client application to decide whether or not it will take the new value Only upon receipt of a positive response from the client will the server transmit the new value for the data item In contrast to this with a Hot link the server will automatically pass onto the client the new value for a data item immediately its value changes There are two methods acceptable to TeemTalk f
334. save the current setup configuration so that it can be reasserted when TeemTalk is subsequently reset or loaded SEED Syntax SEED integer This will reset the random number generator seed to the integer specified as a string or variable See also the description of the rand command 12 58 Creating A Script File SETINI Syntax SETINI section entry setting ini file gt This enables you set a setting in an initialization file where section is a string or string variable which specifies the heading of the command group for example tt07w for TeemTalk 07W initialization commands in the WIN INI file or startup default for TeemTalk 07W32 initialization commands in the TT07W INI file entry is a string or string variable which specifies the initialization command for example protocol setting is the setting of the command which may be a string integer or vari able ini file gt is a string or string variable which specifies the name of the initializa tion file This may be omitted if itis the default file WIN INI Windows 3 1 or TTO7W INI Windows 95 or NT The following example will set the protocol setting in the Windows 3 1 WIN INI file to cterm setini tt07w protocol cterm The following example will set the protocol setting in the Windows 95 or NT TTO7W INI file to tepip setini startup default protocol tepip tt07w ini The Error Numbers appendix
335. scribes how to configure TeemTalk for your particular keyboard remap key functions and compose special characters Mouse Functions Describes the special functions assigned to the mouse buttons by TeemTalk and how to redefine the buttons The Toolbar Describes how to use the toolbar and redefine the buttons Hotspots Describes the hotspot facility which enables functions to be performed by clicking on keywords displayed on the screen Setup Menus Describes all the commands and setup dialog boxes that can be accessed via drop down menus in the menu bar File Transfer Describes how to transfer files using the Kermit XMODEM XMODEM 1K YMODEM Batch ZMODEM and ASCII protocols Introduction Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E ICL FTF File Transfer Describes the ICL FTF file transfer utility supported by TeemTalk for Windows 3 1x in all terminal emulation modes FTP File Transfer Describes the FTP interface for file transfer across Windows Sockets based networks Initialization Commands Describes commands that can be included in the initialization file and on the command line to specify the loading configuration for TeemTalk Creating A Script File Describes how to create a script file to automate certain activities such as logging onto remote computers Dynamic Data Exchange Describes the support of d
336. sk you to confirm whether or not you want to overwrite the existing files with the new settings Problem Random characters appear on the screen when running my application Solution Check that the terminal emulation mode selected in the Emulation Set tings dialog box is set to the correct one for the application TeemTalk defaults to the VT100 emulation Check that the settings in the Serial Settings dialog box match that of the host Troubleshooting Problem Solution Problem Solution Problem Solution Problem Solution Problem Solution How do I run a 4010 program Display the Emulation Settings dialog box and select Tek as the emula tion then display the Dialog Settings dialog box and set the Dialog Area Enabled option to 0 zero The text background colour is incorrect Select the required text colour indices in the Attributes dialog box then display the Dialog Settings dialog box and select Dialog Indices Locked The Gin cursor is too small TeemTalk displays a small crosshair cursor by default You can change the size of the cursor by using the following initialization file command or command line option Initialization file command CrosshairSize 4096 Command line option 1 4096 The position of text is incorrect and or the wrong line is displayed when scrolling through the text Try changing the setting of the Cursor Origin option in the Dialog Settings dialog
337. speed GetBaudRate int iBaud if BaudID GetSetting hWnd return 1 switch BaudID case B110 iBaud break case B300 iBaud break case 600 iBaud break case B1200 iBaud break 13 10 hwndPartner Dynamic Data Exchange case B2400 iBaud 2400 break case 4800 iBaud 4800 break case B9600 iBaud 9600 break case B19200 iBaud 19200 break return iBaud Example 2 Read the currently defined Answerback string and place in given buffer GetAnswerback LPSTR szAnswer int iAnsLen ATOM aAnswer int iStrLen aAnswer ATOM GetSetting hWnd hWndPartner IDM EMUL ANSSTRING 0 if aAnswer 1 return 1 iStrLen GlobalGetAtomName aAnswer szAnswer iAnsLen GlobalDeleteAtom aAnswer return iStrLen 13 11 Dynamic Data Exchange Example 3 key values are defined using key macro identifiers as documented in the Key Reference Numbers appendix Read the keyboard macro assigned to the Shift F6 key sequence Note The highlighted characters Slave hWwndSlaveDDE are only applicable to TeemTalk for Windows 3 1 They are not to be included when using Windows 95 or NT char buf 128 ReadKbdMacro 141 LPSTR buf 127 ReadKbdMacro int iKeyMacro Key to be redefined LPSTR szKbdMacro Pointer to redefinition string int iMacroLen Max allowed Length of szMacroString
338. st is long a scroll bar may be displayed To make a selection using the keyboard press the up or down arrow keys to cycle through the available settings until the one required is highlighted in the box To select a dialog box option Mouse Click the check box button or list box The current setting is high lighted or surrounded by a dotted rectangle or both Keyboard Press the Tab key to move forward through the options left to right top to bottom or Shift Tab to move backwards until the required option is highlighted or surrounded by a dotted rectangle or both Press the Spacebar to toggle check boxes or buttons on or off To close a dialog box without actioning changes Mouse Click the Cancel button Keyboard Press the Tab or Shift Tab keys to move the cursor until it rests over the Cancel button and press Return or the Spacebar To close a dialog box and action changes Mouse Click the OK button Keyboard Press Return Default Settings TeemTalk is supplied with the setup options set to factory default If these have been altered since and you wish to reassert the original settings of all the options display the File menu and select the Factory Default option Some dialog boxes include a Default button to enable the factory default settings of options contained in the dialog box to be reasserted Setup Menus Creating A Connection Template You can save the current session configura
339. stead of just the default printer Printer Setup Pri bk m OK ANPRINTSSHP4 P P4 PS Acrobat PDPwiriter on LPT1 Cancel Distiller Assistant v3 01 on NDISTASST PS Setup iii Save New Default EomFeed Terminator Through Print Action Use Print Manager PassThru Translate National Character Auto Line Feed o seconds Close Delay Note You specify a different printer which TeemTalk will use by default instead of that specified in the Control panel by including the printer details on a devicez line in the initialization file 7 14 Setup Menus The currently selected printer is the TeemTalk default printer if specified or the printer specified in the Control panel when the dialog box is displayed for the first time after TeemTalk is loaded or reset otherwise it is the printer that was last used Selecting a printer other than the default printer will enable the Save New Default option If you click the OK button when this option is selected the currently highlighted printer will become the new default printer If you want to keep the original printer as the default uncheck this box before clicking OK The Microsoft Windows Print Manager normally controls all print formatting translates host characters to supported printer characters and also provides a spooling facility A disadvantage of using the Print Manager is that any print formatting escape sequences receive
340. success 0 RETURN PUT set file type binary_r HCMP 60 C Kermit gt 12 9 Creating A Script File IF errno MSGBOX set file type binary did not get C Kermit gt prompt 1 reply LET success 0 RETURN RETURN LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLILI Setting Kermit to server lab3 LET success 1 PUT server r HCMP 60 reconnect n r n IF errno LET success 0 MSGBOX setting remote Kermit to server failed 1 reply RETURN ase fae fae fe ee eae oe ae fae fe eae eae fae ak ae ae eae eae aka a ae oe ak Remote Send a filename using Kermit k k lab4 LET success 1 FTU INITIATE FTU SET TRANSFER KERMIT IF errno LET success 0 MSGBOX Could not set TRANSFER mode to KERMIT 1 reply GOTO lab6 FTU SET HOW SEND IF errno LET success 0 MSGBOX Failed to set HOW parameter to SEND 1 reply GOTO lab6 FTU START files IF errno LET success 0 LET message remote SEND failed errno errno MSGBOX message 1 reply GOTO lab6 12 10 Creating A Script File ELSE MSGBOX remote SEND successful 1 reply lab6 FTU CANCEL RETURN Take Kermit out of server mode ess se se ofe ot oie oe o se ze zie oie oe oe oe oe o re c o oie oe oe oes ze o oie oe ae oe aie ok lab5 LET success 1 FTU INITIATE FTU SET TRANSFER KERMIT IF
341. t cfFormat BYTE Value 1 This member was named rgb 1 in previous versions of DDE H DDEPOKE In order to supply the three values expected by TeemTalk we have defined a DDE MOUSE REPORT structure as follows typedef struct DDE MOUSE REPORT int Y int ButtonID DDEMOUSEREPORT FAR LPDDEMOUSERPORT This needs to be integrated with the DDEPOKE structure when allocating the memory required to transfer this data to TeemTalk One way of doing this is shown below Allocate size of DDE data header plus the mouse hit data terminated by CR LF NULL The NULL is counted by DDEPOKE Value 1 if hPokeData GlobalAlloc GMEM_MOVEABLE GMEM_DDESHARE 13 19 Dynamic Data Exchange LONG sizeof DDEPOKE sizeof DDEMOUSEREPORT 2 return if lpPokeData DDEPOKE FAR GlobalLock hPokeData GlobalFree hPokeData return MouseReport X Coord x MouseReport Y Coord y MouseReport ButtonID ButtonDown fmemcpy lpPokeData gt Value amp BYTE far MouseReport sizeof DDEMOUSEREPORT There is no limit checking on the values of X and Y so the values passed through to TeemTalk must be within the valid range for the application that is to receive the mouse hit Valid values for the button press ButtonID are shown below Any values out of
342. t data is being sent to or from the host It will show dull green when there is no activity red when data is being sent to the host and bright green when data is being received from the host Making A Network Host Connection To connect to a network host node select the protocol required in the Type list box TeemTalk for Windows 95 and NT TCP IP CTERM WinSock 2 NetBIOS MultiLan ISDN LAT Microsoft SNA TeemTalk OSI option TeemTalk for Windows 3 1x LAT NetBIOS B and W TCP INFOConnect FTP PC TCP OSLAN WinSock ISDN Sun PC NFS TELAPI Ext NCSI DOSLANTI LAN W Place BAPI Eicon X25 MultiLan NetManage Interrupt 14 IPX SPX PathWay INT6B NASI NetWare for LAT CTERM LanManager TeemTalk OSI Note Refer to the Network Connection chapter in the Networking Guide for a description of each protocol supported and for any additional configuration required prior to making a connection The Services list box in the New Connection dialog box will display the devices on the network which use the currently selected protocol Click the name of the device required or in the case of TELAPI enter an Internet address in the text box for example 128 127 126 2 Note that either the host name or IP address may be entered for TCP IP connections When Eicon X25 is selected TeemTalk requires you to enter a valid address as none will be listed The Telnet Options button becomes available when a Telnet protocol is selected in the Type list box The di
343. tails The Menu Bar The menu bar provides access to a series of commands and dialog boxes which enable you to perform various functions and configure TeemTalk for compatibility with the application One of four menus may be displayed at any one time These are headed File Edit Settings and Help To display a menu Mouse Click the title of the menu required Keyboard Hold down the Alt key and press the key bearing the underlined character in the menu title For example pressing Alt F will display the File menu When the menu bar is not displayed you can still display the menus by pressing the following keys Alt F forthe File menu Alt E forthe Edit menu Alt S forthe Settings menu Alt H forthe Help menu 2 13 Getting Started Edit Factory Default v Clipboard Text Emulation Reset Terminal Clipboard Graphics Serial New DDE Row Terminal bie s DDE Column Copy Dialog Open Session Gin 3 Gin Copy Attributes RAT Keyboard Macros Save Session As Select All Be Startup Opti Soft Buttons chose Clear Buffer Mouse Button Action Capture File Button Tools Replay File File Transfer ETES ibs Setup Help Contents Erint creen How To Use Help Print Buffer Auto Print About TeemTalk Eject Page Run Script Exit When you display a menu and move the cursor over the menu options the status bar
344. tal of 48 programmable buttons You can display all four levels at the same time if required levels are accessible even if not all are displayed levels stored off screen can be scrolled into view by clicking the Level button You can specify how many levels of soft buttons are actually displayed by using an initialization file command or command line option The soft buttons are programmed using the Soft Buttons dialog box which is displayed by selecting Settings in the menu bar then Soft Buttons Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for information on programming the buttons 2 16 Getting Started The soft buttons can be removed from the display by unchecking the Visible check box in the Soft Buttons dialog box The soft buttons can be detached as a separate window by deselecting the Attached option in the Soft Buttons dialog box E Soft Buttons TeemTalk TT07w Untitled x Level 1 GErase DErase DVisib Cancel Setup Zoon ViewDn RstView DefView Patterns Print If you close the Soft Buttons window you can display it again by selecting the Soft Buttons option in the Settings menu checking the Visible check box then clicking OK The current position and size of the Soft Buttons window can be saved so that it is displayed the same way the next time TeemTalk is loaded To do this select the Save Session As option in the File menu make sure the Soft Buttons option is checked in the resulting dialog b
345. tely will still remain active under the same PRICES conversation The user can also terminate the entire conversation between Excel and Quote on the PRICES topic so that no specific data links may be subsequently established on that topic without initiating a new conversation 13 2 Dynamic Data Exchange DDE Terminology In order to achieve a degree of understanding of the concepts of DDE it is important to have a grasp of some of the terminology used to describe the protocol Two applications co operating in a DDE link are considered to be engaged in a DDE conversation The application that initiates the conversation is the client application and the responding application is the DDE server application An application can be engaged in several conversations at the same time and is capable of acting both as a client in some conversations and as a server in others The units of data that are passed between client and server DDE applications are identified by a three level hierarchy of item topic and application name Each DDE conversation can be uniquely defined by the application name and topic As discussed in the previous example at the beginning of a DDE conversation the client and server agree upon the application name and topic The application name is usually the name of the server application The topic is a general classification of data within which multiple data items may be exchanged during conversation For application
346. ter graphics text ESC FF Deselect vector mode amp enter graphics text US Select alpha mode ESC 2 Select alpha mode amp erase alpha memory ESC EOT Select GIN mode ESC SUB Select graphics text amp erase graphics memory ESC FF Select graphics text mode ESC 1 Select point plot mode FS E 13 Host Command Summary Select terminal emulation mode ESC 96 CODE Host 0 Tek 1 ANSI 2 Edit 3 VT52 5 VTIOON 6 VT220N 7 VT220M7 8 VT220M8 POINT PLOT MODE HOST PRIMARY SETUP Select marker type ESC M SURFACES amp COLOURS HOST PRIMARY SETUP Assign colour to overlay alternate set index ESC F Assign colour to overlay principal set index ESC Assign colour to overlay principal alt set index ESC L Overwrite alternative colour index set ESC N Protect surfaces ESC W Select colour set amp surface visibility ESC D Select combined surface amp writing colour index ESC C Select overlaid surface amp display priority ESC P Select overlaid surface amp writing surface ESC O VECTOR MODE HOST PRIMARY SETUP Activate area fill ESCIF Define fill pattern Define line style ESCIL Define line style ESC ACK Deselect block fill ESCETX Deselect write through amp selective erase ESC SOH Enable selective erase ESC DLE Enable write through mode ESCNAK Generate arc or circle ESCIAQ Select block fill ESC STX Select fill pattern ESC P Select line t
347. ters that are supported by TeemTalk Introduction The following pages show the character sets that are supported when TeemTalk is in Tek Alpha or VT220 Alpha overall mode as explained below The mode in which each set is valid is indicated in brackets under the heading TeemTalk can emulate either a Tek 4100 series terminal or a DEC VT220 terminal The software will switch automatically between these two overall modes only when particular sub mode switches take place These are the switches which require the terminal emulation to change from Tek to DEC VT220 The sub modes of the two emulations are as follows Tek Sub Modes VT220 Sub Modes VT52 VT52 ANSI VT100 VT100 EDIT VT220 7 Bit TEK VT220 8 Bit Each character set consists of a series of control characters and displayable charac ters Displayable characters are alphanumeric symbolic or graphic characters that can be displayed on the screen or printed by a hardcopy device Control characters enable the terminal emulation or the printer to perform specific tasks such as a line feed or carriage return These will be actioned when received from the host or when TeemTalk is in local mode and they are entered from the keyboard Note When the Display Controls option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is selected a representation of most control characters received will be displayed on the screen instead of actioned Character Sets To enter a control character fro
348. that are also euro compliant 7 49 Setup Menus Soft Buttons Soft Buttons Name Command Bi GERASE Local B2 DErase DERASE Local B3 kTK_DVISIB gt IA e B4 Cancel _ lt TK_CANCEL gt 19 Local B5 Setup lt TK_SETUP gt Local Level B amp Zoom TKzoo W Loca 41 2 B7 Lec 4 B amp VIEWDOWN Local RsView lt TK ASTVIEW gt I7 Local Visible 10 DEFVIEWS Local v Attached B11 PATTERNS Loca Tile B12 Print lt TK_PRINT gt Local This dialog box is displayed by selecting Soft Buttons in the Settings menu A set of soft buttons is displayed at the bottom of the TeemTalk window by default These can be programmed so that they perform various functions when clicked The soft button display can be switched on or off using the Visible check box The soft buttons can be detached as a separate window by deselecting the Attached option ERTE x Level 1 GErase DErase DVisib Cancel Setup Zoon 2 MieuDn RstView DefUieu Patterns Print There are four soft button levels Level 1 is displayed by default Each level consists of twelve programmable buttons providing a combined total of 48 programmable buttons You can display all four levels at the same time if required
349. the ASCII decimal value of the first character in lt sourcevar gt integer float lt destvar gt will contain the result of rounding the floating point number in lt sourcevar gt to the nearest integer float integer lt destvar gt will contain the floating point number equivalent of the integer in lt sourcevar gt DDE CANCEL Syntax DDE CANCEL lt channel gt Cancels the DDE conversation on the channel specified by the lt channel gt variable as defined by the dde initiate command If no channel variable is specified then the channel ID is assumed to be 1 More than one channel variable may be specified on the same line The system flag will be set to TRUE if the command is successful or FALSE if failed DDE EXECUTE Syntax DDE EXECUTE lt instructions gt lt channel gt This command specifies a list of instructions that the DDE partner should perform where lt instructions gt is either a string delimited by single quote characters containing the instructions or a string variable excluding single quotes lt channel gt is the name of the integer variable identifying the particular channel for the DDE link if specified by the dde initiate command other wise this is omitted The following example will cause an Excel file called expenses xls to be opened on channel 1 dde execute open h Vexcel excelcbtYexpenses xls channel1 DDE INITIATE Syntax DDE INITIATE app topic lt chann
350. the Commands list box The buttons displayed in the toolbar by default are defined with some of the functions listed in the setup menus These enable you to quickly action a command or display a setup dialog box without having to display the menu first The Commands list box displays all the menu items that can be assigned to the buttons To assign a function to a button make sure that the button bitmap required is displayed in the Current Tool box enter the new definition in the associated text box or select a menu command from the Commands list box then click the Change Current button to action the change The toolbar will not be updated until you click the OK button to close the dialog box Entering Control Characters You can enter a control character in a button tool definition either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the control character for the Return key function CR carriage return can be entered by typing the characters and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as 013 Refer to the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references Toolbar Key Combinations amp Sequence
351. the name of your version of TeemTalk software title the name of the session currently running subtitle in brackets and an indication of the current host connection host name IP address or COM port You may specify a different title or subtitle on the command line for loading TeemTalk or in the initialization file Refer to the Initialization Commands chapter for details 2 12 Getting Started The Minimize amp Maximize Buttons These buttons are used by the mouse to shrink the window to an icon or increase the window to the maximum size possible while still displaying the number of lines and columns specified in setup the default setting being 80 columns by 32 lines The equivalent keyboard functions are enabled via the Control menu Note The number of lines and columns displayed is affected by the setting of the Resize Font Rows and Columns options in the Dialog Settings dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details Once the window has been iconized it can be restored to its original state by double clicking the icon When the window has been maximized the maximize button changes to show an up and down arrow Clicking the button now will restore the window to its previous size Note You can cause the window to be minimized maximized or fill the display area when TeemTalk is first started by using an initialization file command or command line option Refer to the Initialization Commands chapter for de
352. the toolbar via the Button Tools dialog box Refer to the chapter entitled The Toolbar for a complete description The toolbar can be pulled away from the menu bar and floated on the display by positioning the mouse pointer anywhere in the toolbar except on a button holding down the left mouse button then dragging the pointer down until the toolbar outline changes shape Releasing the mouse button will display the floating button palette The floating button palette contains the same buttons as the toolbar You can move and resize the palette in the same way as any other window To convert the floating button palette back into the toolbar click the control menu box at the top left corner of the palette window and select Attach If you click the shutdown button on the floating button palette you can restore display of the tool buttons by selecting the Button Tools option in the Settings menu and checking the Visible option in the dialog box 2 15 Getting Started The Scroll Bar The scroll bar enables you to display alphanumeric data that is above or below the view of the dialog area The dialog area is window into the dialog buffer which is used to store alphanumeric data The dialog area may fill the entire emulation Workspace or consist of only two lines The scroll bar represents the entire buffer You can specify the size of the dialog buffer and the number of lines actually displayed the dialog area in the Dialog Setti
353. there are no more directory entries then the variable will be set to zero length 12 29 Creating A Script File DSP Syntax DSP integer If the integer is 1 all the program lines that follow are displayed and actioned If the integer is 0 all following lines are actioned but not displayed ELSE Syntax ELSE This command is used in conjunction with the if command and informs the program to perform the command s on the following line s if a previously specified if condition was not true For example if integer gt 3 goto routinel else goto routine2 If more than one command line is to be associated with else insert a line containing the open curly brace character before the first command line and a line containing the close curly brace character following the last command line For example if integer gt 3 goto routinel else inc integer goto routine2 The if command may be used on the same line as else for example if N 1 X 2 else if N 2 4 else X 1 12 30 Creating A Script File ENCRYPT Syntax ENCRYPT result lt string gt key Encrypts a string where result is a previously defined string variable see var which will store the encrypted string lt string gt is a string or string variable containing the string to encrypt lt key gt is one or more characters that are used to define how the string is encrypted
354. this range will result in the DDE_POKE failing 0 Left Mouse Button 1 Centre Mouse Button 2 Right Mouse Button It is important to note that the host application receiving these mouse hit reports must be able to recognize them The reports will be sent in a format appropriate to TeemTalk s current mode of operation For example when TeemTalk 07W is in W3220 mode the reports would be in Westward 3220 format whilst in Tek mode the reports would be in Tek format The SendMouseStr function is an alternative string version of SendMouse The information sent with the data message is a string a decimal values in the form x y n where n indicates the mouse button as listed earlier Send Send is a straightforward POKE of data which must be terminated with a CR LF NULL sequence to keep in line with the CF_TEXT data format Note however that these three characters will not get dispatched through to the host Receive Receive is a WARM HOT link function via the WM_DDE_ADVISE and subsequent WM_DDE_DATA messages All data received by TeemTalk once reception of the WM_DDE_ADVISE message has been acknowledged will be acted upon as normal but with one important addition The data will also be buffered until the specified termination character s is 13 20 Dynamic Data Exchange are received and then all of the buffered data will be dispatched to the Client DDE application that established the link The termination characters are CR
355. tialization file command CrosshairSize size Command line option Xsize 2 23 Getting Started Notes 2 24 Keyboard Configuration Keyboard Configuration This chapter describes how to configure TeemTalk for your particular keyboard remap key functions and compose special characters Introduction TeemTalk maps the keyboard to be as near as possible to the terminal being emulated The illustrations on the following pages show how the 83 84 key AT 101 102 key Enhanced AT and DEC LK250 450 keyboard layouts are mapped in DEC 100 VT220 Edit and Tek modes The mapping for other layouts can be displayed by using the Show Map option in the Keyboard Macros dialog box as described later in the Remapping The Keyboard section You can remap the keyboard as required and functions that may not be represented on the keyboard can be assigned to specific keys TeemTalk for Windows 3 1x supports the Digital LK250 and LK450 keyboards and the KEA Systems PowerStation keyboard If a driver for one of these is loaded TeemTalk scans the SYSTEM INI file to see if the string LK250 LK450 or PowerStation is present and maps the keyboard accordingly TeemTalk for Windows 95 or NT will interrogate the system registry to see if LK450 drivers are installed If LK450 drivers are installed then the keyboard will be mapped accordingly Note When running TeemTalk with the LK250 or LK450 keyboard it is imperative that the
356. time but the process will be slow as the language will have to constantly swap between them Refer to the Error Numbers section for a list of possible error numbers FTP DISCONNECT Syntax FTP DISCONNECT boolean This will close an FTP connection between TeemTalk and the host previously initiated by the ftp connect command The optional boolean parameter can be used to shut the FTP module down By default false it keeps running 12 39 Creating A Script File Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command FTP GET Syntax FTP GET lt mode gt remote file gt lt local file gt This will transfer a file from the currently connected host as initiated by the ftp connect command where lt mode gt sets the transfer mode to ASCII BINARY or TENEX This can be omitted if the correct mode is already set lt remote file gt is the name of the remote file to be transferred which can include the full directory path lt local file gt can be used to specify a local filename and directory path for the transferred file This should be specified if you are transferring a file from a VAX system The following example will set the transfer mode to binary and transfer the file yourfile tmp ftp get binary yourfile tmp Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command FTP PUT
357. ting 4096 These commands enable you to specify the size of the graphics cursor where size is a numeric value in the range 1 to 4096 i e world coordinates 11 23 Initialization Disable Graphics Show Through Initialization File hideGraphics on Command Line g Default Setting Graphics shows through alpha These commands will prevent graphics from showing through dialog area data that has a background colour index other than 0 The commands do not apply to TeemTalk 05W or TeemTalk 05W32 Segment Memory Size Initialization File SegmentMemorySize size Command Line smsize Default Setting 256 kilobytes These commands specify the amount of available segment memory in 1 kilobyte blocks The minimum segment memory size that can be specified is 256 kilobytes the maximum is 2048 kilobytes The commands do not apply to TeemTalk 05W or TeemTalk 05W32 Maximum Number Of Segments In Memory Initialization File MaxSegments Command Line sn Default Setting 8000 These commands specify the maximum number of segments that can be stored in segment memory The maximum number cannot exceed 16000 The commands do not apply to TeemTalk 05W or TeemTalk 05W32 11 24 Initialization Commands Keyboard amp Mouse LK450 Keyboard Initialization File LK450keyboard yes Command Line 450 Default Setting Not applicable These commands enable you to specify that an LK450 key
358. tings 7 4 7 8 DefView Button 2 18 DErase Button 2 17 DetectCarrier 7 28 Dialog Area 80 132 column width 7 36 Auto wrap 7 35 Buffersize 7 37 Cursor origin mode 7 36 Cursorstyle 7 36 Description 2 21 Enable 7 37 Erasing contents of 2 17 Linesvisible 7 37 Lockcolourindices 7 35 Scrolling speed 7 35 Visibility 2 17 7 36 Dialog Settings 7 35 Display Control codes 7 26 Euro sign 3 15 7 49 Hotspots 6 1 Resize effect on font 7 36 Index 2 Index Scroll bar on maximized 7 32 Textattributes 7 40 Window sizeinrows 7 36 DVisib Button 2 17 Dynamic Data Exchange 13 1 E Edit Menu 7 21 Edit Mode Selecting 2 9 Editing Text 7 21 Emulation Settings 7 25 Emulation Workspace 2 21 Enhanced AT Keyboard Mapping DEC VT220 mode 3 4 Tek VT100 amp Edit mode 3 5 Environment Variables Settings files 2 7 7 6 Error Messages Scriptfile 12 67 Euro Sign 3 15 7 49 F Factory Default Setup 7 4 FileCapture Replay 7 13 File Menu 7 8 File Transfer 10 1 9 1 File Transfer Utility ASCII parameters 8 12 General parameters 8 8 Kermitparameters 8 10 Kermit remote operations 8 17 Local operation 8 19 Protocolparameters 8 8 Receivingfiles 8 5 Sending files 8 3 ZModem parameters 8 14 Fill Patterns 2 18 Floating Button Palette 5 1 Adding buttons 5 5 Assigning functions 5 6 Redefining buttons 5 5 Removing buttons 5 8 Using 5 1 Flow Control 7 27 Fonts Effect of window resize 7 36 FTF Fi
359. tion as a connection template To make TeemTalk automatically attempt to make a host connection using the same settings the next time it is loaded display the File menu and select the Save Session option TeemTalk enables you to create multiple connection templates one of which can be used either when TeemTalk is loaded or while it is running The procedure is as follows 1 Inthe File menu select the Save Session As option to display the following dialog box Save As File Name tt07w Description Untitled Cancel Saved Items Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Attributes Window Metrics M Test Rows Buffer Rows Connection v Terminal Settings Settings File t07w 2 Inthe Saved Items box indicate which user preference settings are to be saved by checking the boxes next to the relevant options 3 IntheSettings File text box specify the name of the terminal emulation settings file and the directory path if different from the default which is to store settings only affecting the terminal emulation The default filename is tt w nv where is either 05 07 or 11 depending on your version of TeemTalk Note There is no need to specify file extensions as defaults are applied when the files are created 4 Inthe Save As File Name text box specify the name of the workspace settings file and the directory path if different from the default which is to store the user
360. to file FILE WRITE Write variable contents to file FILE TRANSFER FTU CANCEL Release current links to the file transfer utility FTU GET Get the value of the specified parameter FTU INITIATE Link up to the file transfer utility 12 20 Creating A Script File FTU SET Set the value of the specified parameter FTU START Start the file transfer FTP FILE TRANSFER FTP CD Change current local remote directory FTP CONNECT Connect to specified host FTP COPYDLG Display message box during file transfer FTP DIRFIRST Get first entry in local remote directory FTP DIRNEXT Get next entry in local remote directory FTP DISCONNECT Close connection with host FTP GET Get the specified file from the remote host FTP PUT Send the specified file to the remote host FTP RM Remove the specified local remote file FTP SET Set the transfer mode to ASCII binary or Tenex FTP TOOL Display FTP dialog box FTP WD Get the local remote working directory HOST CHARACTERS HCMP Enter terminal emulation and wait for string from host HGET Get character from host and place in variable HRCV Specifies treatment of received host characters KEYBOARD CHARACTERS amp FUNCTIONS INP Display prompt and place entered characters in variable KACT Perform function of key as if pressed by terminal operator KBD Type string from keyboard to host KGET Get character from keyboard and place in variable KINTERCEPT Intercept amp store keys
361. toggled on and off either by clicking the Setup button at the bottom of the TeemTalk window or by pressing the keys Alt Z together Configuration is achieved by entering a command at the asterisk prompt followed by one or more values The valid commands that can be entered are listed in the Command Summary appendix alongside the equivalent host commands You can display the current setup configuration by entering STAT short for status at the asterisk prompt and hitting Return Changes made to the Primary Setup configuration are automatically reflected in the Settings dialog boxes and vice versa 2 11 Getting Started The TeemTalk Display The TeemTalk window incorporates several special facilities in addition to the standard facilities supported by Microsoft Windows The illustration below shows the various elements of the window which are described in the following sections Control Menu Icon Title Bar Shutdown Button Menu Bar Minimize Button TeemTalk TTO7W Untitled File Edit Settings Help Sek FES 5 E 21209 E Text Cursor Toolbar Minimize Button Emulation Workspace L Selection Cursor Soft Buttons Scroll Arrow Level 1 GErase DErase DVisib Cancel Setup Vieulp ViewDn RstUieu DefView Patterns Local Pause VT188 881 881 verstrike Mode Printer Ready Window Border Status Bar Window Corner The Title Bar The title bar displays
362. trokes in queue KPRESS Perform function of specified key KRAW Retrieve keystroke from intercept queue KRCV Specifies treatment of received keyboard characters KSTR Treat following as macro command s SETUP FACT Assert factory default settings GETINI Get setting from initialization file PGET Get setup parameter or attribute value PSET Set setup parameter or attribute value RST Reset TeemTalk SAVESET Save current setup configuration SETINI Set setting in initialization file 12 21 Creating A Script File STRING OPERATIONS DECRYPT Decrypt encrypted string and place in variable ENCRYPT Encrypt string and place in variable FSTR Format string to specified length and alignment LEN Count characters and spaces in variable LOW Convert uppercase characters to lowercase amp place string in variable LSTR Copy number of characters from left of string amp place in variable MSTR Copy number of characters from middle of string amp place in variable PARSE Parse string using specified item and place in variables PACK Remove redundant spaces in string PACKTAB Reduce multiple spaces tabs to a single tab PUT Send variable or string to host RSTR Copy number of characters from right of string amp place in variable UPP Convert lowercase characters to uppercase amp place string in variable WRT Display variable or string at cursor position VARIABLES CONV Convert data from one variable type to anot
363. trol Shift i6 s Default Alt lt vT_cCsiz gt Euro Sign Predefined Macros Non Volatile Apply VK CONTROL z i 3 11 Keyboard Configuration The Predefined Macros option at the bottom of this dialog box enables you to select from a list of standard functions associated with the current terminal emulation Clicking the arrow button will display a list box in which the names of valid key functions called virtual key names are shown Note The Virtual Key Names appendix lists all the functions and associated virtual key names for each terminal emulation Before making a selection from this list box click the pointer in the text box next to the key combination that will be required to perform the function that is Normal key pressed on its own Shift key shifted etc For example to assign the Help key function to the key combination Alt F1 click the pointer in the text box next to Alt display the Predefined Macros list box and scroll through the selection until VT HELP is displayed click the pointer on it then click the Apply button The current function of the Alt F1 key combination will be replaced with the Help function indicated in the text box by VT If you want the mapping of this key to be saved when you perform a Save Session make sure the Non Volatile box is checked Click the OK button to activate the change and close the dialog box Note that yo
364. tton Most of the settings in this dialog box affect how outbound and inbound packets are treated These settings may need to be reflected by the remote Kermit as well Start of Packet Factory default CTRL A i e SOH This specifies the character which is used to mark the start of a Kermit packet The character should be changed if the remote host intercepts it Timeout in secs Factory default 5 This specifies how long the remote Kermit should wait before timing out Padding count Factory default 0 This specifies the number of padding characters to be sent before the packet Padding char Factory default CTRL i e NULL This specifies the character to use for padding 8 10 File Transfer End of line char Factory default CTRL M i e CR This specifies the character which terminates the packet Quote char Factory default This specifies the character used to indicate that the next character is in the decimal range 0 31 128 159 or is a delete character 127 Packet size Factory default 80 This specifies the maximum byte size of a packet from the sequence number byte and including the checksum characters Checksum Type Factory default 1 Byte This specifies the type of checksum computation used 1 Byte and 2 Byte selects the standard Kermit 1 byte and 2 byte checksum computations respectively 3 Byte CRC selects a cyclic redundancy checksum computation which is useful when operatin
365. tu start ipc textfileslpassword If the character is not included the command will fail Note Only the remote operation commands listed in the FTU SET amp GET Parameters section of this chapter are valid 12 43 Creating A Script File FTU START Syntax FTU START command This will start a file transfer where command can either be a variable or a string which usually relates to the name of the file to send or receive The ftu set command is used prior to ftu start to specify whether you are sending or receiving a file For example ftu set how send ftu start fred doc If how is set to remote or local this would invoke the limited operations available For example ftu set how local ftu start c transfer files would change the local directory to that specified and ftu set remote change dir ftu set how remote ftu start sparc transfer_fileslpassword would change the remote directory to that specified Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command Note The remote finish bye and logout commands will ignore the string associated with ftu start GETINI Syntax GETINI section entry variable lt ini file gt This enables you get a setting from an initialization file where section is a string or string variable see var which specifies the heading of the command group for example tt07w for Teem
366. u are already in a subdirectory then an additional Yes To Parent Directories Also box will appear Clicking No will transfer the remaining files and any subdirectories from the current position in the directory tree without waiting for further confirmation then return you to the next directory up Clicking Yes will transfer all the files and subdirectories from the original starting point without waiting for further confirmation Clicking No will cancel the named file or directory while allowing the next file or directory in the selection to be displayed for confirmation Usually clicking Cancel will cancel the selection and close the dialog box However if you are in a subdirectory then a Cancel Parent Directories Also box will appear Clicking No will cancel the transfer at the current position in the directory tree and the next directory up will be displayed ready to continue with the transfer Clicking Yes will terminate all transfers 9 When you have finished transferring files disconnect from the host either by clicking the following button in the toolbar or by selecting Disconnect from Host in the Session menu 10 To close the TTWFTP window display the File menu and select Exit 10 5 File Transfer Note that if you try to exit without disconnecting from the host the following message box will be displayed TTW32FTP 22 Connection is still active Are you sure you want to exit Clicking Y
367. u will now have two keys which emulate the same function the default mapping and the mapping you have just specified You can either leave them this way or assign a new function to the key which was mapped by default When you have finished remapping the keyboard click the OK button in the Keyboard Macros dialog box to close it and cause TeemTalk to assert the changes You can save the new keyboard mapping so that TeemTalk will reassert it each time it is loaded or reset by displaying the Save Session As dialog box selecting the Keyboard Macros option then clicking the OK button Programming A Key Most of the keys on the keyboard may be programmed with up to five definitions each Keys that cannot be redefined include Shift Caps Lock Alt Alt Gr and Print Screen Both Ctrl keys can be redefined To program a key click the key in the upper layout which represents your keyboard The Define Key Macro dialog box will be displayed This dialog box shows the current definitions of all the following combinations for the selected key Key Shift Key Control Key Control Shift Key Alt Key Each key combination may contain a string of up to 127 characters The combined total of all the characters that may be programmed into keys is determined by the 127 character limit per definition and the amount of memory available in your PC 3 12 Keyboard Configuration All keyboard macros can be saved so that TeemTalk will reassert
368. uickly move the text cursor Move the mouse cursor to the required position then click the mouse button with modifier key s held down assigned with the Move Cursor function The text cursor will then jump to that position Toolbar Toolbar This chapter describes how to use and redefine the toolbar and associ ated floating button palette Using The Toolbar The toolbar and associated floating button palette provide a quick way of actioning commands or displaying setup dialog boxes by just clicking a button TeemTalk displays a toolbar below the menu bar by default Fee Ae BS A 8 2 2 2 Ie The toolbar contains a series of buttons with graphical representations of their functions These buttons are predefined with functions found in the setup menus and are described in the next section You can redefine all the buttons and add or remove buttons from the toolbar via the Button Tools dialog box which is described later The toolbar can be pulled away from the menu bar and floated on the display by positioning the mouse pointer anywhere in the toolbar except on a button holding down the left mouse button then dragging the pointer down until the toolbar outline changes shape Releasing the mouse button will display the floating button palette Button To ERROR FECAL The Toolbar The floating button palette contains the same buttons as the toolbar You can move
369. umbers for this command FILE COPY Syntax FILE COPY filename lt destname gt This will copy the file specified by the filename string or string variable to the specified destination where the lt destname gt string or string variable can be a full path name just a filename or just a path For example file copy myfile tmp distrib source work newfile tmp will create the file newfile tmp in the directory distrib source work The Error Numbers section lists the possible error numbers for this command FILE DELETE Syntax FILE DELETE lt filespec gt Deletes the file specified by the string or string variable lt filespec gt Refer to the Error Numbers appendix for a list of possible error numbers for this command FILE OPEN Syntax FILE OPEN lt variable gt lt filespec gt lt operation gt This command is used to open a specified file assign an integer to identify the file and specify whether the file is to be created read written to or any combination of these where variable is a previously defined integer variable see var which will be used to store an integer which will identify the file for future commands This will be referred to as the lt handle gt in other file command descrip tions lt filespec gt is string or string variable containing the name of the file on which operations will be performed This can be a file which already exists or a new file which will be cr
370. und task When the transfer begins an icon of an open blue book appears When the transfer has been completed the book closes and a cross or a tick on the icon indicates whether or not the transfer was successful B DOSLANAW FTF Initiator sending DOSLANAW FTF Initiator FROMTU2 TXT Initiator You can maximize the book icon at any time to display information on the state of the transfer When the transfer is in progress a count of bytes transferred is updated Any messages relating to the transfer such as failure messages from the remote file transfer responder are displayed in the window Initiator sending FROMTU2 TXT Disconnected Taking input from CAtempYVftf C05 TMP Sending CATTLKWINYTT320PAFROMTU2 TXT to FROMTU2 TXT on tutu Characters sent 159 and received 99 VCS FTP B 80 Windows Vn 6 0 Information from host VCS FTP B 80 Windows Vn 6 04 Transfer satisfactory and complete Information from host Transfer satisfactory and complete 9 3 ICL FTF File Transfer Transfer Options During Transfer xi Details Text Formatting Maximum Record Size i024 Maximum Transfer Size Timeout Interval 5 po Horizontal T ab Settings Local ptions Preserves DRS Compatibility Record Boundaries Retry Connect Horizontal Tabs Debug Transfer This dialog box is displayed by clicking the During Transfer button in the
371. up commands under the startup default heading 11 13 Initialization Commands Private Profile File To Use Initialization File Not applicable Command Line pffilename Default Setting TT W INI 15 either 05 07 or 11 This command line option enables you to specify a different private profile file for TeemTalk to use instead of the default Path For Emulation Settings File WIN INI File NVPath directory Command Line Not applicable Default Setting TEEMTALK This command applies to TeemTalk for Windows 3 1x If you have chosen a different destination directory for the emulation settings file TT W NV to the default directory TEEMTALK you must specify the full directory path using this command Path For Workspace Settings File WIN INI File WSPath directory Command Line Not applicable Default Setting TEEMTALK This command applies to TeemTalk for Windows 3 1x If you have chosen a different destination directory for the workspace settings file TT W WSP to the default directory TEEMTALK you must specify the full directory path using this command Connection Template To Use Initialization File Not applicable Command Line se description Default Setting Untitled This command enables you to override the default connection template used when TeemTalk is loaded as specified in the Open Session dialog box The description must exactly match the description assigned to a connection template alr
372. up headed startup default separating it from the next command group by a blank line scriptfile filename For example to initiate the script file named LOGON the session command group would include the following line scriptfilecLOGON Using A Command Line Option To specify the name of the script file in the Program Item Properties dialog box click the TeemTalk icon once to select it then select File and Properties in the Program Manager window In the Command Line text box type a space after TT07W EXE then the characters sc immediately followed by the name of the script file For example to initiate the script file named LOGON the command line for TeemTalk 07W would read as follows C TEEMTALK TT07W EXE scLOGON Using The File Menu The Run Script option in the File menu displays a dialog box in which you specify the name of the script file to run Note that any parameters refer to the section entitled Assigning Values To Variables are not enclosed by parentheses Clicking the Ok button after entering the name of the file will close the dialog box and the script file will be initiated You can cancel the initiated script file by selecting the Cancel Script option which replaces Run Script while a script is running Refer to the description of the File menu in the Setup Menus chapter for more information Using A Key Or Button Definition You can program a key or button to run a script file when pressed by enclosing
373. uration Blue E Cancel This provides two methods for specifying a different colour one visual and the other numeric the settings initially displayed relate to the colour selected in the Attributes dialog box When you start changing any of the settings the Set Colour box will display the original colour on the left and the new colour on the right 7 42 Setup Menus Visual Method The full range of colours available is displayed in the large colour selection box A target cursor is positioned over the currently selected colour To select a new colour you can either click the mouse pointer over the colour required or drag the target cursor over it The right hand colour of the Set Colour box will change accordingly The lightness of the selected colour can be altered by dragging the triangular pointer up or down the vertical bar to the right When you have finished click OK to apply the change or Cancel to cancel it and return to the Attributes dialog box Numeric Value Method The numeric value of Hue Lightness and Saturation or the Red Green and Blue percentage values can be entered directly in the text boxes or you can click the arrow buttons to cycle through the numeric values The right hand colour of the Set Colour box will change accordingly When you have finished click OK to apply the change or Cancel to cancel it and return to the Attributes dialog box 7 43 Setup Menus Keyboar
374. utton cls Caption FontBold FontItalic FontName FontSize FontStrikethru FontUnderline Height Index Left TabIndex Top Width End Begin CommandButton ttscr Caption FontBold FontItalic FontName FontSize FontStrikethru FontUnderline Height Index Left TabIndex Top Width End Begin CommandButton Caption FontBold FontItalic FontName FontSize FontStrikethru FontUnderline Height Index Left TabIndex I I I I I 5640 735 285 1080 20 6000 5295 Send DDE Info 0 False 0 False MS Sans Serif 7 8 0 False 0 False 255 4 2760 18 5280 1575 Run TT script Exit 0 False 0 False MS Sans Serif 7 8 0 False 0 False 255 0 1080 17 2400 1575 Exit 0 False 0 False MS Sans Serif 7 8 0 False 0 False 255 0 5280 16 13 28 Dynamic Data Exchange Top Width End 5280 1095 Begin CommandButton TTstat Caption FontBold FontItalic FontName FontSize FontStrikethru FontUnderline Height Index Left TabIndex Top Width End Begin Frame Rahmenl Caption FontBold FontItalic FontName FontSize FontStrikethru FontUnderline Height Left TabIndex Top Width End Begin Frame Rahmen2 Caption FontBold FontItalic FontName FontSize FontStrikethru FontUnderline
375. via the Mouse Button Actions dialog box shown overleaf which is displayed from the Settings menu This enables you to specify the function of the left and right mouse buttons when they are pressed on their own or in conjunction with modifier keys You can assign up to six functions to each button Clicking one of the arrow buttons will display a drop down list box which lists all the standard functions that can be assigned Mouse Functions Left Right Normal EdtCopy 7 shit Etend Selection gt Control Action Hotspot Control Shift Select Rectangle Unassigned Ak senach endKewoa Double Click Select word Unassigned OK Cancel Edit The following functions can be assigned Unassigned Send CR Select Send Keyword Extend Selection Middle Button Edit Copy Select Rectangle Edit Paste Select Word Show Hotspots Select and Copy Action Hotspot Cursor Select Move Cursor You can also enter a definition of your own in the text box associated with each button and key combination Definitions are entered in the same way as for keyboard macros and soft buttons as described in the Setup Menus chapter The setting of the Highlight When Actioned option determines whether or not a visual indication is given that a function has been actioned when a hotspot is clicked The Edit button becomes active when you select the Show Hotspots or Action
376. white reversed Once a screen print is initiated by clicking OK another dialog box will be displayed while the screen data is being spooled out to the print manager This enables you to terminate the print process before data is actually printed Print Buffer This will send a copy of all the data contained in the window buffer to the currently selected printer Auto Print This toggles auto print mode on and off as indicated by a tick when auto print mode is on Auto print mode causes each line of data to be transmitted to the printer when the cursor moves to a new line as a result of a carriage return line feed vertical tab or form feed Cancel Print This will cancel the current Print Screen or Print Buffer function Eject Page When TeemTalk is in Auto Print or Printer Controller mode and the Use Print Manager option in the Printer Setup dialog box is checked this option enables data that has been spooled to the printer to be printed This option will be greyed unselectable when TeemTalk is not in Auto Print or Printer Controller mode Run Script This will display a dialog box which enables you to run a script file EET HEN Run Seript HE Script File Name File name Eolders FO Parameters Ba WIN32APP Files in cMtlkwinMtO7w gj Bec E Bean a El Cancel el Fel Edi List les of type Drives Script Files xl c zl Network Windows 3
377. will be displayed TTO7W Your network session is still active Exiting Y Teemfalk will close the connection Cancel This message box can be disabled so that the connection is automatically closed when TeemTalk is exited by using the J command line option or entering the line warnExit off in the initialization file 7 18 Setup Menus Telnet Options Telnet Options x Port Number 23 Telnet Name tek4207 Suppress Echo TN52 Force Negotiation Binary no EOR no hd Break Settings TM with Break ER with Break Cancel This dialog box is displayed when you click the Telnet Options button in the New Connection dialog box when any Telnet protocol is selected in the Type list box Note that the options available and the default settings depend on the current terminal emulation The 3270 and 5250 options are not applicable to this version of TeemTalk Note Many of these settings can be specified in the TeemTalk private profile file Refer to the Initialization Commands chapter for details Port Number This enables you to specify the Telnet port number The default Telnet port number 23 can be substituted with any valid 16 bit port number Specifying a number outside the valid range will cause the setting to default to 1 Telnet Name This enables you to override the name that will be reported for the terminal type over Telnet
378. with Serial Communications which can be obtained by contacting Microsoft and asking for document number Q79988 Virtual Key Names Virtual Key Names This appendix lists all the supported virtual key names which enable you to include a specific key function in a user definition Standard Virtual Key Names Key Function 0 9 A Z Alt same as Menu Alt right Apostrophe Back Slash Backspace Break Caps Lock Comma lt Comma Compose Character Control left Control right Copy Cursor Down Cursor Left Cursor Right Cursor Up Data Talk Delete End Escape Euro Sign Exit teemtalk F1 F12 Forward Slash Hold Screen Home Insert Keypad 0 9 Virtual Key Name VK 0 VK 9 VK A VK 7 VK ALT VK RALT VK OEM 3 VK OEM 5 VK BACK VK BREAK VK CAPITAL VK OEM COMMA VK COMMA VK COMPOSE VK CONTROL VK RCONTROL VK COPY VK DOWN VK LEFT VK RIGHT VK UP VK DATATALK VK DELETE VK END VK ESCAPE VK EUROSIGN VK EXIT VK FI VK F12 VK OEM 2 VK HOLDSCREEN VK HOME VK INSERT VK NUMPADO 9 Key Function Keypad Add Keypad Divide Keypad Decimal Keypad Multiply Keypad Subtract Menu same as Alt Minus _ Not Sign C Number Sign st Num Lock Less Than Sign lt gt Page Down Page Up Paste Pause Period gt Plus Print Screen Print Screen Return Scroll Lock Semicolon Separator Setup S
379. xi S c vu 33 OCTAL KEY ESC z beca 1B HEXADECIMAL The ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange character set will be selected when the Keyboard Language option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to North American or the Multinational option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is selected This table forms the first half of the Multinational character set the second half of which is the DEC Additional set D 3 Character Sets DEC ADDITIONAL MULTINATIONAL 8 BIT CHARACTER SET VT220 Alpha Mode 1 i i 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 DECIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL This is the second half of the Multinational character set when TeemTalk is in VT220 Alpha overall mode the first half is the ASCII character set These characters may be generated when TeemTalk is in VT220 7 or 8 bit mode and the Multinational option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is selected D 4 Character Sets NATIONAL REPLACEMENT CHARACTERS VT220 Alpha Mode BINARY BIT OOoOOo ococo OCTAL DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL A wo 140 173 96 123 60 7B a wo mm gt gt 1 British Canadian Dan
380. ynamic data exchange DDE by TeemTalk Troubleshooting Provides answers to the most commonly asked questions Virtual Key Names Lists all the virtual key names that enable you to include a specific key function in a user definition for key macros soft buttons hotspots etc Key Reference Numbers Lists all the valid key reference numbers used for key programming in Tek Primary Setup and host commands and the script language PSET and PGET commands Character Sets Shows the character set code tables supported by TeemTalk Host Command Summary Lists the host commands that are supported in each terminal emulation mode Introduction Terms amp Conventions This User s Guide uses the following terms and conventions 1 References to TeemTalk in the main text of this User s Guide apply equally to TeemTalk 05W TeemTalk 07W and TeemTalk 11W for Windows 3 1x 95 and NT unless indicated otherwise Some sections of this User s Guide assume you are using TeemTalk 07W or TeemTalk 07W32 when describing various procedures References to TT07W in filenames and commands apply to TeemTalk 07W and TeemTalk 07W32 and unless indicated otherwise should be substituted with TT05W if you are using TeemTalk 05W or TeemTalk 05W32 or TT11W if you are using TeemTalk 11W or TeemTalk 11W32 An asterisk in a filename or directory name must be substituted with the number indicating the version of your TeemTalk software unless specified

Xerox -05W Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents